JP2024042133A - Heating cooker and heating cooking system - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a heating cooker and a heating cooking system that can accurately obtain recipe data from a communication terminal and are convenient for users.SOLUTION: A heating cooker has a display portion, and a control device obtaining recipe data from data providing means such as an external communication terminal, and gradually obtains the recipe data by dividing it into a cooking step 1 part by one heating source and a cooking step 2 part by another heating source. Therefore, by respectively operating a first part specific input key and a second part specific input key that can by operated by a user in advance, a confirmation signal is returned to the outside each time. After transmitting the confirmation signal, each setting information on a first part and a second part is sequentially obtained. In a display screen on the communication terminal side, when the recipe data are displayed, input keys for transmitting the first and second part data are displayed, and by operating the input keys, setting information on a cooking step 1 and a cooking step 2 is transmitted to the heating cooker.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 57

Description

The present disclosure relates to a heating cooker that heats an object to be heated, such as a pot placed on a top plate, and a heating cooking system that uses the heating cooker.

There are roughly three types of heating cookers based on the environment in which they are used.
One of them is the so-called "built-in type", which is installed in kitchen furniture such as a kitchen counter. The second type is a "stationary type" that is placed at a predetermined position on kitchen furniture, such as a gas table (also referred to as a "gas combustion table"). The third type is a small and portable "tabletop type" that can be placed anywhere on a dining table or the like.

There are many types of "built-in" heating cookers that are equipped with multiple types of heating sources, and they are popular as they can be used for various types of cooking. However, since it is installed inside kitchen furniture, the external dimensions must be designed according to general kitchen furniture standards, and there is more freedom in design compared to "stationary" or "tabletop" types. The degree of difficulty is much lower, and the difficulty level of making a practical product is high.

As a typical built-in heating cooker, multiple heating ports are placed on the top of the main unit, and the heating ports perform induction heating. However, there are devices that are equipped with a "heating chamber" (hereinafter collectively referred to as a "heating chamber") and that heat cooking is performed by introducing microwaves from a microwave heating source into the heating chamber (for example, see Patent Document 1). ). A device equipped with a plurality of heating sources with different heating principles is called a composite cooking device.

JP 2022-117570 (Page 1, Figure 29) JP 2015-158345 A (Page 1, FIG. 15) JP 2019-053950 (Page 3, Figure 1) JP2013-213663A (Page 10, Figure 7)

As proposed in the above-mentioned Patent Document 1, in the case of a combined heating cooker, the number of heating means and input operation units increases to a plurality, and the task of the user individually setting one cooking menu becomes more complicated.
In view of this, it has been proposed to transmit recipe data from a smartphone (communication terminal) to each heating source of a cooking appliance and cook using the recipe data, as disclosed in Patent Document 2.
However, in order to set recipe data in a cooking device via a communication terminal, the user must consider and select the timing of communication between the cooking device and the communication terminal and the heating source to be used each time. In addition, in the case of a cooking menu in which multiple heating means are used in combination to cook one dish, it is assumed that there will be multiple cooking steps, so there is a concern that the user may be confused in operating the input operation unit. However, the above-mentioned Patent Documents 1 and 2 do not yet provide sufficient measures to address these issues. This may lead to confusion for the user and may also lead to failure of data communication for the cooking menu. In other words, it is necessary to notify the user in a timely manner depending on the state of cooperation between the cooking device and the communication terminal.

Furthermore, in the heating cooking system described in Patent Document 3, when the communication terminal and the cooking device are within a communicable range, the communication state is automatically connected. Therefore, even if there is no intention to use the cooking device, if a person with a communication terminal that is capable of transmitting information to control the cooking device comes within communication range, the control information for the cooking device will be transmitted. There is a risk that it may be sent to the heating cooker unintentionally.
Furthermore, in Patent Document 4, in order to transmit setting information from the communication terminal (information terminal) side to the heating device at each stage for two of the cooking procedures (processes), the transmission information is displayed on the display section of the communication terminal. A configuration has been proposed that displays a message indicating that the timing has come. However, even in Patent Document 4, the cooperative relationship between the cooking device and the communication terminal is not sufficiently considered, and improvements are still needed in terms of the configuration of the cooking device and the method of providing setting information. There is room for

A first object of the present disclosure is to obtain a highly convenient heating cooker and heating cooking system in which various cooking menus can be set on the heating cooker from a communication terminal by improving user operability. There is a particular thing.

The heating cooker according to the first disclosure includes:
an input operation section;
heating means;
a communication section that wirelessly communicates with the outside;
Notification means;
a control device that executes cooking using recipe data acquired from the outside via the communication unit,
The control device acquires the recipe data in two stages: a first part that sets a cooking process 1 using the heating means, and a second part that sets a cooking process 2 that uses the heating means,
The control device includes:
(1) a notification step 1 in which the notification means performs a specific notification A that specifies the input operation section related to the first part;
(2) After the notification step 1, a notification step 2 in which the notification means performs a specific notification B specifying the input operation section related to the second part;
(3) a confirmation step 1 of transmitting selection information A when the input operation unit notified by the specific notification A is operated;
(4) a confirmation step 2 of transmitting selection information B when the input operation unit notified in the notification step 2 is operated;
to carry out,
This is a configuration characterized by the following.

The heating cooker according to the second disclosure includes:
an input operation unit having a specific input key A and a specific input key B;
heating means;
a communication section that wirelessly communicates with the outside;
notification means,
a control device that executes cooking using recipe data acquired via the communication unit,
The control device acquires the recipe data in two stages: a first part that sets a cooking process 1 using the heating means, and a second part that sets a cooking process 2 that uses the heating means,
The control device includes:
(1) Proceeding to a step in which setting information A for the first portion can be acquired when the specific input key A is operated after the notification means notifies that the recipe data regarding the first portion can be acquired;
(2) Proceeding to a step in which setting information B for the second portion can be acquired when the specific input key B is operated after the notification means notifies that the recipe data regarding the second portion can be acquired. ,
This is a configuration characterized by the following.

The cooking system according to the third disclosure includes:
A heating cooker having multiple input operation units and a communication function;
A communication terminal connected to the heating cooker via wireless communication,
The communication terminal is
(1) Displaying the first screen and the second screen sequentially on the terminal side display unit,
(2) Displaying recipe data related to the selected cooking item on the first screen in the order of a first display part related to cooking process 1 and a second display part related to cooking process 2,
(3) when the first display part displayed on the first screen is selected, switching the display to the second screen displaying information specifying the input operation section used in the cooking step 1;
(4) Displaying on the second screen an input key that allows setting information A regarding the cooking step 1 of the recipe data to be transmitted;
(5) when the input key is operated, transmitting the setting information A regarding the cooking process 1 selected on the first screen to the heating cooker;
This is a configuration characterized by the following.

The cooking system according to the fourth disclosure includes:
A heating cooker having a display section, a plurality of specific input keys provided on an input operation section, and a communication function;
A communication terminal connected to the heating cooker via wireless communication,
The communication terminal includes a recipe selection unit that displays recipe data regarding the food to be cooked on a terminal display unit,
The communication terminal is
(1) sequentially displaying a first screen and a second screen on the terminal side display unit;
(2) On the first screen, recipe data for the to-be-cooked object to be covered by the recipe data is displayed in the order of a first display part related to cooking process 1 and a second display part related to cooking process 2;
(3) Displaying on the first screen an input key for transmitting preview information 1 to notify that the cooking process 1 displayed on the first screen has been selected;
(4) When the transmission process is performed using the transmission input key, the display is switched to the second screen;
When the heating cooker receives the preview information 1, the heating cooker displays information specifying the specific input key corresponding to the cooking step 1 on the display section, and the specific input key displayed on the display section is If operated, it emits selection information A,
When the communication terminal receives the selection information A, it becomes possible to transmit the setting information A regarding the cooking process 1 to the heating cooker;
This is a configuration characterized by the following.

The heating cooker according to the fifth disclosure includes:
a first heating means and a second heating means;
an individual operation section dedicated to one heating means among the heating means;
a shared operation section for the first heating means and the second heating means;
a communication section that wirelessly communicates with the outside;
notification means,
a control device that executes cooking using recipe data acquired via the communication unit,
The individual operation unit has a first specific input key,
The shared operation unit has a second specific input key,
The control device includes:
(1) a notification step of specifying one of the first specific input key or the second specific input key and notifying it in the notification means;
(2) When the first specific input key or the second specific input key specified by the notification means is operated, unique selection information is transmitted to the first specific input key or the second specific input key, respectively. a confirmation step to
Execute sequentially,
The control device stores recipe data necessary for executing one cooking menu into a first part that sets a cooking process 1 that uses the first heating means, and a cooking process 2 that uses the second heating means. It has a function to obtain the second part in two stages, which sets the
The control device transmits the selection information in response to operating the first specific input key or the second specific input key specified in the notification step;
This is a configuration characterized by the following.

According to the present disclosure, there is provided a heating cooker that can be used in conjunction with a communication terminal to support a wide range of various types of heating cooking and that contributes to improving the efficiency of user input operations and reducing the input load, and heating cooking using the heating cooking device. system can be provided.

FIG. 1 is a configuration diagram of a heating and cooking system according to a first embodiment of the present disclosure. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the installed state of the heating cooker in Embodiment 1 of FIG. 1; FIG. 3 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2. 3 is a schematic plan view of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2. FIG. FIG. 3 is an enlarged plan view of a central display section and a central operation section of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2; FIG. 3 is an enlarged plan view of a left display section, a left heating power display section, and a left operation section of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2; FIG. 3 is an enlarged plan view of a right display section, a right heating power display section, and a right operation section of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2; FIG. 3 is an enlarged plan view of a central display section, a central operation section, and a central heating status display section of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2; FIG. 3 is an enlarged plan view showing an example of the operation of the central display section of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2; FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of a control device and an input operation section (central operation section) of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing all the types of control menus that can be selected by a central operation unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2; The classification table of the control menu of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the storage structure of various cooking control menus in the cooperative cooking mode and the complex cooking mode and the correspondence of input keys in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2. FIG. Explanatory diagram 1 showing the operation of the central display section in the complex cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the input operation unit and the central display unit in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 in a composite cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the operation of the input operation section and the central display section in the complex cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in the figure. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display contents of the input operation section and the central display section in the complex cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2; Explanatory drawing 1 showing the display contents of the input operation section and the central display section in the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2. Explanatory drawing 2 showing the display contents of the input operation section and the central display section in the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display contents of the input operation section and the central display section in the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2; FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a modification example showing the display contents of the input operation section and the central display section in the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing display contents of the input operation section and the central display section and a display example of the cooperative cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2; FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the central display section in the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2; 3 is a list showing various cooperative cooking menus in cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2; FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram showing a first operation example of the coordinated preheating cooking mode among the coordinated cooking modes shown in FIG. 25 . Explanatory diagram showing operation example 2 of cooperative preheating cooking mode among the cooperative cooking modes shown in FIG. 25. 26 is a step explanatory diagram showing the operation of the cooperative cooking mode shown in FIG. 25. FIG. Flowchart 1 showing the operation of the cooperative cooking mode shown in FIG. 25. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing permission conditions and determination results before shifting to a cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2; Flowchart 1 showing the operation of acquiring recipe data from the outside in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2. 3 is a flowchart showing main input steps for three cooking modes after turning on the main power in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2. FIG. Flowchart 1 showing the input process after turning on the main power in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2. 34 is a flowchart 1 showing an input process in the case of a coordinated cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 33 . Flowchart 1 showing the input process in the case of complex cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 33. 34 is a flowchart 1 showing an input process in the case of a single cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 33. 3 is a flowchart showing main input steps when cooking by acquiring recipe data in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 in three cooking modes after turning on the main power. Flowchart 1 showing the operation of acquiring recipe data from the outside in the cooking device shown in FIG. 33. Flowchart 2 showing the operation of acquiring recipe data from the outside in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 33. 34 is a flowchart showing the basic operation of the control device in the voice input mode in the cooking device shown in FIG. 33. FIG. FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the initial standby screen of the central display section at startup in the cooking device shown in FIG. 33; FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram of the central display section showing the situation before starting cooking by the first heating means in the cooking device shown in FIG. 33; FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the operation steps of the heating cooker control device from acquiring recipe data to finishing the cooking process. FIG. 1 is an enlarged plan view 1 showing a central operation unit and a central display unit when recipe data is acquired and cooking is performed in a cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an enlarged plan view 2 showing a central operation unit and a central display unit when recipe data is acquired and cooking is performed in a cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an enlarged plan view 2 showing a central operation section and a central display section when recipe data is acquired and cooking is performed in a cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the relationship between the cooking steps of the cooperative cooking menu and the operations of the input operation unit when recipe data is acquired from the outside in the heating cooker of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the relationship between the cooking steps of the cooperative cooking menu and the operations of the input operation unit in the heating cooker of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a time chart 1 for explaining the entire recipe data acquisition period and control operation in the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker of the first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 1 is a time chart 1 for explaining the entire recipe data acquisition period and control operation in the complex cooking mode in the heating cooker of the first embodiment. FIG. 50 is a time chart showing a modification example 1 of the time chart shown in FIG. 49; FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the input operation section and the central display section when acquiring recipe data in the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker of the first embodiment. 50 is a time chart showing a second modification of the time chart shown in FIG. 49; 12 is a flowchart showing an operation for displaying food components and nutritional components before transitioning to a heating cooking operation in a cooperative cooking mode using recipe data acquired from an external source. 1 is a block diagram showing the main internal configuration of a communication terminal (information processing terminal) used in the cooking system of Embodiment 1. FIG. 56 is a flowchart 1 showing the operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal device) shown in FIG. 55. 56 is a flowchart 2 showing the operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal device) shown in FIG. 55. 56 is a flowchart showing the operation of the cooking device after receiving data from the communication terminal (information processing terminal) shown in FIG. 55. FIG. 56 is an operation explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the recipe data display screen and the cooking process of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) shown in FIG. 55. FIG. Explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) shown in FIG. 55. 56 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) shown in FIG. 55. FIG. Explanatory diagrams 3 and 4 show display operations of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) shown in FIG. 55. 1 is a time chart 1 showing the cooperative operation of a communication terminal (information processing terminal) and a cooking device in the heating cooking system of the first embodiment. 4 is a time chart 2 showing the coordinated operation between the communication terminal (information processing terminal device) and the cooking appliance in the cooking system of embodiment 1. Time chart 3 showing the cooperative operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) and the cooking device in the heating cooking system of the first embodiment. 5 is a time chart showing the operation of the heating cooker in the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooking system of the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is an enlarged plan view of a central display section, a central operation section, and a central heating status display section of the cooking device used in the heating cooking system of Embodiment 2. An explanatory diagram showing the display contents on the terminal display unit of the communication terminal used in the heating and cooking system shown in Figure 67. FIG. 68 is a block configuration diagram illustrating the relationship between the control device and the central operation section of the cooking device shown in FIG. 67. FIG. 68 is a plan view of a central display section, a central operation section, left and right operation sections, and a central heating status display section of the cooking device shown in FIG. 67; An enlarged plan view of the central display unit, central operation unit, and central heating status display unit of the cooking device shown in Figure 67. Explanatory drawing 1 showing a specific example of a display on the heating cooker side that displays that recipe data for one cooking menu has been received from a communication terminal. Explanatory drawing 2 showing a specific display example on the heating cooker side that displays that recipe data for one cooking menu is being received from a communication terminal. Explanatory diagram 1 showing the display contents on the terminal side display section of the communication terminal used in the heating cooking system shown in FIG. 67. Explanatory diagram 1 showing a modification of display contents on the terminal side display section shown in FIG. 74. Explanatory diagram 2 showing display contents on the terminal side display section shown in FIG. 74. Explanatory diagram 3 showing display contents on the terminal side display section shown in FIG. 74. 12 is a time chart showing, in chronological order, operations between a heating cooker and a communication terminal used in the heating cooking system of Embodiment 3. FIG. 79 is an enlarged plan view showing the operating states of the central display section, central operation section, and central heating status display section of the cooking device shown in FIG. 78; 79 is a flowchart showing the operation of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 78. FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) shown in FIG. 78; 79 is a time chart showing the operation of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 78 in chronological order. 79 is a flowchart showing the operation of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 78 in chronological order.

Hereinafter, a heating cooking system according to the present disclosure will be described with reference to the drawings. In the following explanation, terms indicating directions (for example, "top", "bottom", "right", "left", "front", "back", etc.) are used to facilitate understanding. is for illustrative purposes only. Furthermore, in each figure, the same reference numerals are the same or equivalent, and this is common throughout the entire specification.

Furthermore, in the following description, a composite cooking device having a plurality of types of heating means will also be simply referred to as a "cooking device."
In addition, a cooking device with a cooking space such as an inner pot, such as a rice cooker with one heating means (e.g., an induction heating coil or a sheath heater), is also called a heating cooker. For example, even if such a rice cooker has only one heating means, it can cook multiple types of food such as regular white rice and porridge, and may also have several or more ways of cooking rice. Such rice cookers are equipped with multiple input keys (touch keys, push button keys, etc.) that can select various foods and cooking modes, and improving the operability for users US is one of the issues.

In the following explanation, "an object to be heated placed on the top plate" refers to cases in which an object to be heated, such as a pot, is placed directly on the top surface of the top plate 3, which will be described later. ), etc., the meaning includes both cases where the object to be heated is placed on a support member such as a trivet placed above the top plate and heated.

In the first embodiment, the "second heating means" HM2 refers to a heat source for heating the object to be cooked housed inside the heating chamber 6, which will be described later. It may also be one that uses radiant heat or steam.

In the first embodiment, a magnetron is used as the microwave heating source, but there is no restriction on the microwave oscillation principle or method, such as a microwave oscillator using a semiconductor element. Further, a plurality of heating sources may be provided.

In this first embodiment, the "third heating means" HM3 is called "third" to show the difference from the second heating means HM2, but it has superiority and inferiority to the first heating means HM1. It doesn't mean a relationship.
In addition, in the first embodiment, a heating source using a radiant electric heat source (sheathed heater, mica heater, carbon heater, ceramic heater, infrared heater, radiant heater, etc.) is used, but other forms and methods may be used. It may also be a heating source that generates heat.

The third heating means HM3 is capable of heating and cooking in one heating chamber 6. It is also possible to use a plurality of heat sources having different heating principles, such as a heat source composed of an electric heater or the like and a gas combustor (burner). Further, as the heat source for heating the heating chamber 6, an induction heating source may be used. A steam generator (boiler) (not shown) that supplies high-temperature steam (such as superheated steam) may also be used.

Furthermore, the third heating means HM3 is a heating source that heats the wall surface of the heating chamber 6 from the outside, or a heating source that is installed in the internal space of the heating chamber 6 and heats the atmosphere of the internal space. But it's okay.
Alternatively, a heat generating member that becomes high temperature using an induction heating method is placed in the heating chamber, and this heat generating member heats the wall surface of the heating chamber 6 from the outside, or heats the air inside the heating chamber 6. It's okay to have one.

As a typical example of the induction heating coil (IH coil) mentioned in Embodiment 1, about 30 thin copper wires or aluminum wires of about 0.1 mm to 0.3 mm are made into a bundle, and this bundle is twisted into multiple pieces. However, there are some that are constructed by winding them into a spiral shape. Alternatively, there is also one made by winding around 1000 to 1500 wires of about 0.05 mm. There is also a proposal to construct the annular conductor made of a flat conductive material and formed into an annular shape. Any of these forms corresponds to an "IH coil" which is the main part of the first heating means HM1 (induction heating source).

In this embodiment 1, "coordinated cooking" refers to cooking that uses two or more heating sources that heat a single cooked item (including food, meat, vegetables, etc.) in different locations and whose heating operation conditions can be set independently.

The above-mentioned "cooperative cooking" corresponds to the case where a plurality of heating means are used at different times. For example, in the process of completing one cooking process, after preheating with a microwave heating source, the food to be cooked is moved to another location, and the cooking is completed by heating with an IH coil at the moved location. This is a type of "cooperative cooking".

In addition, the food to be cooked is heated inside the heating chamber 6 using a gas combustor (burner), and then the food is moved onto the top plate 3 and heated using a gas combustor (burner) or an induction heating source. Heating food to improve the perfection of cooking is also a type of "cooperative cooking."

The "voice input mode" refers to a control mode in which the user US inputs by speaking without touching or pressing the button or operation surface of an input switch (input key).
Types of "voice input mode" include "voice input mode 1" and "voice input mode 2."

The "voice input mode 1" is selected by operating an input key (hereinafter referred to as "common key") that is compatible with both voice input and touch (including pressing) input.
The "voice input mode 2" is selected by operating an input key (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "voice input only key") 180 dedicated to voice input, which will be described later.

If one input operation unit has multiple input keys and one of them is provided with the above-mentioned "dual-purpose key", when the multi-purpose key changes to the above-mentioned "voice input mode 1", other than this multi-purpose key There are two cases in which the input function of (some) input keys (for example, 156M) is temporarily disabled (this control pattern is referred to as "voice input mode 1A"), and a case in which it is not disabled (this control pattern is referred to as "voice input mode 1A"). There are two types (referred to as "voice input mode 1B"). All of these correspond to the "voice input mode 1" here.

When the "voice input only key" 180 is pressed while performing touch input using an input key (for example, 153M or 153L) on one input operation unit, "voice input mode 2" is selected. In this case, after selecting voice input mode 2, the input function of (some) input keys (for example, 156M) other than the voice input dedicated key 180 is temporarily disabled (this control pattern is There are two types: a case in which the control pattern is not disabled (referred to as "voice input mode 2A") and a case in which it is not disabled (this control pattern is referred to as "voice input mode 2B"). Both correspond to the "voice input mode 2" here.

In this embodiment 1, the input operation units 15 include three units in total: a central operation unit 15M, a left operation unit 15L, and a right operation unit 15R.
The central operation unit 15M may be referred to as a "shared operation unit." The left operation unit 15L and the right operation unit 15R may be referred to as "individual operation units."

A specific input key refers to an input means (selection means) that emits a specific signal (selection information: 202) described below, and includes a touch input key, a push button switch, a non-contact switch, and a dial switch. etc. are equivalent. In addition, in the case of cooperative cooking mode KM1, there are at least two types of selection information: "selection information A" for cooking process 1 and "selection information B" for cooking process 2. If there are three cooking processes, the information for cooking process 3 will be called "selection information C."

The individual operation units 15L and 15R are respectively provided with first specific input keys 152L and 152R, which constitute a part of specific input keys.
The shared operation section 15M has a second specific input key 153M. In the first embodiment, the input key 154M is also set as the second specific input key, but one input operation section (in this case, the shared operation section 15M) must be provided with at least one specific input key. Good.

In this first embodiment, "specific notification of input operation unit" (including specific notification A and specific notification B) refers to a specific input means (touch input key, push button switch, etc.) in the input operation unit 15. This refers to notifying the user of the presence of a non-contact input switch (such as a non-contact input switch, etc.), its name, and other identification information through visual or audio information. Here, "notification" includes text and graphic displays, light emission (including flashing) displays, and audio guidance.
Specifically, this includes notifying the existence of the specific input means, for example, three specific input keys (152L, 152R, and 153M), and information prompting the input operations thereof.

When each of the three specific input keys (152L, 152R, and 153M) described above is inputted, it generates individual selection information (202A, 202B, 202C) corresponding to the specific input key. That is, since mutually different selection information (202A, 202B, 202C) is generated, the control device 40 can uniquely identify which specific input key has been operated in the input key identification section 15A of the input operation section 15. For example, the selection information for the specific input key 152L is 202A. The selection information of the specific input key 152R is 202B.
Thereby, the control device 40 can also determine from the input information from the input operation unit 15 which specific input key (152L, 152R, and 153M) has been operated. Note that if the specific input key itself does not have a function to generate the specific selection information A (202A, 202B, 202C), the input operation unit 15 in which the specific input key is arranged will generate the following information for each specific input key: A unique identification number (code) may be assigned and identification information of each specific input key may be transmitted to the control device 40 side.
In the following description, selection information A uses 202 as a representative code. In other words, the reference numeral 202 includes all of the selection information 202A to 202C, and may also mean any one of them. In particular, when distinguishing by cooking process, selection information regarding cooking process 1 is expressed as "selection information A," and selection information regarding cooking process 2 is expressed as "selection information B." express.

When the recipe data CD is acquired and the individual operation units 15L, 15R are operated to heat cooking, the first specific input keys 152L, 152R are selectively operated, and the storage device of the control device 40, which will be described later, is stored. A first cooking program is selected from 42. This "first cooking program" drives the first heating means HM1 to perform induction heating cooking.
Individual cooking menus belonging to the first cooking program are displayed on the left display section 16L and the right display section 16R, respectively. Note that the first specific input keys 152L and 152R also serve as keys that are pressed when selecting a control menu to be performed on the left and right heating ports 4L and 4R, as will be described later. However, the first specific input keys 152L, 152R may be changed to other input keys (for example, 153R, 153L), and may also serve as input keys for selecting the left and right heating ports 4L, 4R. Further, the first specific input keys 152L, 152R may also serve as input keys 154L, 154R, 155L, 155R for instructing increase/decrease of heating time, heating power, etc.

When the recipe data CD is acquired and the shared operation section 15M is operated to perform heating cooking, the second specific input key 153M (154M) is selected and operated, and the storage device 42 of the control device 40, which will be described later, is activated. A second cooking program is selected from.
This "second cooking program" executes heating cooking by driving a combination of two groups: the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the third heating means HM3. . Specifically, individual cooking menus belonging to "cooperative cooking mode" KM1, which will be described later, can be executed.

This cooperative cooking mode KM1 has two or more cooking steps. The cooking menu can be selected using the central operation section 15M while viewing the central display section 16M. Note that, before starting cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, input keys other than the second specific input key 153M are also used to set control conditions (heating power, heating time, etc.).
By selectively operating the second specific input key 153M, a second cooking program is selected from the storage device 42 of the control device 40, and identification information 167, such as the name of a cooking menu that can be executed by the second cooking program, is It can be displayed on the display section 16.

Further, the "second cooking program" includes one in which the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the third heating means HM3 are individually driven to perform heating cooking. For example, it is also possible to conduct induction heating at a specific heating port (center heating port 4C) or to perform cooking using only microwave heating in the heating chamber 6.

"Recipe data" CD refers to data used to control the cooking device 1 in order to heat cook one food item.
One form of recipe data CD includes data specifying the heating means, data specifying the heating process and order, and control conditions during heating (including, but not limited to, heating power, target temperature, heating cooking time, etc.). , all included.

Another form of the recipe data CD does not include data specifying the heating means, data specifying the heating process or order, and only includes some data for executing a cooking menu (for example, hamburger steak). It is something.
For example, when cooking in the cooperative cooking mode described below, information specific to the heating means that executes one cooking menu (including information indicating the attributes of the heating means, information on the heating port, etc.), information on the cooking process, information on the driving This does not include information indicating the order of heating means.
In this case, the data mainly consists of commands, data, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "commands" or "command data") that determine control conditions such as heating capacity and heating time. In this case, if the recipe data CD held by the heating cooker 1 is configured based on the premise of cooking for one person, for example, the recipe data CD stored in the heating cooker 1 is The control conditions (for example, one parameter, heating time) may be changed using a built-in program so as to correspond to servings for one person or four people.

Furthermore, among the recipe data CD, the recipe data for the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is, for example, when the heating cooking process consists of two cooking processes 1 and 2, the first In the case where the heating means HM1 is used in the cooking process 1, a first part M1 that sets the operation content of the cooking process 1 used in the cooking process 1 and a cooking process 2 that uses the second heating means HM2 are set. The cooking device 1 obtains the second portion M2 in two stages.
That is, it is composed of two parts: a first part M1 for setting cooking process 1 using the first heating means HM1, and a second part M2 for setting cooking process 2 using the second heating means HM2. has been done. Note that even in the case where the second heating means HM1 is used in the cooking process 1, the cooking device 1 similarly acquires the "setting information" for each of the cooking processes 1 and 2 separately.

In the following explanation, the "setting information" is information that is set by giving control contents (of the heating means) to the cooking device 1 based on the recipe data CD, which will be explained in detail later. For convenience of explanation, the setting information for the cooking process 1 may be called "setting information A" and the setting information for the cooking process 2 may be called "setting information B" to distinguish them. be.

In the following embodiments, the forms of the recipe data CD as described above will not be specifically explained.
The "display screen" in the following embodiments includes a liquid crystal display screen using a liquid crystal display element (liquid crystal panel) and a display screen using other light emitting methods (organic EL panel, etc.).
It also includes a "pop-up screen" that automatically appears on the display screen. A "pop-up" is a separate window that automatically launches (starts and starts displaying) on the screen of an Internet browser (also called a "web browser").
For example, in the terminal-side display section (display screen) 216 of the communication terminal 200, which will be described later, a first screen 216A, a second screen 216B, etc. will be described, but they may be configured as pop-up screens.

Embodiment 1.
(1. Configuration of cooking system)
Embodiment 1 according to the present disclosure is described in FIGS. 1 to 63.
FIG. 1 will be explained.
The heating cooking system of the first embodiment includes a heating cooking device 1 and a smartphone 200 (also referred to as a high-performance communication terminal, but in the following description, a smartphone 200 (also referred to as a high-performance communication terminal) having a function of performing wireless communication between the heating cooking device 1 and the heating cooking device 1. The cloud server 300 is configured to include a "communication terminal") and a cloud server 300. Note that the communication terminal 200 may be other than a smartphone, and may be, for example, a tablet terminal with a communication function, a personal computer, or the like. In the first embodiment, these devices are collectively referred to as communication terminal 200.

The communication terminal 200 performs wireless communication using a communication method such as WiFi (registered trademark) with a wireless router 340 (FIG. 2) installed in a house (not shown) where the cooking device 1 is used.

The cooking device 1 can acquire at least the recipe data CD1 through wireless communication 330 with the communication terminal 200. Note that the recipe data CD2 acquired by the cooking device 1 via the cloud server described later will be described later.
The communication terminal 200 performs wireless communication 330 with the cooking device 1 using a communication method such as Bluetooth (registered trademark).

The communication terminal 200 accesses the cloud server 330 in an external space via the wireless router 340 (FIG. 2) and a network NW such as the Internet. The cloud server 300 includes at least one recipe data providing server 301.

The recipe data providing server 301 is equipped with a recipe DB (database) 302 that stores recipe data for executing various cooking processes, and the communication terminal 200 accesses a recipe providing site operated by the recipe data providing server 301. Then, various recipe data CD1 are acquired (downloaded) from the recipe DB 302.

As will be explained in detail later, the recipe data CD1 includes information on heating means and control conditions (such as heating power, heating time, temperature, etc.) so that a specific food (for example, "hamburger steak") can be cooked in the cooking device 1. (Including, but not limited to, any one of the commands (command data)). However, as described above, only the unique data identifying the recipe data CD1 may be used.

In the following explanation, recipe data (also referred to as "cooking implementation data") may be explained using codes such as CD1, CD2, etc. However, these codes do not necessarily mean that the contents of the recipe data are different, but are the same. In some cases. These codes (CD1, CD2) are attached based on the sender of the recipe data to facilitate understanding. In addition, when using a reference numeral uniformly for recipe data, "CD" is used.

The heating cooker 1 shown in FIG. a second heating means HM2 that supplies microwaves to the inside of the heating chamber 6 (see FIG. 3) formed inside the heating chamber 6; and a third heating means HM3 for heating by increasing the temperature.

If the upper surface of the top plate 3 is defined as the "first location," then the first heating means HM1 is an induction heating means for heating the object to be heated (a magnetic metal pan) placed in this first location. Alternatively, a gas combustion device equipped with a gas burner for heating a pan made of magnetic metal or non-magnetic metal corresponds to the first heating means HM1.

If a closed space located at a location apart from the first location is defined as a "second location", then the inside of the heating chamber 6 (see FIG. 3) becomes the second location.

The heating cooker 1 has a function of executing a "single cooking mode" KM3 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are each driven independently (independently).

The cooking device 1 has a function of executing a "composite cooking mode" KM2 in which the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 are driven simultaneously, or one of them is driven first and the other is automatically driven later, as a method of cooking one food item. Even when the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 are driven simultaneously, both cases in which the heating ends at the same time and cases in which they end at different times are one operation pattern belonging to the "composite cooking mode" KM2.

In the "compound cooking mode" KM2, a pattern (RG control mode 1) in which the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 are driven simultaneously from the beginning, and after the second heating means HM2, A pattern in which driving of the third heating means HM3 is started (RG control mode 2), and a pattern in which the third heating means HM3 is first driven and then automatically switched to driving the second heating means HM3. (RG control mode 3). In these RG control modes 1 to 3, switching of each heating means is automatically performed when heating cooking is started in the heating chamber 6 (see FIG. 3).

The "compound cooking mode" KM2 does not have a "cooking menu" corresponding to a specific food to be cooked (eg, hamburger steak), unlike the cooperative cooking mode KM1 described later. That is, "control menus" are prepared for each pattern for driving the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3. A single control pattern can be used for a plurality of foods (for example, defrosting meat, boiling vegetables, etc.).

For example, one of the "control menus" is the "RG control mode 1." In the RG control mode (RG composite cooking mode), various foods can be cooked. One of the "control menus," for example, the "RG control mode 1," is controlled by recipe data that defines the control mode, but is not set for each specific food to be cooked.

That is, the operation pattern in which two or more heat sources (the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3) are operated in a predetermined sequence is the complex cooking mode KM2 having a plurality of "control menus". .

On the other hand, recipe data (corresponding to a specific to-be-cooked item) is used to heat-cook the to-be-cooked items placed in the interior of the heating chamber 6 and above the top plate 3 in a predetermined order. The cooperative cooking mode KM1 having a cooperative cooking menu is applied.
That is, the contents of recipe data are different between the composite cooking mode KM2 and the cooperative cooking mode KM1.

In the following description, when indicating the type of control mode, such as a drive pattern of a heating source, it will be referred to as a "control menu." For example, "defrost" is one of the control menus.
On the other hand, when specifying items to be cooked that can be heated, names of dishes, etc., it is called a "cooking menu." For example, "hamburger" is one of the cooking menus.

The heating cooker 1 operates in a "cooperative cooking mode" KM1 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are driven with a time difference determined depending on the operation of the user (user) US. It has the executive function of

The "cooperative cooking mode" KM1 has a pattern in which the first heating means HM1 performs the cooking process 1, and a pattern in which the second heating means HM2 performs the cooking process 1.
For example, in order to finish the cooking process 1 using the first heating means HM1 and move on to the cooking process 2, the food to be cooked is moved to the heating chamber 6, and then the driving of the second heating means HM2 is started. Between the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, there is a "heating suspension period P3" (transition period TR) in which no heating operation is performed. This heating suspension period P3 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46.

In this "cooperative cooking mode" KM1, the recipe data CD is prepared for each specific item to be cooked (eg, hamburger, roast beef, gratin).
The recipe data CD specifies the heating means to be used, the order in which the heating means are driven, and the control conditions for the heating means (including at least one of the heating power, heating time, temperature, etc.) in the cooking process 1 (the first cooking process). 1 portion M1) and cooking process 2 (second portion M2) are designated separately.

The recipe data CD is stored in both the cooking device 1 and the recipe DB 302. The type of recipe data CD in the recipe DB and the type of recipe data CD held in the cooking device 1 do not need to be the same. For example, the recipe data CD of the new cooperative cooking mode KM1 may be sequentially added to the recipe DB 302, and the recipe data CD of the complex cooking menu may be sequentially accumulated.

When the cooking device 1 acquires the recipe data CD for executing the cooperative cooking mode KM1 from the communication terminal 200, the data is acquired in units of one cooking menu selected by the user US on the communication terminal 200. be. This is common not only to the "cooperative cooking mode" KM1 but also to the "compound cooking mode" KM2 and the "single cooking mode" KM3.

That is, in the heating cooker 1, for example, a control menu called "warming" can be selected in the complex cooking mode KM2, but the recipe data CD provided to the heating cooker 1 from the communication terminal 200 is based on such a control menu unit. It is not a cooking menu unit.
Therefore, in the control menu for microwave heating, etc., there are various control menus such as "warming", "manual microwave", "boiling leafy vegetables", "boiling root vegetables", and "defrosting meat", which will be described later. , the communication terminal 200 does not provide the recipe data CD for each control menu. For example, in the case of defrosting, the communication terminal 200 provides recipe data (including identification information) of "defrosting meat" that specifies the object to be heated.

As described above, the communication terminal 200 requests the recipe data providing server 301 to provide the recipe data CD of the desired food to be cooked, and downloads the recipe data CD1 corresponding to the desired recipe (see FIG. 1). .

The communication terminal 200 can transmit recipe data CD2 corresponding to one recipe, generated by the recipe data providing server 301 and acquired from the server 301, to the cooking device 1 (see FIG. 1).
In order to use such a recipe data acquisition function, the user US of the heating cooker 1 accesses the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301) and installs a recipe selection application (hereinafter referred to as "recipe selection application"). ) is installed on the communication terminal 200.

When the user US installs the recipe selection application, the user US performs an operation to register identification information such as the model name of the heating cooker as an initial setting. Through this registration, recipe data CD corresponding to the rated specifications of the cooking device 1 (heating capacity of each heating means HM1 to HM3, etc.) can be obtained from the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301).

Further, the user US pairs the communication terminal 200 and the cooking device 1 using the recipe selection application, and establishes direct wireless communication 330BT between the communication terminal 200 and the cooking device 1. Note that this wireless communication 330BT may use a near field communication (NFC) method.

330WF shown in FIG. 2 indicates wireless communication between the communication terminal 200 and the wireless router 340. The communication method of the wireless communication 330T between the communication terminal 200 and the cooking device 1 uses Bluetooth (registered trademark), which is one of the short-range wireless communication standards. Furthermore, the wireless communication 330WF between the communication terminal 200 and the wireless router 340 uses a wireless LAN communication method such as WiFi (registered trademark).

Although not shown in FIG. 1, in the heating cooking system of the first embodiment, the communication terminal 200 transmits the recipe data CD (corresponding to one recipe) created by the user US to the recipe providing site. (Recipe data providing server 301), the recipe data may be temporarily stored in the recipe DB 302, and then provided to the cooking device 1. In other words, even if the communication terminal 200 is located far away from the house where the cooking device 1 is installed (for example, outside the house), the recipe data CD of the communication terminal 200 can be transferred to the recipe data providing server 301. It is convenient because it can be saved.

A wireless router 340 (see FIG. 2) may be interposed between the heating cooker 1 and the cloud server 300.

In this first embodiment, the recipe data CD may be described as "obtaining" or "restricting the obtaining", so this point will be explained.
When the explanation is "restrict acquisition", it means that the recipe data (specific information forming part or all of it) CD is not entered into the heating cooker 1 from the outside via the communication section 51, which will be described later. It's not a translation. In the cooking device 1, the communication unit 51 once receives recipe data CD from the outside, and temporarily stores it in an appropriate storage area in the storage device 41 (described with reference to FIG. 10). At this time, the contents of the data (attributes, presence or absence of identification information 167, etc.) are analyzed. However, if the data is sent from an external source during the "period for which acquisition is restricted" as described above, it will not be used in the subsequent execution process of the cooking menu (that is, the cooking process). It is automatically erased within a short time (at least when the main power switch 20 is turned off).

In the following explanation, when describing networks such as the Internet lines mentioned above, the unified symbol "NW" will be used.

The “equipment identification information” of the heating cooker 1 is unique information for identifying the heating cooker 1. Specifically, this is important information required when performing information communication, such as the MAC address, the manufacturer's name of the cooking device 1, the model name, the model number, and the manufacturing number.

The cloud server 300 has a function of acquiring information regarding the current status of the cooking device 1, such as operation, stoppage, and standby state, via the network NW.
The cloud server 300 is connected to the target cooking device 1 using the device identification information.

In addition to the recipe database 302, the cloud server 300 includes an information providing server (not shown), which transmits useful information to the cooking device 1 and the communication terminal 200.
In addition to communicating with the communication terminal 200, the cooking device 1 performs a process of periodically (for example, every 5 minutes) performing wireless communication with the cloud server 300. If it is determined that there is some abnormality in the status information (described later) on the cooking device 1 side during the periodic communication, this will be used as a trigger to notify or inquire to the cloud server 300 each time. , performs processing to obtain information for maintaining proper driving. If there is no abnormality, the process automatically returns to repeating periodic communication.

The information providing server (not shown) may be, for example, a server installed by an earthquake information providing organization in a specific area, an external organization such as an electric power company, or a server prepared by the manufacturer of the cooking device 1.

The cloud server 300 stores and stores control application software that allows the heating cooker 1 to be remotely controlled. From the communication terminal 200, which will be described in detail later, the remote control described above can be realized by accessing the cloud server 300 and downloading (reading) control application software.

The communication terminal 200 in the present embodiment 1 has a function of transmitting and receiving signals by short-range communication while being located within a few centimeters of (or may be in contact with) the input/output unit of the cooking appliance 1. Note that this short-range communication is an international standard technology for wireless communication known as Near Field Communication (abbreviation: NFC).

In this NFC communication, a so-called wireless tag (NFC tag) is embedded in the induction heating cooker 1 side.
On the other hand, it is also possible to send control data from the communication terminal 200 side to the NFC storage section of the cooking device 1 and controlling the cooking device 1 according to the control data.

Next, FIG. 2 will be explained.
600 is kitchen furniture in which a heating cooker 1 and the like are installed. 600D is a water supply port installed in the kitchen furniture 600.
340 is a wireless router capable of wireless communication with the cooking device 1. This wireless router 340 is also an access point for a network NW such as the Internet.

The heating cooker 1 has an object to be heated (such as a magnetic metal pot) placed on a top plate 3 that covers the upper surface thereof, and an IH coil 9 (signs 9C, 9L, 9R shown in FIGS. 3 and 4). ) induction heating. That is, the top plate 3 has a left heating port 4L, a right heating port 4R, and a center heating port 4C.

An exhaust port cover 5 is provided on the inner side (rear side) of the top plate 3. The exhaust port cover 5 is made of punched metal or a grid-like metal member in which numerous small through holes are formed, and the exhaust port cover 5 is breathable throughout and has low ventilation resistance. Exhaust gas discharged from the inside of the cooking device 1 passes through the exhaust port cover 5 and exits the cooking device 1.

A door (heating door) 7 that opens and closes a front opening of a heating chamber 6 (see FIG. 3) arranged inside the main body 2 is provided on the front surface of the main body 2 of the cooking device 1 . The door 7 is provided with a handle 8 for opening and closing the door.

(2. Detailed configuration of heating cooker)
Next, the specific structure of the heating cooker 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 3 to 11.
FIG. 3 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device 1 according to the first embodiment, viewed from the side. As shown in FIG. 3, an induction heating coil 9L (hereinafter referred to as "left IH coil") as left induction heating means is provided below the left heating port 4L.

As shown in FIG. 3, the heating cooker 1 is a built-in IH cooking heater that is used by being incorporated into kitchen furniture 600 that has a cooking table on the top. The heating cooker 1 has a main body 2 and a top plate 3 installed on the main body 2. The top plate 3 is exposed on the kitchen top plate that constitutes the top surface of the kitchen furniture 600.

The top plate 3 is composed of, for example, a heat-resistant glass plate and a metal frame attached to the periphery of the glass plate. Three heating ports 4 are provided on the upper surface of the top plate 3: the left heating port 4L, the right heating port 4R, and the center heating port 4C.

The left heating port 4L, the right heating port 4R, and the center heating port 4C indicate an area in which a metal cooking container such as a pot or a frying pan (also referred to as "object to be heated" N regarding the first heating means HM1) is placed. It is something. Guide marks (not shown) are printed on the top surface of the top plate 3 to serve as a guide for placing the object to be heated in the left heating port 4L, right heating port 4R, and center heating port 4C, respectively. It is depicted.

In the cooking device 1, an object N (not shown) (such as a pot made of magnetic metal) is placed on a top plate 3 that covers the upper surface thereof, and is heated by induction using an IH coil 9. 32 is a bottom wall surface that divides the inside of the heating cooker 1 into two independent spaces, upper and lower.
33 is an installation space located above the bottom wall surface 32 inside the heating cooker 1, and the IH coil 9 ( 9C, 9L, 9R) are accommodated.

That is, a right IH coil 9R as a right induction heating means is provided below the right heating port 4R, and a center IH coil 9C as a center induction heating device is provided below the center heating port 4C.

These IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R are circular heating coils formed by winding a thin conducting wire such as a copper wire or an aluminum wire, and generate a high-frequency magnetic field by being supplied with a high-frequency current. As a result, the metal cooking containers (objects to be heated N) placed on the left heating port 4L, right heating port 4R, and center heating port 4C are induction heated.

The heating means including the IH coils 9C, 9L, 9R and their drive circuit (referring to a high frequency power supply circuit such as an inverter circuit, not shown) may be referred to as an induction heating source or a first heating means HM1. be. In the following description, unless there is a particular contradiction, "first heating means" HM1 will be used throughout.

In the vicinity of the IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R, a temperature sensor group 30 (Fig. 10 ) is installed. One temperature sensor 30A (not shown) constitutes one sensor in the temperature sensor group 30. The temperature sensor here may be either a contact temperature sensor such as a thermistor or a non-contact temperature sensor such as an infrared sensor.

The heating chamber 6 is provided inside the main body 2, below the IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R. The heating chamber 6 is surrounded by metal walls such as stainless steel, and is a space for heating the food (foodstuffs, ingredients) contained within the heating chamber 6.

The food to be cooked may be placed in a heat-resistant plastic container, porcelain, or heat-resistant glass dish, or placed in a container in the heating chamber 6. In that case, the dish or container may be placed in the heating chamber 6. Sometimes referred to as "container to be heated." However, since these containers are not induction heated by the IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R, even if they are placed in the heating port 4 of the top plate 3, they are not called the "heated objects" N of the IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R. do not have.

A horizontally long rectangular opening (not shown) is formed on the front surface of the heating chamber 6 to take out and take out the food to be cooked. The opening in the front of the heating chamber 6 is covered by a door 7 so as to be openable and closable. The door 7 is rotatably supported by the main body 2 via a hinge and an arm (not shown). Thereby, the door 7 is configured to open forward to a horizontal position using its lower end as a fulcrum (rotation center). Note that the door 7 may be pulled forward integrally with a support member (referring to a structure such as a shelf, not shown) that supports the container to be heated from below by a slide rail (not shown).

The door 7 is provided with an opening/closing detection section 10 for detecting whether the door 7 is opened or closed. The opening/closing detection section 10 is, for example, a microswitch or an infrared sensor. A microwave oscillator 11 is provided at the rear of the heating chamber 6 to heat the food to be cooked stored in the heating chamber 6. This microwave oscillator 11 is composed of, for example, a magnetron, and performs so-called microwave heating, in which the food to be cooked placed in the heating chamber 6 is heated by irradiating microwaves into the heating chamber 6. .

The heating means including the microwave oscillator 11 and its drive circuit (referring to a high frequency power supply circuit such as an inverter circuit, not shown) may be referred to as a second heating means HM2.

The heating chamber 6 is also provided with an upper radiant heat heating means 12a and a lower radiant heat heating means 12b which heat the food from above and below using so-called heaters. The upper radiant heat heating means 12a is arranged on the outside or inside ceiling wall of the heating chamber 6, and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b is arranged on the inside or outside wall of the heating chamber 6, both of which are sheathed heaters.

Other types of radiant heat heating means (e.g., mica heaters, carbon heaters, etc.) may be installed outside the heating chamber 6. Figure 3 shows an example in which the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b are both installed in close contact with the outer wall surface of the heating chamber 6.

The heating means including the upper radiant heating means 12a, the lower radiant heating means 12b, and their drive circuits (not shown) may be referred to as third heating means HM3. Note that the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b may be collectively referred to as "radiant heat heating means", and in that case, the reference numeral "12" is used.

Further, the heating chamber 6 is provided with an infrared sensor 13 as a non-contact temperature sensor in order to detect the temperature of the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 6 without contact. The temperature range detected by this infrared sensor 13 is set, for example, to -20°C to 100°C. Thereby, the degree of heating of the food to be cooked can be detected in real time with high accuracy, for example, in steps of 1°C. This infrared sensor 13 also constitutes one sensor in the temperature sensor group 30 (see FIG. 16).

The heating chamber 6 is also provided with a contact temperature sensor (for example, a thermistor sensor) 14 that is an indoor temperature sensor that detects the ambient temperature inside the heating chamber 6 or the wall surface temperature of the heating chamber 6 .

Since the thermistor sensor 14 detects temperature by detecting a change in temperature as a change in electrical resistance, the upper limit of the temperature that can be detected is about 250°C. This thermistor sensor 14 also constitutes one sensor in the temperature sensor group 30. Note that the thermistor sensor 14 may be installed at two locations, near the bottom surface and near the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 6, as shown in FIG.

Next, FIG. 4 will be explained.
FIG. 4 is a top view of the cooking device 1 according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 4, on the front side of the upper surface of the top plate 3 of the cooking device 1, a left operation section 15L, a center operation section 15M, and a right operation section 15R are provided. These three operation sections may be collectively referred to as the "input operation section", and in that case, the reference numeral 15 is used.

On the back side (rear side) of the left operation section 15L, the center operation section 15M, and the right operation section 15R, there are a left firepower display section 17L, a center display section 16M, a right firepower display section 17R, and a left display section 16L and a right display section. 16R and a central heating status display section 17M are provided.

The left display section 16L, the center display section 16M, and the right display section 16R may be collectively referred to as a "display section", and in that case, the reference numeral 16 is used. Note that the central display section 16M has a horizontally long liquid crystal display screen.

The left firepower display section 17L and the right firepower display section 17R display the firepower level using light emitting elements (LEDs, etc.), and do not have display screens.

The left thermal power display section 17L, the right thermal power display section 17R, and the central heating status display section 17M may be collectively referred to as a "thermal power display section", and in that case, the reference numeral 17 is used.

Further, a button (key) 20A for operating the main power switch 20 (see FIG. 10) is provided adjacent to the right operation section 15R. The main power switch 20 turns on or off the main power of the cooking device 1 . The button (key) pressed during the ON-OFF operation is the operation button 20A.

When the main power supply of the cooking device 1 is OFF, pressing the operation button 20A for, for example, a few seconds turns the main power supply ON. Also, when the main power supply of the cooking device 1 is ON, pressing the operation button 20A for, for example, a few seconds turns the main power supply OFF.

Next, FIG. 5 will be explained.
In FIG. 5, an input key 180 for selecting a voice input mode is arranged at the right end of the central operation section 15M. This input key 180 may be a mechanical switch or may be an input key of a touch type input switch like input keys 153M to 159M described later.

When the input key 180 for selecting voice input is pressed once, the next input can be performed by voice.
When this input key 180 is pressed, the state is switched to "voice input mode 2".
However, this input key 180 cannot select the heating means or heating port (first heating means HM1) by voice.

Therefore, the input key 180 needs to be operated, for example, after a touch operation ("short press") of the input key 153L for selecting the heating port 4L. In other words, if you "long press" the input key 153L, you can switch to voice input mode 2, but if you "short press" instead of "long press", if you press the input key 180 after that, you can switch to voice input mode 2. You can switch from voice input mode 2 to voice input mode 2.

In the central operation unit 15M, when any one of the input keys 153M, 154M, or 155M is touched and then the input key 180 is operated, the operation switches to the "voice input mode 2" and the input processing unit (input restriction unit) 70 in the control device 40 sets the voice signal analysis unit 58 (see FIG. 10) to an input standby state. Note that touching the input key 180 does not affect the input functions of the five input keys 153M, the input key 151M for starting the heating operation, the input key 152M for stopping, and the input keys 153L and 153R of the left and right operation units 15L and 15R. In addition, when the heating cooking operation is started at the left heating port 4L or the right heating port 4R, the "voice input mode 2" set by the input key 180 is released.

As described above, the "voice input mode 2" based on the input of this input key 180 is based on the touch form of specific (touch type) input keys such as various touch type input keys 153M, 154M, 155M, etc., which will be described later. This is different from "voice input mode 1" which is set accordingly.

When the input key 180 is pressed, "voice input mode 2" is activated from that moment. In other words, it becomes "voice input mode 2". As explained in FIG. 10, when there is an audio signal from the audio signal receiving section 56, the audio signal analyzing section 58 analyzes the contents of the audio one by one and outputs the analysis result to the heating control section 43.

Note that the input key 180 for selecting audio input may limit the "range in which touch input is disabled" to only the central operation unit 15M. In this way, when the input key 180 is pressed, the input function of certain (touch-type) input keys such as various touch-type input keys 154M to 159M arranged on the central operation unit 15M is disabled as described later. be converted into Then, it shifts to an input standby state in which it accepts voice commands from the user US. Note that after the start of the heating operation, the touch input cannot be invalidated using the input key 180, so there is no restriction on the input of various input keys (for example, a stop command using 152M) during the heating operation.

21M is a (center) light emitting section that constitutes a part of the light emitting section 21, and when the input function of the input key 180 and other input keys 153M, 154M, 151M, 152M, etc. is enabled, each of them is activated. The light emitting section 21M emits light. The light emission continues until the input function becomes invalid. Note that one or more light emitting elements 27 (see FIG. 10) such as LEDs are arranged in each of the light emitting sections 21M, and are driven by a light emission control section 26 (see FIG. 10).

As will be explained in detail later, the light emitting section 21 includes, in addition to the (center) light emitting section 21M, a (right) light emitting section 21R corresponding to the right operating section 15R, and a (left) light emitting section corresponding to the left operating section 15L. Contains 21L.
These light emitting parts 21 have a function of indicating that the input function of the input key is valid and prompting the user to operate one input key.
This light emitting section 21 also serves as a "key identifying section." That is, in order to perform a cooperative operation with the communication terminal 200, which will be described later, the light emitting unit 21 should be operated immediately after receiving "notice information 1" 201 (described in FIGS. 59 and 60) from the communication terminal 200. There is a function to display input keys (for example, 152L in FIG. 6) by emitting light. This point will be explained with reference to FIG. 61.

Here, the preview information 201 transmitted from the communication terminal 200 includes preview information 2 and preview information 3 in addition to the preview information 1. However, the preview information 1 means the information on the cooking process 1, the preview information 2 means the information on the cooking process 2, and the preview information 3 means the information on the cooking process 3. These will be described in detail later when the recipe data CD of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is explained.

In the central operation unit 15M, an input key 151KP for function setting is arranged at a position adjacent to the left side of the input key 153M. The function of this input key 151KP will be explained later.

In the first embodiment, the input mode in which the cooking device 1 is controlled by the user US's pressing operation (including light contact) with a fingertip or the like is referred to as a "touch input mode." Therefore, various input keys 151M to 159M, 151R to 155R, and 151L to 155L, which will be described later, may be referred to as a "touch input mode selection section."

Next, FIG. 6 will be explained.
FIG. 6 is an enlarged view of the left display section 16L, left firepower display section 17L, and left operation section 15L according to the first embodiment. The left display section 16L displays information regarding cooking in the left heating port 4L, and is configured with, for example, a liquid crystal display.

The left display section 16L shows the set time for "timer cooking" for the object to be heated placed on the left heating port 4L, the elapsed time since the start of the heating operation at the left heating port 4L, or the timer setting time. Displays the remaining time until the end.

The above-mentioned "timer cooking" is cooking in which the heating operation is performed for the time (set time) set (input) by the user US (for example, using the input key 151L, etc.), and when the set time has elapsed, the heating is automatically started. This is one of the convenient functions for the user US because the operation is stopped.

The left display section 16L displays the automatically set temperature (default temperature), the current temperature, etc. when preheating cooking in the left heating port 4L is selected. The automatically set temperature (default temperature) refers to the target temperature of the bottom surface of the object to be heated (for example, a metal pot) when the object to be heated (for example, a metal pot) is heated in the left heating port 4L. The default temperature can be arbitrarily changed within a certain range by the user US. Further, for example, the target temperature can be set to an arbitrary temperature by touching the input keys 155L and 154L (however, if the temperature exceeds a predetermined allowable range, the setting input will be rejected by the heating control unit 43 shown in FIG. 10). It has become so).

The left heating power display section 17L is composed of a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) arranged horizontally in a straight line, and displays the heating power of the left heating port 4L in multiple stages. The left firepower display section 17L expresses the firepower by switching the lighting state (on, off, blinking, etc.) of a plurality of LEDs or by switching the lighting color. Thereby, it is possible to notify the user US of the firepower in an intuitive and easy-to-understand manner.

The left operation section 15L is used to input operations related to heating and cooking at the left heating port 4L.
As shown in FIG. 6, the left operation section 15L includes five input keys 151L, 152L, 153L, 154L and 155L. These input keys 151L, 152L, 153L, 154L and 155L are touch type keys. For example, it is a capacitive touch sensor (touch switch) that allows input by utilizing a change in capacitance when the user US lightly touches it with a finger or the like.

Light emitting sections 21L are provided corresponding to the input keys 151L, 152L, 153L, 154L and 155L. The light emitting section 21L is composed of a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs), and emits light in response to the operation of the input keys 151L, 152L, 153L, 154L and 155L. Note that the two adjacent input keys 154L and 155L share one light emitting part 21L because they perform the same type of function of increasing/decreasing the thermal power.

The input key 151L is a key that is touched when selecting "timer cooking" in the left heating port 4L. This timer cooking is a cooking method in which the user US sets the heating operation time as described above, and the heating operation is executed only during the set time.

The input key 152L is a key that is pressed when selecting the "control menu" to be executed with the left heating port 4L. Each time the input key 152L is pressed, one can be selected from a plurality of control menus. The "control menu" here includes, for example, boiling water, stewing, frying (automatic cooking), and the like. The driving time, heating power, driving pattern, etc. of the left heating port 4L differ for each control menu.

The control menu in which the left heating port 4L and the right heating port 4R are operated with the left operating section 15L or the right operating section 15R, and the central operating section 15M is not operated is a "single cooking mode" in which all induction heating is used. This is the control menu of KM3. The "single cooking mode" KM3 will be explained later.

The input key 153L is a key that is pressed to select heating cooking in the left heating port 4L. That is, by pressing the input key 153L, cooking using the left IH coil 9L arranged below the left heating port 4L (in the independent cooking mode KM3) is selected. If the input key 153L is pressed again while the left IH coil 9L is being driven, the driving of the left IH coil 9L is stopped, and the induction heating operation is immediately stopped.

The input keys 154L and 155L are keys that are pressed when specifying the heating power for cooking in the left heating port 4L. By pressing the input key 154L on the left side, the firepower is lowered one step at a time. On the other hand, by pressing the input key 155L on the right side, the firepower can be increased one step at a time. The heating power during induction heating cooking in the left heating port 4L has nine levels from the rated minimum heating power (heating power level 1: 150W) to the rated maximum heating power (heating power level 9: 3200W).

One input key 152L of this left operation unit 15L is set as an input key to be operated immediately after receiving "notice information 1" 201 from the communication terminal 200 in order to perform a cooperative operation with the communication terminal 200 described later. has been done. Therefore, when this is operated at a predetermined timing, a "confirmation signal" (selection information A) 202, which will be described later, functions as a "specific input key" that is transmitted in the confirmation step SP3 (described in FIG. 59). . This point will be explained with reference to FIGS. 55 to 60. Note that the input key 152L can be operated at any timing even before the preview information 1 is received, but if it is operated (ON), the reception restriction period (TZ1: Fig. 45, Fig. 60, Fig. 61) is started.

Next, FIG. 7 will be explained.
FIG. 7 is an enlarged view of the right display section 16R, the right thermal power display section 17R, and the right operation section 15R according to the first embodiment. The right display section 16R displays information regarding cooking in the right heating port 4R, and is configured with, for example, a liquid crystal display. The information regarding heating cooking in the right heating port 4R displayed on the right display portion 16R is the same as the information regarding heating cooking in the left heating port 4L.

The right heating power display section 17R is composed of a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs), and displays the heating power of the right heating port 4R in a plurality of stages. The right fire power display section 17R, like the left fire power display section 17L, expresses fire power by switching the lighting state (on, off, blinking, etc.) of a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) or by switching the lighting color.

The right operation unit 15R is used to input operations related to cooking using the right heating port 4R. As shown in FIG. 7, the right operation unit 15R has five input keys 151R, 152R, 153R, 154R, and 155R.

The input keys 151R, 152R, 153R, 154R and 155R are configured similarly to the left operation section 15L. For example, the keys are configured with capacitive touch keys that allow input by utilizing changes in capacitance when the user US lightly touches them with a finger or the like.

Light emitting portions 21R are provided corresponding to the input keys 151R, 152R, 153R, 154R and 155R, respectively. The light emitting section 21R is a light emitting element (LED), and in response to the operation of the input keys 151R, 152R, 153R, 154R, and 155R, the light emitting section 21R corresponding to each input key emits light. However, the two adjacent input keys 154R and 155R share one light emitting part 21R because they perform the same function of increasing/decreasing the firepower.

The input key 151R is a key that is pressed when selecting timer cooking in the right heating port 4R. The input key 152R is a key that is pressed when selecting a control menu to be executed at the right heating port 4R.

The input key 153R is a key pressed to select heating cooking in the right heating port 4R. That is, by pressing the input key 153R, cooking using the right IH coil 9R arranged below the left heating port 4R (in the independent cooking mode KM3) is selected. If the input key 153R is pressed again while the right IH coil 9R is being driven, the driving of the right IH coil 9R is stopped, and the induction heating operation is immediately stopped.

The input keys 154R and 154R are keys that are pressed when specifying the heating power during cooking in the right heating port 4R. By pressing the left input key 154R, the firepower is lowered one step at a time. On the other hand, by pressing the right input key 155R, the firepower is increased one step at a time. The heating power during induction heating cooking in the right heating port 4R has nine levels from rated minimum heating power (heating power level 1) of 150W to rated maximum heating power (heating power level 9) of 3200W.

One input key 152R of this right operation section 15R, like the input key 152L of the left operation section 15L, is used to generate a "confirmation signal" (selection information A), which will be described later, in order to perform a cooperative operation with the communication terminal 200, which will be described later. 202 is a "specific input key".

Next, FIG. 8 will be explained.
FIG. 8 is an enlarged plan view of the central display section 16M, the central operation section 15M, and the central heating status display section 17M according to the first embodiment.

The central display section 16M displays information and alarms for the entire cooking device 1, and is configured with a liquid crystal display. The display screen of the central display section 16M shows the selection results of induction heating means (first heating means) HM1, microwave heating means (second heating means) HM2, radiant heat heating means (third heating means) HM3, The operating status of each heating means, caution information or warning information regarding cooking by each heating means is displayed.

The central display section 16M is a single liquid crystal display in terms of hardware, but as shown in FIG. 8, it has a first display area 22 on the left side, a second display area 23 on the left and right center, and a third display area 24 on the right side. It has three display areas, and each display area can display a different display.

The three display areas 22 to 24 may also be linked together as appropriate depending on the display situation to form a single (large-area) display area, and may display one or more purposes. In the following, the first display area 22 will be referred to as the first area 22. The second display area 23 will be referred to as the second area 23. The third display area 24 will be referred to as the third area 24.

The central heating status display section 17M is divided into two stages in the front and rear direction, and the lower stage (front side) includes a microwave light emitting element (LED) 310 located behind the character display section "Oven" and a "Grill" display section. A light emitting element (LED) 311 for grilling is located behind the character display area ``Oven'', a light emitting element (LED) 312 for oven is located behind the character display area ``Oven'', and a light emitting element (LED) 312 for oven is located behind the character display area ``Central IH''. A certain central IH light emitting element (LED) 313 is arranged.

On the upper part (rear side), there are warning letters "Beware of high temperatures" and warning letters placed below the front of the figure schematically representing the heating chamber 6 and three heating ports 4L, 4C, and 4R. A light emitting element (LED) group 314 is arranged. Note that the LEDs 311 to 313 and the LED group 314 are arranged in an installation space 33 below the top plate 3.

The high temperature warning light emitting element (LED) group 314 is composed of a heating chamber high temperature warning light emitting element (LED) 314a and an IH high temperature warning light emitting element (LED) 314b arranged on the left and right.

The heating chamber high temperature warning light emitting element (LED) 314a lights up when the temperature inside the heating chamber 6 is high, for example, 50° C. or higher.
The IH high temperature warning light emitting element (LED) 314b lights up when any of the left IH coil 9L, right IH coil 9R, and center IH coil 9C is being driven or when the temperature of the top plate 3 is high, for example, 50° C. or higher. .

The central operation section 15M is used to input operations mainly related to heating cooking in the heating chamber 6 and heating cooking using the central heating port 4C.
As shown in FIG. 8, the central operation unit 15M includes nine input keys 151M, 152M, 153M, 154M, 155M, 156M, 157M, 158M, and 159M, and a function setting key 151KP (see FIG. 5).

The nine input keys 151M to 159M described above are capacitive touch keys that generate an input command signal each time a touch operation is performed. Further, a light emitting section 21M is provided near each of these input keys 151M to 159M.

The function setting key 151KP (see FIG. 5) is arranged on the leftmost side of the central operation section 15M. This function setting key 151KP is used to enable various operations, displays, etc. of the entire heating cooker 1 to be set as desired by the user US.

When the function setting key 151KP is pressed, the control device 40, which will be described later, switches to a "function setting mode" and displays the following "function setting menu" on the display screen of the central display section 16M. Note that when this specific input key 151KP is operated, selection information 202D is generated, but this selection information 202D is different from individual selection information (202A, 202B) corresponding to the other two specific input keys (152L, 152R). ), and it is possible for the control device 40 to identify only one of the three specific input keys based on the selection information.
(1) Child lock setting (setting to disable operation of various input keys).
(2) Interlocking mode setting of the ventilation system (operating the ventilation system in conjunction with the operation of the cooking device 1).
(3) Cleaning guide setting (automatic notification function setting for cleaning time of heating chamber 6 and exhaust port cover 5).
(4) Peak cut setting (select one maximum power consumption from four levels: 5700W, 5000W, 4800W, and 4000W).
(5) Audio settings for audio guide.
(6) Setting the volume of the audio guide.
(7) Setting to prevent forgetting to take out the food to be cooked, cooking utensils, etc. from the heating chamber 6 (necessity of alarm on the audio notification section 50 and the central display section 16M).
(8) HEMS registration settings (settings related to the power usage restriction function by the home power control device).
(9) Set timer cooking time unit (change setting from 1 minute unit to 5 minute or 30 minute unit).
(10) Switching between beginner mode and normal (expert) mode.
(11) Setting the type (range) of food inventory information to be acquired from an external device (refrigerator, etc.).
(12) Setting display priority (specific cooking menu to be displayed as default, identification information 167) of each cooking menu (for example, "hamburger") in cooperative cooking mode KM1.
(13) Setting display priority (specific control menu to be displayed as default) of each control menu (for example, "range grill", "boiled leafy vegetables") of complex cooking mode KM2.
(14) When the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 is opened after turning on the main power switch 20, the cooking mode settings (cooperative cooking mode KM1 and combined cooking mode KM2) automatically displayed on the central display section 16M display priority between the two parties).
(15) Setting to not automatically display additional information 165, 166 (see FIG. 15), which will be described later, and setting to not notify additional information 165, 166 by voice by the audio notification unit 50.
(16) When displaying individual cooking menus in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 on the central display section 16M, settings for individually displaying the components and nutritional components of the target cooking item (food) each time. Note that either one or both of the food components and nutrients may be used, but in the first embodiment, the input key 158M is used as a food component display command key, and the input key 159M is used as a nutrient component display command key.
When either input key 158M or 159M is operated within a predetermined period, and when voice input mode 1 is set and command is given by voice, food components or nutritional components are displayed. In other words, it is not always displayed simultaneously with the cooking menu identification information 167 (described later), but is displayed in response to the user US's operation (including voice). Details will be explained with reference to FIG. 24.
(17) When selecting an individual cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, settings for searching cooking menu candidates based on food ingredients and nutritional ingredients and displaying them on the central display section 16M. In this case, the user US can press the input key 180 to enter "voice input mode 2" and perform a voice search. Details will be explained with reference to FIG. 24.
(18) Setting the display priority of each cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode KM1.
Regarding the setting of a specific cooking menu that should be displayed as a default display, either the food component or the nutritional component should be set as the top priority item for display. By setting this, for example, cooking menus can be displayed in order of nutritional components in descending order of energy amount (calorie value) as shown in FIG. Alternatively, cooking menus can be displayed in descending order of the amount of "iron" as a nutritional component.

As explained above, when the function setting key 151KP is pressed and the "function setting mode" is selected, it is possible to add the display of food components or nutritional components, and also to display the information once set to be displayed. , it can also be set to be canceled later in function setting mode. Therefore, there is an advantage that the information to be set, the range, and the display method can be selected according to the user US's wishes.

The "beginner mode" is an optional function for a person (user US) who is inexperienced in using the heating cooker 1, and when set to this beginner mode, the voice guide in the voice notification section 50 (see FIG. 10) The content becomes more detailed and detailed. Furthermore, regarding input operations on the input operation section 15, the number of voice guides increases, and the amount of display information on the display screen of the central display section 16M increases.

When set to the beginner mode, especially when cooking in the composite cooking mode KM2 and the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the reference information displayed on the display screen of the central display section 16M in the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 (for example, (including additional information 165 and 166, which will be described later), or the content of the audio guide in the audio notification section 50 increases. Therefore, when the beginner mode is set, the function that can support the input operation of the user US is enhanced.

Note that in conjunction with switching from the "beginner mode" to the "normal (expert) mode," the content of the audio guide of the audio notification section 50 may be automatically set not to be changed. good.

When the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 is opened after turning on the main power switch 20, which will be described later, the cooking mode settings automatically displayed on the central display section 16M are the linked cooking mode KM1 and the combined cooking mode. This means setting either one of KM2. Since both the cooperative cooking mode KM1 and the composite cooking mode KM2 use one central display section 16M, the user US can set to give priority to the display of either one. This will be explained in detail later.

In the first embodiment, the "compound cooking mode" KM2 exceptionally includes several control menus (for example, a cooking operation called "rice cooking") of the independent cooking mode KM3 by the central IH coil 9M.

When the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 is opened after the main power switch 20 is turned ON, the control device 40 detects the opening of the door 7.
It is assumed that the user US is going to cook using the heating chamber 6, and first selects either the first specific screen 16M1 for the cooperative cooking mode KM1 or the second specific screen 16M2 for the combined cooking mode KM2. There is a function to automatically display on the central display section 16M.
In addition, on the central display section 16M, immediately after the main power switch 20 is turned "ON", a standby initial screen 16MH, which will be described later, is displayed. Thereafter, immediately after the door 7 is opened, the second specific screen 16M2 is automatically displayed.

After the "function setting menu" is displayed on the display screen of the central display section 16M, one specific input key (for example, 153M) other than the function setting key 151KP is "long pressed" for a certain period of time or more (hereinafter, " A long press) allows you to select one of the setting menus from the above-mentioned "function setting menus" and proceed to the desired individual setting step.

Alternatively, if two specific input keys other than the function setting key 151KP are "long pressed" at the same time, one of the above-mentioned "function setting menus" may be called up to change the setting to the desired setting. Can be done.

The "long press" refers to a state where the button is pressed continuously for 5 seconds or more, for example.
The control device 40 determines whether or not it is in the "long press" state by comparing the timing from ON to OFF of the touch input on the central operation unit 15M with a reference value. Alternatively, the input mode determination section 15C (see FIG. 11) inside the central operation section 15 makes the determination.
In this first embodiment, an example will be described (later using FIG. 11) in which the central operation unit 15M determines whether or not the "long press" state is reached.

Further, in the central operation unit 15M, the timing when the two input keys (for example, 154M and 155M) are pressed simultaneously is an “ON” (touch) signal transmitted from the input operation unit 15M to the control device 40. Can be distinguished.

In the following description, an embodiment will be described in which it is determined whether the input operation unit 15M is a "long press" or not. However, although this is not adopted in the first embodiment, the input operation unit 15M measures the time from the time when the "ON" signal changes to the time when the signal changes to "OFF", and transmits the data to the control device 40. There is also a method in which the control device 40 determines whether or not it is a "long press".

Embodiment 1 has a function of determining whether a specific input key (153M, 154M, 153L, 153R) is a "long press" as described above, and switching to the "voice input mode 1". Note that the input keys 152L and 152R in the left and right operation units 15L and 15R may also be changed to switch to the voice input mode 1 by a "long press" operation so that they are also used as specific input keys to be described later.
These will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11.
Note that a touch operation that is not a "long press", that is, a touch state that continues for less than 5 seconds, for example, may be referred to as a "short press". This is related to the detection ability of each of the input operation units 15M, 15L, and 15R, so for example, if the touch time is in the range of 0.1 seconds to 4.9 seconds, it is controlled as a "short press". The device 40 makes the determination.

The "type of inventory information" (range) acquired from the refrigerator 331 (not shown) is, for example, limited to only frozen foods, or foods that can be heated by a microwave heating source (second heating means HM2). It is to be limited only to

In the central display section 16M, when the control mode and control conditions (temperature, heating power, time, etc.) of the first heating means HM1, second heating means HM2, and third heating means HM3 are selected, the function settings are displayed. The input function of the function setting key 151KP is disabled to prevent mode switching.

Next, the setting of the peak cut value of the cooking device 1 will be described.
Even if the default value at the time of shipment from the manufacturer is 5400W, it can be set to 5000W, 4800W, or 4000W when installed in the user US's home.

In this way, the functions of the heating cooker 1 can be changed using the function setting key 151KP according to the user US's wishes, usage environment (power situation of the home where the cooking device is installed), and the like. Note that when such a peak cut value is set, the setting result is stored in the control device 40, so when the user US selects the cooperative cooking mode KM1 as described later, the cooperative cooking mode KM1 Used to determine whether to permit the use of (determine permission conditions). Therefore, during the period when recipe data CD (at least one of cooking process 1 and cooking process 2), which will be described later, is being received from the communication terminal 200, the peak cut value cannot be changed using the function setting key 151KP (see FIG. 11). It cannot be done.

In FIG. 8, the light emitting section 21M is composed of an LED, and emits light in response to the operation of the input keys 151M to 159M. That is, when the input function is valid, the corresponding light emitting section 21M continues to emit light.
Since the two adjacent input keys 155M and 154M have the same function of changing the display content of the first area 22, they share one light emitting section 21M.

Since the two adjacent input keys 157M and 156M have the same function of changing the display content of the second area 23, they share one light emitting part 21M.
Since the two adjacent input keys 159M and 158M have the same function of changing the display content of the third area 24, they share one light emitting section 21M.

The input key 151M is a start key that is pressed down (touch operated) to start heating cooking, and the input key 152M is a cancel key that is pressed down (touch operated) to stop or end heating cooking. It is.

The input key 153M is an input key that selects the "linked cooking mode" KM1 when operated after the main power switch 20 is turned ON, and may be referred to as the "first input key" below.

Input keys 154M and 155M are input keys for selecting the "compound cooking mode" KM2 when operated after turning on the main power switch 20 (without pressing the input key 153M), and hereinafter referred to as "second mode". Sometimes referred to as "input keys".

When the input keys 153R and 153L described in FIG. 7 are operated after the main power switch 20 is turned on (without pressing the input keys 153M, 154M, and 155M), the "single cooking mode" KM1 is selected. This is an input key, and hereinafter may be referred to as a "third input key."

The input key 151M described above has a function of determining the start of cooking for two types of cooking: "complex cooking mode" KM2 and "cooperative cooking mode" KM1, and may be hereinafter referred to as a "start key." In the "single cooking mode" KM3, the input keys 153L and 153R have a function of determining the start of cooking.

The input key 152M described above has a function of ending (including pausing) cooking for the two cooking modes, the "compound cooking mode" KM2 and the "cooperative cooking mode" KM1, and is hereinafter referred to as the "stop key". There is. In the "single cooking mode" KM3, the input keys 153L and 153R have the function of determining the end of cooking.

The four input keys 156M to 159M have a function that allows the user US to adjust control conditions such as microwave output and cooking time (within a certain range), and are hereinafter referred to as "condition input keys" or "fourth input key". ” is sometimes called.

The four input keys 153M, 154M, 153L, and 153R are also referred to as "voice input switching keys" which can each be switched to the "voice input mode 1". However, these four input keys function as "voice input switching keys" only when the touch operation is a "long press." This point will be explained in detail later with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11.

When any one of the independent cooking mode KM3, compound cooking mode KM2, and cooperative cooking mode KM1 is selected, the selection result is displayed on the central display section 16M. Also, when the "voice input mode 1" is switched, that effect is displayed (see FIGS. 21 and 22). Note that the contents of the independent cooking mode KM3, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the cooperative cooking mode KM1 will be explained in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 8, the input keys 154M and 155M are arranged adjacent to and near the front of the first area 22 of the central display section 16M, and are displayed in the first area 22 of the central display section 16M. This key is used to switch the displayed contents of the screen.

Next, FIG. 9 will be explained.
FIG. 9 is an enlarged plan view of the central display section 16M.
When the input key 154M is pressed down, that is, operated by the user US, the contents displayed in the first area 22, for example, one control menu ("microwave manual") belonging to "complex cooking mode" KM2 is displayed. Information 25A moves backward. At the same time, the display information 25B of "low boiled leafy vegetables" displayed on the front side is displayed in the center. Note that the input key 154M in this case functions as the above-mentioned "short press", and in the case of "long press", it functions as the above-mentioned "voice input switching key". This will be explained in 11.

Furthermore, when the input key 155M is pressed down, the "range manual" display information 25A displayed in the first area 22 moves forward. Along with this, the "warming" display information 25C displayed on the rear side is displayed in the center. Note that unlike the input key 154M, the input key 155M in this case is not the "voice input switching key", so if it is a "long press", it will not be possible to switch to the voice input mode, and it will not be effective. Not accepted as an input operation.

In this way, the user US can select a specific control menu (eg, "range manual") from the "control menu" by operating the input keys 154M and 155M.

Note that the control menu for the above-mentioned "Microwave Manual" originally belongs to the "Single Cooking Mode KM3" that uses only the second heating means HM2, but it also includes the "Combined Cooking Mode M2" and the "Cooperative Cooking Mode". Control menus (of complex cooking) that belong to each mode "KM1" and control menus and cooperative cooking menus that belong to cooperative cooking menus (for example, "hamburger" etc.) are also displayed in the first area 22.

Then, by pressing down the input key (start key) 151M, that is, by operating it by the user US, it is decided to start cooking with "Microwave Manual" in the control menu displayed in the center (see FIG. 9). ), the heating operation is started. That is, the heating means (in this case, the microwave oscillation source 11) is driven. Therefore, input keys 154M and 155M correspond to control menu selection keys operated by user US. Similarly, it corresponds to the selection key of the control menu (complex cooking). Furthermore, it also corresponds to the selection key for the cooperative cooking menu.

As shown in FIG. 8, the input keys 156M and 157M are arranged adjacent to and near the front of the second area 23 of the central display section 16M, and are arranged on the screen displayed in the second area 23 of the central display section 16M. This key is used to switch the displayed content.

To explain again with reference to FIG. 9, when the input key 156M is pressed, the wattage (microwave output value) ("500W" in FIG. 9) displayed in the second area 23 is increased by one step. (for example, to "600W"). Conversely, by pressing the input key 157M, the wattage displayed in the second area 23 is decreased by one step (for example, to "200W").

By operating the input keys 156M and 157M, the user US can set the wattage (microwave output value) can be selected.

As shown in FIG. 8, the input keys 158M and 159M are arranged adjacent to and near the front of the third area 24 of the central display section 16M, and switch the display contents displayed in the third area 24. This is the key for

As shown in FIG. 8, when input key 158M is pressed, the heating operation time (set time) displayed in the third area 24 is increased by one step. Conversely, when input key 159M is pressed, the heating operation time displayed in the third area 24 is decreased by one step.

In FIG. 9, the user US can select the set time for microwave cooking to be performed in the heating chamber 6 by operating the input keys 158M and 159M, and 34M is the set time information. Note that the set time information 34W is heating intensity information indicating the magnitude of power consumption, microwave output, etc. during heating. In this figure 9, "500W" is displayed.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
FIG. 10 is a control block diagram showing main functions of the cooking appliance 1 according to the first embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 10, the cooking appliance 1 includes a control device 40 that performs integrated control of the entire cooking appliance 1 .

The control device 40 is an electronic circuit board on which electronic components such as a control circuit for controlling the operation of each part constituting the cooking device 1 are mounted. The control device 40 sets the driving conditions of the left IH coil 9L, right IH coil 9R, and center IH coil 9C based on the operation of the left operation section 15L and the right operation section 15R and the temperature of the object to be heated on the top plate 3. Control each separately.

The control device 40 controls the central IH coil 9C, the microwave heating means 11, and the upper The driving conditions of the radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b are individually controlled.

Further, the control device 40 individually controls the display of the left display section 16L, right display section 16R, left fire power display section 17L, and right fire power display section 17R based on the operations of the left operation section 15L and the right operation section 15R. do.

Furthermore, the control device 40 controls the display of the central display unit 16M and the central heating status display unit 17M based on the open signal from the open/close detection unit 10 and the operation of the left operation unit 15L, the right operation unit 15R, and the central operation unit 15M.

The control device 40 stores data such as various programs and parameters used to control the heating cooker 1 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "control data"), and each display section 16L, 16R, 16M, 17L, 17R. It has a storage device 41 that stores display control data (hereinafter referred to as "display condition data") to be displayed on the screen. Further, the control device 40 activates the audio notification section 50 as necessary to notify the user US of the operating status of the cooking device 1 by voice.

The control device 40 stores data in a fixed format, including various programs and information such as parameters used in the heating cooking control of the heating control unit 43, in the recipe data storage unit 42 of the storage device 41. This data is the recipe data CD mentioned above. As will be explained later, in the heating cooker 1, recipe data CD corresponding to each of the eight cooking menus in total is prepared from the start in order to execute the linked cooking mode KM1.

The recipe data CD and the "display condition data" can be acquired by the cooking device 1 from an external device such as the communication terminal 200 for each cooking menu.

42 is a storage unit that stores the recipe data CD and display condition data. Note that the storage unit 42 may constitute one section (area) within the storage device 41, or may be configured separately from the storage device 41 in terms of hardware.

43 is a heating control unit that integrally controls the entire heating operation of the cooking device 1, and is mainly composed of a microcomputer.
53 is a data acquisition unit, which can acquire the recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300 via the communication unit 51. Further, the display condition data may be acquired from the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300 via the communication unit 51.

Reference numeral 51 denotes a communication unit that wirelessly communicates with the outside, and as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, has a function of wirelessly communicating with the communication terminal 200 330 (330BT). Alternatively, it has a function of wirelessly communicating with the cloud server 300 via the network NW.
The communication unit 51 includes at least two communication units, a first communication unit 51B (not shown) and a second communication unit 51W (not shown), each of which is compatible with a communication method, as will be described later. The first communication unit 51B uses Bluetooth (registered trademark) as the communication method with the communication terminal 200, so it is compatible with this communication method. Further, since the second communication unit 51W (not shown) uses a wireless LAN communication method such as WiFi (registered trademark) as a communication method with the wireless router 340, it is compatible with this communication method. It has a function.

Reference numeral 54 denotes a permission condition determining unit, which performs a process of determining whether or not to permit cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 or the combined cooking mode KM2.
Reference numeral 57 denotes a power supply circuit, which supplies power at a constant voltage to the control device 40. 20 is a main power switch inserted into this power supply circuit 57, and is opened and closed by the user US.
Regarding the recipe data CD related to the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the permission condition determination unit 54 determines permission for cooking at the stage of receiving the first portion M1 that sets the cooking process 1 as described later, and the permission condition determination unit 54 determines permission for cooking at that stage. If not, the process does not proceed to the obtaining step of the second portion M2 of the cooking step 2.

A limiting section 55 limits the acquisition of the recipe data CD.
The restriction unit 55 has a function of restricting the data acquisition unit 53 from acquiring the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51 during the waiting period before starting cooking in the collaborative cooking mode KM1 (i.e., before the “cooking process 1” described below).

Furthermore, the restriction unit 55 restricts the acquisition of new recipe data CD from the communication unit 51 until the cooking process of one cooking menu is completed based on the recipe data CD acquired from the outside. Has a function. In the case of a recipe data CD that implements one cooking menu with a plurality of cooking processes, such as cooking process 1 and cooking process 2, the cooking process 1 and cooking process 2 are treated as one recipe data CD as a whole.
Note that the restriction unit 55 may be realized by one control program of a computer (not shown) that constitutes the control device 40, and it is not necessarily necessary to configure it separately from the control device 40 in hardware. .

As shown in FIG. 10, the input operation section 15 includes an audio signal receiving section 56 that receives the voice emitted by the user US with a microphone (not shown) and converts it into a predetermined audio signal.

On the other hand, the control device 40 includes an audio signal analysis section 58 that receives the audio signal from the audio signal receiving section 56 and analyzes the content of the audio. The audio signal analysis unit 58 compares the content of the audio received by the audio signal receiving unit 56 with information in the audio database stored in the storage device 41, and transmits the analysis result to the heating control unit 43.

70 is an input processing section. The input processing section 70 receives an input signal from the input operation section 15 and switches its own input reception mode to "voice input mode 1." It also controls the input signal analysis section 52. Furthermore, upon receiving the analysis result from the audio signal analysis section 58, control data is transmitted to the heating control section 43.

In FIG. 10, 59 is a human sensor. It also has a receiving section (not shown) that radiates ultrasonic waves or infrared rays in front of the heating cooker 1 and receives the reflected input. Note that a dedicated circuit for processing the signal received by the receiver is not provided, and the control device 40 analyzes the received signal and determines whether there is a person present.

As shown by the broken line frame in FIG. 10, the audio notification section 50, the display section 16, etc. may be collectively referred to as the "notification section", and in this case, the reference numeral 90 is used.
26 is a light emission control section. This light emission control section controls light emission of a large number of light emitting elements. The light emission of a light emitting element 27A composed of an LED or the like arranged in the light emitting part 21 (21M, 21L, 21R) and a light emitting element 27B arranged in the input key 154M is controlled by the light emission control part 26. When two or more light-emitting elements 27 with different light-emitting colors are arranged in one place, depending on the light-emitting state of the plurality of light-emitting elements, a visual effect such as a change in the light-emitting color may be created for the user US. be.

In FIG. 10, reference numeral 52 denotes an input signal analysis unit that analyzes an input signal from the input operation unit 15 .
The input signal analysis unit 52 individually analyzes the input signals transmitted from the right operation unit 15R, the left operation unit 15L, and the central operation unit 15M. In particular, the input signal analysis unit 52 has a discrimination function for judging whether the input mode switching command (signal corresponding to voice input mode) MC1 has been received. When it is determined that the input mode switching command (signal corresponding to voice input mode) MC1 has been received, it issues a switching command for switching the input mode from the "touch input mode" to the "voice input mode 1."

In the following description, the "input mode switching command MC1" will be referred to as the "voice input mode corresponding signal MC1." Note that when the input processing unit 70 receives this voice input mode compatible signal MC1, it issues a control signal to the voice signal analysis unit 52 to shift to a voice input standby state (for example, starts a dedicated voice analysis program). ).

As described in FIG. 7, the right operation section 15R includes various input keys (153R, 154R, 151R, etc.), and the touch input results of these input keys are transmitted to the input signal analysis section 52.
In particular, when the input key 152R, which is one of the "voice input switching keys", is touched, the right operation unit 15R determines whether the touch state is a "long press" or a "short press"; The determination result (command signal for voice input mode 1) is input to the control device 40.

Similarly, the left operation section 15R includes various input keys (153L, 154L, 151L, etc.), and the touch input results of these input keys are transmitted to the input signal analysis section 52.
In particular, when the input key 152L, which is one of the "voice input switching keys", is touched, the left operation unit 15L determines whether the touch state is a "long press" or a "short press"; The determination result (command signal for voice input mode 1) is input to the control device 40. Note that the input keys 153R and 153L may be added to the "audio input switching key".

Further, the central operation unit 15M includes various input keys (153M, 154M, 155M, 156M, etc.), and the touch input results of these input keys are transmitted to the input signal analysis unit 52.
In particular, when touching the input keys 153M and 154M, which are one of the "voice input switching keys", the central operation unit 15M determines whether the touch state is a "long press" or a "short press". The determination result (command signal for voice input mode 1) is input to the control device 40.

Next, FIG. 11 will be explained.
FIG. 11 is a block configuration diagram illustrating the relationship between the control device 40 and the central operation section 15M. Note that the description of the audio signal receiving section 56 explained in FIG. 10 is omitted. Note that the right operation section 15R and left operation section 15L have basically the same configuration as the central operation section 15M.

In FIG. 11, 15A is an input key identification section. The input key identifying section 15A identifies the input key that has been touched. For example, when the input key 153M is touched, a unique identification signal of the input key is generated. Further, when the input key 154M is touched, a unique identification signal of the input key is generated.

15B is a touch detection section. When the fingertip FG of the user US or the like approaches the touch electrode part, the detection circuit emits an "ON" signal, and when it moves away, it emits an "OFF" signal.
15T is a time measuring section. The time measurement unit 15T measures the elapsed time from the time of the “ON” signal of the touch detection unit 15B to the time of the change to the “OFF” signal, and transmits measured time data.

15C is an input mode determination section. The input mode determining unit 15C receives the measured time data from the time measuring unit 15T, and determines the "voice input mode 1" if the time is 5 seconds or more, with the threshold of 5 seconds being the boundary as described above. It is determined that If it is less than this threshold, it is determined that the operation is a normal "short press" operation.

The input mode determining unit 15C transmits to the control device 40 a signal (voice input mode corresponding signal MC1) indicating the determination result as to whether or not the mode is "audio input mode 1".

15D is a storage section. The storage unit 15D stores various control parameters and thresholds for the touch detection unit 15A, time measurement unit 15T, input mode determination unit 15C, etc. described above, program information for determination processing, and the like.

15E is a central processing unit (CPU) that performs various information processing operations as an input operation unit (central operation unit 15M).
15F is an input signal transmitter. The input signal transmitter 15F transmits the above-described unique identification signal of the input key and the voice input mode corresponding signal MC1 as a result of determining whether the mode is "voice input mode 1" to the above-mentioned input key of the control device 40. It is transmitted to the input signal analysis section 58.

In FIG. 11, the touch detection section 15A, time measurement section 15T, input mode determination section 15C, etc. are depicted as individual independent blocks, but instead of having separate hardware configurations, for example, one micro Each of these functions may be realized by computer software.

Although FIG. 11 illustrates an example of the central operation section 15M, the control device 40 also identifies inputs from the right operation section 15R and the left operation section 15L. Therefore, in the input key identification section 15A of the right operation section 15R, the signal from the input key includes data that identifies the input key existing on the right operation section 15R. This also applies to the left operating section 15L.

As is clear from the above description, the heating cooker 1 described in FIGS. 10 and 11 has the following features:
a first heating means HM1 for induction heating the object to be heated on the top plate 3;
A heating chamber 6 whose wall surface is made of metal,
a second heating means HM2 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 6;
a third heating means HM3 that heats the heating chamber 6 with radiant heat;
A notification section 90;
Communication department 51;
Display section 16;
The configuration includes a control device 40.

,
The control device 40 displays a standby initial screen 16MH (described in FIG. 41) on the display unit 16, and then displays a display screen (first specific screen 16M1 to third specific screen 16M3) dedicated to each cooking mode. The first specific screen 16M1 to third specific screen 16M3 will be described in FIG. 15 to FIG. 22 and FIG. 42.

There are three types of cooking modes. In other words, they are the independent cooking mode KM3, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the cooperative cooking mode KM1.

The independent cooking mode KM3 has the following three types.
(1) IH-only mode in which the first heating means HM1 is operated independently (2) Microwave-only cooking mode in which the second heating means HM2 is operated independently (3) IH-only mode in which the third heating means HM3 is operated independently Oven independent cooking mode to operate

The composite cooking mode KM2 means heating cooking in the heating chamber 6 by heating both the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3, or by automatically changing the operation timings. This is the heating pattern to be used.

The cooperative cooking mode KM1 means that the length of the second heating means HM2 and/or the third heating means HM3 and the first heating means HM1 is determined by a command from the user US. This is a heating pattern that is sequentially operated after a heating suspension period P3 (transition period TR).

The control device 40 has an operation program for executing the three cooking modes KM1 to KM3 described above.
The data acquisition unit 53 of the control device 40 can acquire the recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200 via the communication unit 51.

In the input operation section 15, "voice input mode 2" can be selected using an input key 180 provided on the central operation section 15M.
Furthermore, among the input keys arranged on the central operation section 15M, right operation section 15R, and left operation section 15L, certain input keys (152L, 152R, 153M, 154M) are "long press" which is one of the touch modes. "Voice input mode 1" can be selected depending on the state.

(3. Configuration of control menu of central operation unit)
Next, the control menu displayed on the central display section 16M and selectable by the central operation section 15M will be described with reference to FIG. 12.

FIG. 12 shows the entire control menu that can be selected by the central operation unit 15M.
The control menus that can be selected by the central operation unit 15M are an RG (range grill) menu group that uses one or both of the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2), the upper radiant heat heating means 12a, and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b. and an IH menu group that uses the central IH coil 9C corresponding to the central heating port 4C.

Figure 13 shows the control menu shown in Figure 12 categorized into four perspectives (categories 1 to 4). As is clear from Figure 13, the control menu is broadly categorized into a single cooking mode KM3 and a combined cooking mode KM2. Note that although Figures 12 and 13 do not show the linked cooking mode KM1, the central operation unit 15M can execute a linked cooking menu in the linked cooking mode.

When the main power switch 20 is turned ON and the input key 154M or 155R is pressed without operating the input key 153M of the central operation unit 15M, the composite cooking mode KM2 is selected.

Therefore, the display screen of the central display section 16M is switched to the second specific screen 16M2 (see FIG. 15).
In the first area 22 of the second specific screen 16M2, the control menu "Warming" described in the "Left display area" in FIG. 12 is always displayed first. This is because the control menu "warming" is set as the default.

The "left display area" in FIG. 12 is a display area corresponding to the first area 22 described in FIG. 8. That is, the various control menus listed in the "left display area" in FIG. 12 are sequentially displayed in the first area 22.

As described in the "Left display area" in Figure 12, in addition to "Warming", "Microwave manual", "Leafy vegetables sub-boiled", "Root vegetables sub-boiled", "Meat thawing", "Microwave grill (RG ) Cooking'', ``Microwave Grill (RG) Reheat'', ``Range Grill (RG) Manual'', ``Grill'', ``Oven'', ``IH Keep Warm'', ``IH Cooking Rice'', and ``IH Heating'', 13 in total. There is a control menu.

The control menus include "warming", "manual microwave", "boiling leafy vegetables", "boiling root vegetables", "defrosting meat", "microwave grill (RG) cooking", "microwave grill (RG) reheating", “Range grill (RG) manual,” “grill,” and “oven” are included in the RG menu group.
Furthermore, "IH warming", "IH cooking rice", and "IH heating" are included in the "IH menu group" that uses the first heating means HM1.

The contents written in the "center display area" in FIG. 12 are the contents displayed in the second area 23 of the center display section 16M, and include the temperature, time, firepower, "high", "low", etc. during cooking. This relates to adjustment of heating conditions. In other words, various control conditions are described in the "center display area". The contents of the default settings for this "center display area" are listed in the "default" column in the right column of the "center display area."

The contents written in the "right display area" in FIG. 12 indicate the contents displayed in the third area 24 of the central display section 16M. The contents of the default settings for the "right display area" are listed in the "default" column in the right column of the "right display area." Blank areas do not mean control conditions that can be changed, and no information is displayed, or appropriate explanatory text that cannot be selected or changed (for the user US) is displayed in the third area 24. It means to be done.

Next, a total of 13 types of control menus displayed in the "left display area" of FIG. 12 will be explained.
(1) Warming: refers to heating the food in the heating chamber 6 using the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2). This "warming" method is also suitable for reheating food. Since the default setting is 80°C, microwave heating will automatically stop when the food reaches 80°C. Note that "80° C." is a target temperature, and this temperature can be adjusted by the user US before starting heating. As shown in the central display area of FIG. 12, the temperature can be set in steps of 5 degrees in the range of 0° C. to 90° C., for example.

(2) Manual microwave heating: refers to heating the food in the heating chamber 6 using microwave heating means (second heating means HM2). The heating time is set by the user US to a specific time between 10 seconds and 60 minutes.

(3) Boiled leafy vegetables: Use microwave heating means (second heating means HM2) to cook food in the heating chamber 6, especially vegetables whose leaves are edible, for example, leafy vegetables such as spinach and Chinese cabbage. It is suitable for boiling. The infrared sensor 13 measures the temperature rise of the object to be cooked in real time and automatically stops the process.

(4) Parboiling of root vegetables: This is suitable for parboiling the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 6, particularly roots, rhizomes, potatoes, and other root vegetables, using a microwave heating means (second heating means HM2).

(5) Meat thawing: This is suitable for thawing various kinds of frozen meat in the heating chamber 6.
(6) Range grill (RG) cooking: Combination of microwave heating using microwave heating means (second heating means HM2) and oven heating using upper radiant heat heating means 12a and lower radiant heat heating means 12b The food to be cooked in the heating chamber 6 is then heated and cooked.

(7) Range grill (RG) re-cooking: This is suitable for reheating the cooked food in the heating chamber 6.
(8) Range grill (RG) manual: The user US selects microwave heating or oven heating as appropriate to cook the food in the heating chamber 6.

(9) Grill: This grill heats the food in the heating chamber 6 using one or both of the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b. In other words, this is a control menu using the third heating means HM3.

"Grill" in the control menu does not control the temperature of the heating chamber 6, nor does it control to stop the heating operation upon detecting a rise in the temperature of the food to be cooked. The heating operation is performed for a period of time specified by the user US within a range of 10 seconds to 30 minutes.

(10) Oven: This oven heats the food in the heating chamber 6 using one or both of the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b. The temperature of the heating chamber 6 is measured in real time by the thermistor sensor 14, and the energization of the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b is controlled so that the temperature reaches the set target temperature.

(11) IH heat retention: Heating is performed to maintain the object to be heated, such as a pot, located above the central heating port 4C at the temperature set by the user US. The thermal power of induction heating is low to medium from 200 W to 750 W, and the temperature of the object to be heated is detected in real time by a temperature sensor (not shown) installed near the central IH coil 9C. Based on the detected temperature, the heating control section 43 of the control device 40 controls the thermal power. Note that the default temperature is 80° C. as shown in FIG. For example, it is suitable for keeping soup etc. warm.

(12) IH rice cooking: Heating is performed according to the total number (cooked rice amount) set by the user US. The thermal power used for induction heating ranges from low thermal power to high thermal power from 200W to 1500W. A temperature sensor (not shown) installed near the central IH coil 9C is used to detect abnormal heating of the object to be heated (also referred to as overheating state, the same applies hereinafter). The control device 40 reduces the thermal power and stops the heating operation.

(13) IH heating: Heating is performed according to the heating power of induction heating set by the user US. There are five levels of firepower that can be set: firepower 1: 200W, firepower 2: 500W, firepower 3: 750W, firepower 4: 1000W, and firepower 5: 1500W. A temperature sensor (not shown) installed near the central IH coil 9C is used to detect abnormal heating of the object to be heated. When an abnormal temperature is detected, the control device 40 controls the reduction of the heating power or the heating operation. A stop is made. Note that the default thermal power is 500W.

Next, FIG. 13 will be explained.
FIG. 13 is a classification table of the RG control menu ("RG menu group" in FIG. 12) and the IH control menu ("IH menu group" in FIG. 12) for the independent cooking mode KM3 using the first heating means HM1. .

The "left display area" of the first region in FIG. 12 means the first area 22 (see FIG. 8). As is clear from classification 2 in FIG. 13, the name of the control menu is also displayed in text in the first area 22 of the central display section 16M, and is used for the user US to select the control menu.

Next, FIG. 14 will be explained.
FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram showing the storage structure of various cooking control menus in the cooperative cooking mode and the complex cooking mode and the correspondence of input keys.
"Information indicating the main points of each control menu" shown in category 2 in FIG. 13 is stored as data in the third layer of the recipe data storage section 42, as shown in FIG.

Therefore, by operating the input keys 154M and 155M and selecting the desired control menu, each of the control menus shown in Category 2 in FIG. Information indicating the main points of the control menu can also be displayed automatically or optionally by the user US. FIG. 15 shows an example of this automatic display.

Next, FIG. 15 will be explained.
FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram illustrating the display operation of the central display section 16M when the central operation section 15M is operated.
First, when the user US presses the operation button 20A of the main power switch 20 (see FIG. 10) to turn on the main power, the input functions of the left operation section 15L, center operation section 15M, and right operation section 15R are enabled. Become. That is, the control device 40 is in a state where it accepts operation signals from each of these operation sections 15L, 15M, and 15R, and a predetermined screen (hereinafter referred to as "standby initial screen" 16MH) is displayed on the central display section 16M, although not shown. ) (see FIG. 41) is displayed.

In this state, when the user US presses the input key 154M or 155M, the display screen 15ST is displayed as shown in FIG.
FIG. 15 shows the second specific screen 16M2.
As is clear from the display screen 15ST, the name (identification information) 160 of the control menu "Warm" is displayed large in the center of the first area 22 in the front-to-rear direction.

Behind the identification information 160 of the control menu "Warming" displayed in the center of the first area 22, the characters "IH heating" (identification information of the control menu) 161 are displayed, and on the front side are the characters "Microwave oven". The text "Manual" (control menu identification information) 162 is displayed in a slightly smaller size.

This shows that when the user US selects the control menu, the next candidates are "IH heating" and "manual microwave". At this stage, if the input key 154M is pressed once, the control menu identification information 162 for "Range manual" is moved (backwards) to the position of the characters "Warming" (control menu identification information) 160. Displayed large. Note that the characters of the identification information 162 of the control menu have not actually moved, but only the displayed information has been switched.

Also, when the input key 155M is pressed once, the characters "IH heating" (identification information on the control menu) 161 move (forward) to the position of the characters "warming" (identification information on the control menu) 160. is displayed in a larger size. In this case as well, the identification information 162 of the control menu has not actually moved, but only the displayed information has been switched.

As shown in FIG. 15, the target temperature "80° C." is displayed in the second area 23 of the display screen 15ST. When microwave heating is performed at this target temperature, the heating operation is automatically stopped when the temperature of the object to be cooked reaches 80°C. That is, when the infrared sensor 13 detects that the temperature is 80° C., the microwave heating is automatically stopped.

If you want to change the temperature displayed in the second area 23 to change the temperature at which the automatic stop occurs, you only need to operate the input key 156M or 157M, and when you press this input key 156M once, the display screen 15UP1 will appear. When the temperature rises by 5°C to 85°C and the input key 157M is pressed once, the temperature drops by 5°C to 75°C as shown on the display screen 15DN1.

Further, in the second area 23, a heat source display section 163 is displayed that displays in text that the heat source is microwave heating means (second heating means HM2).

Reference numeral 164 is reference information that automatically displays a recommended control menu for warming side dishes, etc., as described above. The content of this reference information may be another additional information 165, and two or more types of information are displayed alternately or sequentially for several seconds each on the display screen (for example, the third area 24) of the central display section 16M. It may be displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in category 2 of FIG. 13, information (reference information) 164 indicating the main points of each control menu may be displayed whenever necessary in response to the operation of the input keys 158 or 159 .
In other words, in this embodiment 1, the reference information 164 that corresponds one-to-one with each control menu (e.g., "warm up") is displayed so that the user US does not hesitate as to whether or not to select each control menu (e.g., "warm up").

Furthermore, when the reference information 164 is displayed as shown in FIG. 15, if one of the (two) input keys 158M or 159M located in front of the reference information 164 is touched, Instead of the reference information 164, more detailed additional information 166 may be displayed in the third area 24.

As shown in FIG. 15, the aforementioned "composite cooking mode" KM2 is a mode in which multiple heating means with different heating principles, such as the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3, are driven simultaneously or automatically switched with a time lag to heat and cook a common food item.

In FIG. 15, the display screen shown on the central display section 16M is a dedicated display screen for the "compound cooking mode" KM2, and is referred to as a second specific screen 16M2.

Next, FIGS. 16 to 22 will be explained.
FIG. 16 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the central display section 16M and the central operation section 15M in the complex cooking mode KM2. The operating procedure before starting the heating operation is shown.

In FIG. 16, FG indicates the fingertip of the user US.
When the main power switch 20 is turned ON, the control device 40 is started, and the input key 154M or 155M of the central operation unit 15M is pressed, the standby initial screen 16MH (see FIG. 41) is displayed as shown in FIG. The screen switches to a second specific screen 16M2. In other words, this is a setting operation scene for the "compound cooking mode" KM2 such as an individual cooking mode such as microwave heating or microwave grill (RG) cooking.

If the input key 153M is pressed before the input key 154M or 155M, the input process changes to the cooperative cooking mode KM1. That is, from that stage, the standby initial screen 16MH (see FIG. 41) switches to the first specific screen 16M1 (see FIGS. 19 to 22).

When you press either the input key 154M or 155M with your fingertip FG as described above, the first area 22 of the display screen (second specific screen) 16M2 of the central display section 16M displays the objects of multiple complex cooking modes KM2. Three control menu candidates are displayed.
That is, three pieces of identification information (including a graphic mark and the name of the food) 160, 161, and 162 for identifying the three control menus on a one-to-one basis are displayed. Among these, the position where the identification information 160 of one control menu is displayed may be hereinafter referred to as "display position A."

In FIG. 16, there are three control menus displayed on the central display section 16M. That is, "warming", "IH heating", and "manual microwave". The number of control menus in this way is called "the number of control menus for complex cooking."

In this Embodiment 1, the positions where the identification information 161 and 162 are displayed may be hereinafter referred to as "display position B" and "display position C," respectively.

In the first embodiment, the control menu displayed at "display position A" ("warming" in FIG. 16) has the highest selection priority. That is, when the input key 151M is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 16, the heating operation is started with "warm".

In FIG. 16, when the input key 154M to the right of the input key 155M is touched (normal "short press" operation), "range manual" is displayed at display position A.

Further, to change the target temperature of 85° C. in “warming”, touch the input key 156M or 157M. In this case, even if you use a "long press" instead of the usual "short press" operation, you can only perform normal temperature change inputs. In other words, the change to voice input mode 1 cannot be performed using the input keys 156M and 157M.

In FIG. 16, one light emitting section 21M corresponding to the input key 153M has a star shape, which means that the light emitting section 21M blinks (or emits light in a different color from other light emitting sections). ), indicating that it can be operated.

As is clear from FIG. 16, at the stage of displaying the control menu in the first area 22, one light emitting section 21M corresponding to the input keys 156M and 157M is still blinking (or has a color different from the other light emitting sections). does not emit light). In other words, this indicates that input operations are not possible.

Next, FIG. 17 will be explained.
As is clear from FIG. 17, after the control menu is displayed in the first area 22, one light emitting section 21M corresponding to the input keys 156M and 157M blinks (or in a color different from the other light emitting sections). This indicates that it is possible to input control conditions such as heating time and temperature.

In addition, in FIG. 17, one light emitting section 21M corresponding to the input key 151M is surrounded by a circle with a broken line, which means that the light emitting section 21M blinks (or emits light in a different color from other light emitting sections). This indicates that the machine is waiting for an instruction to start cooking.

By the way, in FIG. 17, when the input key 154M, which is one of the "audio input switching keys", is touched, if the touch state is "long press", a button is displayed surrounding the touch part of the input key 154M. , a mark 154V indicating that the mode has been switched to "audio input mode 1" is displayed by the light emitting element 27B (see FIG. 10). In other words, a light emitting element 27B such as an LED (see FIG. 10) disposed below the top plate 3 lights up in response to a signal from the light emission control section 26, and a frame as shown in FIG. 17 is displayed at the input key 154M. display. Alternatively, the entire touch part of the input key 154M is illuminated from below so that it can be clearly distinguished from other input keys.

At the time when the mark 154V is displayed, the control unit 55 of the control device 40 has already input the "control conditions" (temperature, heating time, etc.), which is a lower command of the control menu (e.g. "warming"), by voice. It is in a state (hereinafter also referred to as an "input standby state") in which the signal is accepted via the signal receiving unit 56 (see FIG. 10).

Therefore, instead of inputting the control conditions by touching the input keys 156M or 157M, the user US can input the control conditions by voice.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
As is clear from Fig. 18, after the mark 154V is displayed, one of the light-emitting elements 21M corresponding to the input keys 156M and 157M does not blink (or emit light in a color different from the other light-emitting elements). In other words, this indicates that input operations of control conditions such as heating time and temperature are not recommended using these input keys. However, when switched to "voice input mode 1", the input functions of input keys that are not necessary for voice input are restricted, so after the mark 154V is displayed, input by touch operation is not possible using the input keys 156M and 157M (if set to voice input mode 1A).
In order to maintain the touch input function of specific input keys (such as 156M) for inputting control conditions even after switching to the voice input mode, it is necessary to set the mode to the "voice input mode 1B" as described above.

As is clear from FIG. 18, after the mark 154V is displayed, the auxiliary information 179 of the audio input mode 1 is displayed in the wide display area combining the second area 23 and the third area 24.

The auxiliary information 179 includes three types: voice input mode display information 179A indicating that voice input is accepted because the mode is voice input mode, and information 179B and 179C indicating the range and numerical values of control conditions that can be input. be.

The information 179B is the condition shown in "Area 2" explained in FIG. 12. In other words, this indicates that the user US can only select within the range of 0°C to 90°C.
The information 179C is the condition shown in "Area 2" also explained in FIG. 12. In other words, the user US can only select temperatures within the range of -10°C to 0°C in the "warming" control menu for heating frozen foods with microwaves.

The auxiliary information 179 (179A to 179C) shown in FIG. 18 allows the user US to input by voice, and by indicating in advance the range of control conditions that can be input by voice, it is possible to prevent unnecessary voice input or inappropriate conditions. Vocalization etc. can be avoided, and as a result, the operability of the user US is improved.

As is clear from FIG. 18, after the mark 154V is displayed, the auxiliary information 179 of the voice input mode 1 remains displayed in the wide display area that combines the second area 23 and the third area 24. In this state, the conditions for starting the heating operation are not met.
In other words, the state in FIG. 18 does not recommend pressing down (touch operation) the input key (start key) 151M as shown in FIG. 17. Therefore, the light emitting section 21M is not in a state where it emits light (blinks).

In other words, in the first embodiment, after switching to the voice input mode, the heating operation cannot be started if the predetermined control conditions are not input (the state shown in FIG. 18).

Next, FIG. 19 will be explained.
FIG. 19 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the central display section 16M and the central operation section 15M in the cooperative cooking mode KM1. This shows the stage before the heating operation starts.

In FIG. 19, when the main power switch 20 is turned ON to start the control device 40 and press the input key 153M of the central operation unit 15M, the standby initial screen 16MH (see FIG. 41) is displayed. The screen switches to the first specific screen 16M1 shown in FIG.

If the input key 154M or 155M is pressed before the input key 153M, as shown in FIG. 16, the input process is changed to the composite cooking mode KM2, and the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed.

In addition, even if the input key 155M or 156M is pressed first and the setting operation for "combined cooking mode" KM2 such as individual cooking mode such as microwave heating or microwave grill (RG) cooking is completed halfway, the input key 155M or 156M If the step is before pressing 151M, the step changes from the step of pressing input key 153M to the input step for "cooperative cooking mode" KM3. That is, from this stage, only the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed on the central display section 16M.

FIG. 19 shows a state immediately after pressing the input key 153M, in which identification information 167 of a specific default cooking menu (eg, hamburger steak) is displayed in the first area 22.

When the input key 153M is touched and then the input key 154M or 155M is touched, the first area 22 of the display screen (first specific screen) 16M1 of the central display section 16M displays the multiple cooperative cooking modes KM1. Further identification information (including a graphic mark and the name of the cooking item) 168 or 169 is displayed for specifying the target cooking item (which is the cooperative cooking menu).

In FIG. 19, the number of "foods" that can be cooked in the coordinated cooking mode displayed in the central display section 16M is three. That is, there are three: hamburger steak, gratin, and roast beef. In this way, the number of food items is called the "number of coordinated cooking menus."

In this embodiment 1, there are a total of eight linked cooking menus. Details are given in FIG. 25. However, it is possible to obtain recipe data CD from the smartphone (communication terminal) 200 (described later) and further increase the "number of linked cooking menus."

In FIG. 19, 167, 168, and 169 are identification information, and in this Embodiment 1, the information indicates the names of the foods to be cooked (for example, hamburger, gratin, and roast beef) on a one-to-one basis. In addition, when explaining all the "identification information" of the cooperative cooking menu KM1, the reference numeral 167 is used.

The position where the identification information 160 of the control menu explained with reference to FIGS. 15 to 18 is displayed was called "display position A."
On the other hand, in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the position where the identification information 167 is displayed is also the display position A.

In the first embodiment, the identification information 160 and the identification information 167 are displayed at the same "display position A", but they may be set at different positions. However, in order to avoid confusion for the user US, in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the eight cooperative cooking menus are always in the same position (display position A). Further, even in the complex cooking mode KM2, it is preferable to always use the same (single) "display position A" in each control menu.

As shown in FIG. 19, heating section specifying sections 171L and 171R are displayed. By touching the input keys 156M and 157M located adjacent to the heating part specifying parts 171L and 171R, you can select either the right IH coil 9R or the left IH coil 9L at this stage. can.

In the complex cooking mode KM2, control conditions such as firepower could be input by operating the input keys 156M and 157M, but this central operation section 15M allows you to input control conditions for either the right IH coil 9R or the left IH coil 9L. It is not possible to input such control conditions. The control conditions are input using the input keys 154R, 154L, etc. of the right operating section 15R or the left operating section 15L. Note that such control conditions can be entered using the corresponding left and right operation sections 15L and 15R after the cooking process has started.
If the input keys 154M and 155M are not operated (within a certain period of time), the process automatically advances to the next step and switches to the display screen shown in FIG. 20.

FIG. 20 will be explained.
In FIG. 20, the user US can select either the right IH coil 9R or the left IH coil 9L by operating input keys 157M and 156M adjacent on the left and right. In addition, in this Embodiment 1, the left heating part 4L is set by default, and operation of the input keys 157M and 156M is not essential.

In FIG. 20, as the operation support information 170, "When you press the start button, heating of the left IH will start" is displayed. This means that by pressing the input key 151M of the central operation unit 15M, induction heating (cooking process 1) can be started in the left IH coil 9L (in the cooperative cooking mode KM1). However, in the first embodiment, it is necessary to press the input key 153L on the left operation section 15L after pressing the input key 151M.

As shown in FIG. 20, above the identification information 167 shown on the first specific screen 16M1 (in the rear position in plan view), identification information 168 indicating the name of another food (for example, gratin) is displayed. has been done.

In addition, below the identification information 167, identification information 169 indicating the name of another cooking item (e.g., roast beef) is displayed. In FIG. 20, one light-emitting element 21M corresponding to an input key 151M is surrounded by a dashed circle, which indicates that the light-emitting element 21M is blinking (or emitting light in a color different from the other light-emitting elements) and waiting for a command to start cooking.

Each time one of the input keys 154M and 155M is operated, the identification information 167 indicating the name of the food to be cooked (for example, hamburger) is sequentially moved upward or downward by one step. The display changes. In other words, the identification information 167 can be sequentially displayed at a predetermined position (front and rear center position) of the first area 22, in other words, at the display position B by forward and backward movement.

In this first embodiment, there are a total of eight types of food to be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, as described above. Therefore, for example, if the left input key 155M is operated eight times, the identification information 167 for one item to be cooked (eg, hamburger steak) completes one cycle. Conversely, if the input key 154M on the right side is operated eight times, the identification information 167 of one item to be cooked (eg, hamburger steak) goes through one cycle.

By the way, after selecting the cooking menu (e.g. hamburger), as described above, after selecting the left and right heating sections 4L and 4R or inputting the control conditions (e.g. preheating temperature), the command to start the heating operation is input. It must be given with key 151M.

To input the left and right heating sections 4L, 4R and control conditions (for example, preheating temperature) as described above, it is necessary to individually press either the input key 154M or 155M many times, so the user US will require touch operations many times. This also applies to the above-mentioned composite cooking mode KM2. For example, as explained in FIG. 12, the temperature setting for "warming" can be selected within the range of 0 to 90 degrees Celsius, but both the input keys 156M and 157M can be set to Since it is only possible to input an increase (or decrease) by a degree, for example, to input 15 degrees, it is necessary to perform a touch operation three times (a "short press").

Therefore, in this first embodiment, in order to reduce troublesome input operations, in this cooperative cooking mode KM1, the identification information 167 of one cooking menu is stored in the first area 22 as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20. While displayed at the predetermined position B, the mode can be changed to voice input mode using the input key 154M.

As described above, when the input key 154M, which is one of the voice input switching keys, is touched, if the touch state is "long press", the touch part of the input key 154M is surrounded as shown in FIG. A mark 154V indicating that the mode has been switched to the voice input mode is displayed.

FIG. 21 will be explained.
At the timing when the mark 154V indicating that the mode has been switched to the voice input mode is displayed, as shown in FIG. It may be displayed on the specific screen 16M1.

The state shown in FIG. 21 is a state in which the left and right heating sections 4L and 4R have not yet been selected. However, in this state shown in FIG. 21, if the user US inputs setting information such as "left IH" by voice, the left heating The fact that the mouth 4L has been selected is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1.
The following FIG. 22 shows an example where the function is set to automatically select the left heating section 4L. As shown in FIG. 22, the automatic selection result of the left heating port 4L is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 22, one light emitting part 21M corresponding to the input key 151M blinks (or emits light in a different color from the other light emitting parts) as surrounded by a broken line circle, and Since the process advances to the next state after waiting for a command to start, pressing the input key 151M starts the heating cooking operation.

Next, FIG. 23 will be explained.
In FIG. 23(A), FG indicates the fingertip of the user US. Each time the input key 155M is pressed, the display contents of the first specific screen 16M1 change as shown in the display screens 23A to 23D, as shown in FIG. 23(B).

As described above, the user US sets the function setting mode (using the function setting key 151KP) using the input operation section 15 in advance, and operates a plurality of input keys on the input operation section 15 during the function setting mode. When displaying individual cooking menus in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 on the central display section 16M, settings can be made to prioritize display of either food components or nutritional components.

For example, when the function setting key 151KP is pressed as described above, a dedicated display screen for a "function setting menu" is displayed on the display screen of the central display section 16M.
Therefore, by pressing one or two specific input keys (for example, 156M or 158M) other than the function setting key 151KP, additional information such as "Food composition display" and " It is a good idea to set it so that the nutrition information display is displayed automatically.

Furthermore, when the display screen is displayed for setting such "food composition display" or "nutritional composition display", one specific input key other than the function setting key 151KP (for example, any one of 156M, 157M, etc.) is pressed. 1), it may be possible to change the conditions for setting "food ingredient display" or "nutritional ingredient display" or to cancel the settings. For example, it may be possible to set it so that only "iron" among nutrients and "energy (calorie equivalent value)" among components are displayed as a specific range.

For this reason, if the function setting key 151KP is set to give priority to either food ingredients or nutritional ingredients and to display them preferentially based on that, the display shown in FIG. 23(A) "Hamburger" is not always displayed first.

Meanwhile, as described above, by pressing the input key 180, the user US can search for a cooking menu by voice. Therefore, if a voice input such as "menu with a small calorie value" is performed at the stage shown in FIG. 23, the cooking menu with the smallest calorie value (energy amount) among the eight cooking menus will be displayed on the first specific screen. 16M1, it is displayed at a predetermined position in the first area 22 (front and rear central position, that is, the above-mentioned "display position A").

For example, in FIG. 23, three types of cooking menus are displayed: gratin, hamburger steak, and roast beef. Therefore, if the input key 180 is pressed at this point, the voice input mode 2 is entered. After this, the user US may give a voice input of "low calorie menu". Incidentally, the energy content (unit: kilocalories) per 100g of weight is approximately 152 for gratin (macaroni gratin), 223 for hamburger steak, and 196 for roast beef. Therefore, macaroni is extracted as the "menu with the smallest calorie value" among these three.

On the other hand, in the state of FIG. 23, the input key 154M may be "long pressed" to switch to voice input mode 1, and a menu with a small calorie value may be extracted by voice input.

Next, FIG. 24 will be explained.
FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the central display section 16M in the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM1, and is an example in which standard components and nutritional components for "hamburger", which is one of the cooking menus, are displayed. It is.

At the stage of Figures 20 to 23, if the user US issues a command to display either the food ingredients or the nutritional ingredients by voice input, or if the input key 158M or 159M is touched at the stage where the operational support information 170 is displayed (see Figure 20), the first specific screen 16M1 temporarily switches to the display screen of Figure 24 (A) and Figure 24 (B). Pressing the input key 158M is considered to be a command to display the food ingredients.

In the following description, the display screen in FIG. 24(A) will be referred to as a "food component display screen" 16M1A, and the display screen in FIG. 24(B) will be referred to as a "nutritional component display screen" 16M1B.

The food component display screen 16M1A and the nutritional component display screen 16M1B automatically return to the original state of the first specific screen 16M1 after a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since they were displayed.
Alternatively, if the user US issues some kind of command by voice input, or if one of the input keys 158M and 159M is operated one more time during the certain period of time (10 seconds), the original first The display program of the control device 40 specifies that the state of the specific screen 16M1 be restored.

FIG. 25 will be explained.
FIG. 25 is a list showing the correspondence between the cooking menu in the "cooperative cooking mode" KM1 and the operation support information 170 (see FIG. 20).

As can be seen from FIG. 25, there are at least two pieces of operational support information 170.
That is, there are two types of operational support information, an operational support information A (170A) and an operational support information B (170B). The first operational support information A (170A) is "Determine with the start button." This "start button" refers to the input key 151M.
The second piece of operational support information B (170B) is information that says "You can change the IH to be used."
The data of the table shown in FIG. 25 is stored in the storage device 41 of the control device 40.

As shown in Figure 25, for each item to be cooked (cooking menu), the "specific input keys" that the user US needs to operate when cooking using the recipe data CD are determined in advance. This information is also stored in the storage device 41.
As mentioned above, the recipe data CD for carrying out one cooking includes a first part M1 that sets the cooking process 1 that uses one or two heating means, and another one that uses the heating means. The second portion M2 for setting the cooking process 2 is obtained in two stages. For example, in the case of "hamburger steak", the specific input key for acquiring the data of the cooking step 1 portion (first setting portion M1) is either one of two, 152L and 152R. That is, the user US may perform an input operation using either one of the input key 152R of the right heating section 15R and the input key 152L of the left operation section 15L at his/her discretion. Note that it is not possible to select both, and if either one is selected, the specific input key selection process is completed.

Furthermore, in order to obtain the data of the second portion M2 for setting the cooking process 2, it is necessary to input another specific input key. For example, in the case of the above-mentioned "hamburger steak", the specific input key for acquiring the data of the cooking step 2 portion (second setting portion M2) is 153M. That is, it is sufficient to operate the input key 153M of the central operation section 15M. In addition, when acquiring the recipe data CD in this way, the specific input key to be operated is determined in advance as described in the column of "Specific input key" in FIG. 25, and this information is It is stored in the storage device 41.

The two types of operation support information A (170A) and operation support information B (170B) described above are automatically switched before the start of the cooking process in the "cooperative cooking mode" KM3. For example, they are displayed alternately every few seconds.

Next, FIG. 26 will be explained.
In the first embodiment, a "cooperative preheating cooking mode" KM4 is provided as one type of the cooperative cooking mode KM1.
There are two types of the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4.

An example of a cooking menu using the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is "hamburger steak." In the case of this "hamburger steak", the preheating step is performed by the first heating means HM1.

When the cooking process 1 is started while the preheating process is being executed, the heating operation of the preheating process has not been stopped at the time when the cooking process 1 is started.
Therefore, the energization of the first heating means HM1 and the energization of the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating means) and the third heating means HM3, which are in charge of the cooking process 1, are performed in parallel during the same time period. It turns out.

In other words, in the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4, the heating source (in the above explanation, the first heating means HM1) that has started operating before the cooking process 1 is not necessarily stopped at the start of the cooking process 1, During the cooking process 1, one or both of the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating means) and the third heating means HM3 may be energized.

The following description will be made on the assumption that the cooperative cooking mode KM1 includes the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4, unless there is a particular contradiction.

When the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is selected, the left operation unit 15L of the left IH coil 9L cannot be used for other cooking menus (also called "occupied state") when the identification information 167 indicating the name of the food to be cooked is displayed on the central display unit 16M.

Specifically, at least the input key 153L among the various input keys of the left operation section 15L is disabled by the heating control section 43. This "invalidation" means that a valid command signal is not transmitted to the heating control unit 43 from the input key 153L, and that even if a valid command signal is transmitted, the heating control unit 43 does not receive the command signal. This has the meaning of not processing it as a valid command signal. In either case, heating with the left IH coil 9L cannot be selected.

At the same time, when the identification information 167 is displayed, the right operation section 15R of the right heating port 4R may be disabled (by "invalidating" the input key 153R). However, if the user US has set the function in advance on the input operation unit 15 (using the function setting key 151KP) so as not to perform this "invalidation", the right IH coil 9R may be set in other control menus. If the right IH coil 9R has already been used for this purpose (the heating operation is continuing), the right IH coil 9R can be used as is. On the other hand, in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, if there is a fact that it has been used previously (by another cooking), it is determined that it cannot be used (by the heating control unit 43).

Therefore, only the left IH coil 9L becomes "occupied" by selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM1. Furthermore, when viewed from the entire first heating source HM1, the use of only a portion of the three heating ports 4L, 4C, and 4R (left IH coil 9L) is "restricted". Note that when the right IH coil 9R is not in use for other cooking, the right IH coil 9R may also be kept occupied.

Continuing to explain FIG. 26.
This FIG. 26 shows the operation steps when "karaage" is performed in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 (cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4). In FIG. 26, #1 to #9 indicate operations by the user US and changes in the state of the cooking device 1. In FIG.

The "karaage" shown in FIG. 26 differs from the above-mentioned "hamburger steak" in that the cooking process 1 is performed in the heating chamber 6, and the cooking process 2 is performed in the first heating means HM1.

In FIG. 26, in order to cook "karaage", the user US first selects the left IH coil 9L as the preheat source and presses the input key 151L before starting cooking process 1. Then, preheating of the object to be heated N placed on the top plate 3 is started (step Y21). The object to be heated N in this case is a metal pot, frying pan, etc., and a certain amount or more of edible oil is poured into the object N.

On the other hand, the user US opens the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 and puts ingredients for "karaage" (seasoned chicken, etc.) into the heating chamber 6 (#1).
After closing the door 7, an operation called "pressing the start button" (step Y22) is performed. This is to press the input key 151M of the central operation section 15M.

At this point, the microwave heating source (second heating means HM2) is activated and cooking process 1 of microwave heating cooking is started. Then, notification 1 of reference information is performed.

The notification 1 is to notify the time until the end of heating, for example, "Microwave heating has started. Heating time is 0 minutes." Alternatively, if control is performed to detect the temperature of the food to determine the heating end time, information indicating the target temperature may be notified, such as "Heating to 〇〇℃", for example.

Also, during this cooking process 1, preheating of the left IH coil 9L is completed (for example, the object to be heated is heated to 180° C., which is the standard temperature for preheating) (step Y23A). The completion of the preheating is notified to the user US by voice and text by the voice notification section 51 and the central display section 16M (first specific screen 16M1) (step Y23B).

The user US can stop the microwave heating at any time during the cooking process 1. To stop it, just open door 7. Note that microwave heating can be temporarily stopped by pressing the input key 152M of the central operation section 15M only once. However, if the input key 152M is pressed twice in a short period of time, the cooking mode will be canceled, and the selection of "karaage" in the cooperative cooking mode will be cancelled. Stopping of microwave heating is notified immediately before or after (step Y24)

When the door 7 is opened, the microwave heating operation is immediately stopped, and the cooking process 1 is completed (#3).
Next, the user US moves the food heated in the heating chamber 6 into the object to be heated (such as a frying pan) that is being preheated on the top plate 3 (#4).

Then, cooking process 2 is started using the left heating port 4L (#5).
In the cooking process 2, the input key 153L (see FIG. 6) of the left operation part 15L is pressed first before starting preheating, so there is no need to operate the left operation part 15L at the start of this cooking process 2. . In other words, when the food (karaage ingredients) is moved into an object to be heated that has been preheated to 180°C, heating of the food starts at the temperature of the object to be heated (this point is when the cooking process begins). 2).

As described above, the user US does not need to particularly operate the input operation section 15 to start the cooking process 2 (#5).
The point at which the food to be cooked is placed on top of the food to be heated is the start point of cooking process 2, but as the food to be cooked is placed, the temperature of the food to be heated may temporarily change. The temperature sensor group 30 (see FIG. 10) may detect that the temperature has dropped to 1, and electrically determine the starting point of the cooking process 2.
The cooking process 2 can be ended at any timing by the user US operating the left operating section 15L.

Next, the user US moves the food to be cooked again.
First, the door 7 is opened, the food to be cooked is put into the heating chamber 6, and the door 7 is closed (#6).
Then, the user presses the input key 151M of the central operation unit 15M to start cooking process 3 of the range grill control menu (RG control menu) (step Y26).

In this case, in order to prevent the microwave heating etc. from being performed without putting the food to be cooked into the heating chamber 6 (so-called "dry cooking"), the door 7 is opened once after the cooking process 1 is finished, and then the Only when it is detected (by the opening/closing detection unit 10 of the door 7) that the door 7 has been closed again can the input key 151M be pressed to start the heating operation. Further, the timing of operating the input key 151M may be limited to a certain period of time (for example, 3 minutes) from the end of the cooking process 1, or a certain period of time (for example, 2 minutes) from the time when the door 7 is opened and closed again. (minutes) to improve safety.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the cooking process 3 by the range grill drive unit in the heating chamber 6 was started by the user US's operation input, the operation support information 170 is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1. The information is also notified by voice (step Y27).

The audio notification is information that includes guidance such as, for example, "Heating will end in 30 seconds. If you want to extend it further, please set a time." Furthermore, since the user US knows that the final cooking process is finished, he or she can start preparations for taking out the fried chicken from the heating chamber 6 from the time when the operation support information 170 is reported. Further, in synchronization with this, the contents of the operation support information 170 are displayed in characters or the like on the central display section 16M. Note that the operation support information 170 is displayed at a specific position on the first specific screen 16M1, as in the example shown in FIG.

After that, the microwave heating operation is stopped, and the cooking process 3 ends (#7). Note that this cooking process 3 can be stopped immediately if the user US opens the door 7.
After this, the user US moves the food heated in the heating chamber 6 into the object to be heated, which is now preheated on the top plate 3 (#8). In this case, if the object to be heated is maintained in a heated state by induction heating until after the end of cooking process 3, the object to be cooked is placed on top of the object to be heated and the induction heating (cooking step 4) may be started (#9).

Induction heating cooking can be ended by operating the left operation section 15L. That is, the heating cooking end operation (step Y28) by the user US at this point is to press the input key 153L of the left operation section 15L corresponding to the left IH coil 9L.

The cooking sequence shown in FIG. 26 can shorten the time required from the start of the induction heating operation (start of the preheating process) to the end of the cooking process 1.
That is, without waiting for the completion of preheating by induction heating or the notification of completion of preheating, the food (food to be cooked) is placed in the heating chamber 6 and the cooking process 1 is started at a point before that.

Since the preheating by the first heating means HM1 is completed before the cooking process 1 is completed, the food to be cooked is immediately transferred to the food to be heated on the top plate 3 after the cooking process 1 is completed, and the food is cooked. Step 2 can begin.

In the example of "karaage" in FIG. 26, there is a cooking step 3, but the cooking step 3 and the cooking step 4 are not always necessary. The cooking process may be completed as necessary depending on the type of food to be cooked and the wishes of the user US.

In addition, in FIG. 26, the "left IH coil drive period" continues even after cooking process 2 is finished, but after finishing cooking process 2, the left IH coil is activated by the left operation part 15L. You can stop driving 9L at any time. However, as indicated by the broken line frame in FIG. 26, if the left IH coil 9L is further used in the cooking process 4, it is necessary to start the preheating operation again before the cooking process 4.

Next, FIG. 27 will be explained.
Similar to FIG. 26, FIG. 27 shows the operation steps when "karaage" is selected as the cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode KM1.
In FIG. 27, #1 to #9 indicate operations by the user US and changes in the state of the cooking device 1, as explained in FIG. Other symbols correspond to those in FIG. 26.

The difference between FIG. 27 and FIG. 26 will be explained.
FIG. 27 shows a case where the cooking process 1 is started in the heating chamber 6 after waiting for the completion of preheating of the object to be heated by the first heating means HM1 (step Y23A) and its notification (step Y23B).

Step Y21 indicates the start of driving the first heating means HM1.
When the completion of preheating of the heated object by the first heating means HM1 (step Y23A) is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 and the left and right display units 16L, 16R (step Y23B) and is also notified by audio notification unit 50, the user US opens the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 and places the ingredients for "fried chicken" (such as seasoned chicken) into the heating chamber 6 (#1).
After closing the door 7, the input key 151M of the central operation unit 15M is pressed.

At this point, cooking process 1 of microwave cooking is started (step Y22). Then, the notification 1 of reference information is performed. The subsequent steps are the same as those shown in FIG. 26.

In the cooking sequence shown in FIG. 27, the time required from the start of the heating operation of the first heating means HM1 (the start of the preheating process) to the end of the cooking process 1 is longer than that in FIG. 26.

However, since heating of the food (food to be cooked) is started in the heating chamber 6 after waiting for the completion of preheating by the first heating means HM1 or notification of the completion of preheating (step Y23B), the cooking process in the heating chamber 6 starts. At the end of step 1, if the object to be cooked is moved, there is a guarantee that cooking step 2 can be started immediately by the first heating means HM1. Therefore, this method is suitable for users US who are not very familiar with the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4.

Although FIG. 27 shows that the "driving period of the left IH coil 9L" continues even after the cooking process 2 is finished, the first heating means HM1 is not activated after the cooking process 2 is finished. When not in use, the drive of the left IH coil 9L may be stopped at any time after the completion of the cooking process 2 using the left operation section 15L. However, as indicated by the broken line frame in FIG. 27, if the left IH coil 9L is further used in the cooking process 4, it is necessary to start preheating again before the cooking process 4.

In FIGS. 26 and 27, the first heating means HM1 is first energized to start the preheating operation, while the cooking process 1 is performed in the heating chamber 6.
The "cooperative preheating cooking mode" KM4 of the first embodiment is not limited to such a mode in which the cooking process 1 is performed in the heating chamber.

In another cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4, first the heating operation by the first heating means HM1 is started, and the object to be heated such as a frying pan is heated to the preheating target temperature (for example, 180°C) until the target temperature is reached. In this method, the object to be cooked is placed on top of the object to be heated, and then the cooking process 1 is started. Note that after this preheating step, the food to be cooked is moved into the heating chamber 6 while being placed on the food to be heated, and the food to be cooked is placed in the heating chamber 6 together with the food to be heated. Cooking step 2 may be performed in order to further heat with the second heating means HM2 or the third heating means HM3.

Next, FIG. 28 will be explained.
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the control operation of the heating control section 43 until transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM1.

In the cooperative cooking mode KM1 of this first embodiment, the pattern is ( There is a first cooperative cooking mode). As shown in the list of FIG. 25, there are four typical examples of cooking menus suitable for cooking in this pattern, from "hamburger steak" to "gratin."

There is also a second cooperative cooking mode in the opposite order. There are four typical examples of cooking menus suitable for cooking in the second cooperative cooking mode, from "karaage" to "tempura", as described in the lower half of the list in FIG. 25.

The steps in FIG. 28 are common to both the first cooperative cooking mode and the second cooperative cooking mode.
First, in the first step SB1, the input key 153M of the central operation section 15M is operated. As a result, cooperative cooking mode KM1 is started.

In the next step SB2, a first specific screen 16M1 is displayed on the central display section 16M, and various information for executing the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is displayed. In step SB2, in order to select the cooking menu of each cooperative cooking mode, the "name of the object to be cooked" (for example, "hamburger") 167 is entered as one type of identification information 167 at the center of the first area 22 in the front and back direction. , that is, at the display position A.

Depending on the selection of the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the timing at which the heating means (first heating means HM1 to third heating means HM3) become "occupied" may be either of the following two.
(1) As described above, for example, after the case when the left IH coil 9L for cooking process 1 is selected (in FIG. 28, "occupied state start (case 2)" after step SB4 corresponds).
(2) After step SB2 as shown in FIG. 28 (in FIG. 28, "occupied state start (case 1)" corresponds).

In the next step SB3, it is determined whether at least one of the input keys 154M and 155M has been operated. As explained in FIGS. 8 and 19 to 22, by operating the two input keys 154M and 155M, the identification information 167 indicating the name of the food (for example, hamburger) that can be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode can be selected. .

If the input keys 154M and 155M are not operated (within a certain period of time), the process advances to step SB4.
Step SB4 is a step of selecting one of the two heating section specifying sections 171L and 171R displayed on the first specifying screen 16M1 as described above. If the user US operates the input keys 157M and 156M adjacent on the left and right, he can select either the right IH coil 9R or the left IH coil 9L.

Note that the left heating port 4L may be set as a default, and the heating portion specifying section 171L may be displayed first on the first specifying screen 16M1, and the process may proceed directly to step SB5. In the example described in FIG. 22, when performing hamburger steak in cooperative cooking, the left heating port 4L is set as default, and the left IH coil 9L is set to be selected preferentially.

In the next step SB5, it is determined whether an input operation has been performed to cancel the selection of the linked cooking mode. If the input key 152M has been operated once, the result is determined to be "Yes". Then, the process returns to step SB3. If the input key 152M has been operated twice in succession within a certain short period of time (for example, five seconds), it is determined that the linked cooking mode KM1 has been cancelled, and the process returns to the state of the initial standby screen prior to step SB1. Therefore, the selection of the three cooking modes KM1 to KM3 returns to the initial stage.

On the other hand, if the input key 151M is operated while the input key 152M is not operated, the process advances to the next step SB6. Then, cooking step 1 of cooperative cooking mode KM1 is started.

In FIG. 28, step SB7 is performed in accordance with the "cooking conditions" (including "control conditions" such as heat power and heating time) of a specific cooperative cooking menu (recipe), for example, "hamburger" in the operation program of the cooperative cooking mode KM1. , various functional parts start up. That is, from this stage, the process shifts to the cooperative cooking mode KM1.

First, in step SB7, the display section corresponding to the heating section selected in step SB4 is activated. However, in the case of a cooking menu that uses the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2) or the third heating means HM3 in cooking step 1 (as described above, for example, "karaage"), the central display section is already displayed. 16M has been activated, no new display unit is activated in step SB7.

In the cooking process 1, for example, in the case of a cooking menu using the left IH coil 9L, the left display section 16L is activated in step SB7. Then, the input function of the left operation unit 15L is enabled, and the system waits for an input from the user US. Then, the process advances to step SB8.

In step SB8, the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is started after the input key 153L is operated.
In addition, as for the display contents of the first specific screen 16M1 in step SB8, the first cooking process 1 uses the left IH coil 9L, and the next cooking process 2 uses the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2). Process information 172, such as that the process is used, is displayed as described in FIG. 19.

Next, FIGS. 29 and 30 will be explained.
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the control operation of the heating control section 43 until transition to the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram showing permission conditions and determination results before shifting to cooperative cooking mode.

FIG. 29 will be explained.
Steps ST1 to ST9 are operation steps defined in the basic operation program of the heating control section 43.
First, when the operation button 20A of the main power switch 20 is pressed (ST1), the next step ST2 is a step in which the heating control section 43 determines whether there is an abnormality.

At the stage of step ST2, the central display section 16M is activated and displays the message "There is no abnormality, so cooking can be started." Note that, at this stage, the heating control section 43 also checks whether a setting command for the upper limit value of the total power consumption has been received from the input operation section 15.

If the cooking device 1 is set to transmit startup information to the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300 at step ST2, the startup information (operating state data) is transmitted from the communication unit 51 at this stage. OS) wirelessly.

In the next step ST3, the central display section 16M and the audio notification section 51 also provide notification and audio guidance to prompt selection of the heating means.
In the next step ST4, the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed on the central display section 16M, and usage precaution information is also displayed to the user US.

Then, it is determined whether an input key other than the input key 153M (for example, 154M) has been operated (ST5). If the input key 153M has been operated, step ST5 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step ST6. In other words, the process proceeds to the step of using the "cooperative cooking mode" KM3.

In step ST6, the permission condition determination unit 54 checks whether "permission condition 1" is satisfied. For example, the usage status of the heat source used in the "cooperative cooking mode" KM1 is checked.
The permission condition 1 and the determination result will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 30 below.

In step ST5, the first input operation is checked. For example, before the input key 153M is pressed, it is determined whether the left operation section 15L or the right operation section 15R is operated, and the "complex cooking mode" KM2 is set by the central operation section 15M (by the input key 154M or 155M). Determine whether it is selected.

If the input key 153M is operated for the first time within a certain grace period (for example, 30 seconds) from step ST3, the display for the "cooperative cooking mode" KM1 is started as described above.

On the other hand, if the input key 153M is not operated and another input key (for example, input key 155M or 154M) is touched, the determination in step ST5 is "Yes", and the "cooperative cooking mode" is determined. ” Proceeds to step ST9 for starting cooking other than KM1. Note that detailed explanation of step ST9 will be omitted here.

In FIG. 29, steps ST6 and ST7 are operational steps for determining whether or not to permit cooking in the "cooperative cooking mode" KM1.
Step ST6 is a stage for determining "permission condition 1".

Here, "permission condition 1" means
(1) The "peak cut value" that specifies the upper limit of the maximum power that can be used by the cooking device 1 is 5000 W or more.
(2) When there is a power reduction command signal received by the control device 40 via the communication unit 51 from the external cloud server 300 or the communication terminal 200, the peak cut value of the reduction command is 5000 W or more;
If these two conditions are met, the determination in step ST6 is "Yes."

The "permission conditions 2" in the next step ST7 are the following four.
(1) In the first heating means HM1, the central heating port 4C is not in heating operation.
(2) One or both of the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 is not in heating operation.

(3) In the first heating means HM1, both the right heating port 4R and the left heating port 4L are not used for heating operation (or only one is being used for heating operation). That is, both the left IH coil 9L and the right IH coil 9R are not used for heating operation.
(4) “Permit Condition 4” described below must be met. In other words, the latest temperature of the top plate 3 is a limit value (for example, not a high temperature exceeding 100°C).

If the above four conditions are satisfied, a "Yes" determination is made in step ST7. Then, the process proceeds to step ST10. In other words, it is possible to proceed to the step of inputting the cooking start of the cooperative cooking mode KM1. That is, in step ST10, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed.

If the determination in steps ST6 and ST7 is "No", the process proceeds to step ST8, and the central display section 16M or voice notification section 50 notifies the user US that the cooperative cooking mode KM1 cannot be selected.

Here, the meaning of the "permission condition 1" stipulating that the power is "5000W or more" will be explained. In order to simplify the explanation, the following explanation does not particularly mention the power consumption of electrical components other than the heating source, such as the internal cooling fan (not shown) of the main body 2.

The reason why the required demand (pre-secure power demand) when implementing "Cooperative Cooking Mode" KM1 is required to be 5000 W or more is that the maximum (instantaneous) power when operating each heating source when executing Cooperative Cooking Mode is This is because the following is true.

(1) During microwave cooking (second heating means HM2): 1000W
(2) During oven cooking: 2000W (upper radiant heat heating means 12a: 1000W, lower radiant heat heating means 12b: 1000W)
(3) Range grill cooking: 1500W (second heating means HM2: 500W, upper radiant heat heating means 12a: 1000W)

On the other hand, the maximum power of the cooking menu in "cooperative cooking mode" KM1 is 1500W.
Therefore, in the cooperative cooking mode, the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 may operate simultaneously.

That is, "1000W" of the second heating means HM2, "1000W" of the third heating means HM3 (2000W is alternately energized in 1000W increments), and "1500W" of the first heating means HM1 that performs induction heating. The total power of the three is 3500W.

When the demand (pre-secure power demand) is 5000W:
When the right IH coil 9R is heating 3000W (normal heating), the remaining demand is 2000W.
When executing "cooperative cooking mode" KM1 from this state, the remaining demand is 1500W short of the 3500W power required for cooperative cooking, so the heat power of the right IH coil 9R is reduced to 1500W (from 3000W) for cooperative cooking. can be started.

If the demand (pre-secure power demand) is 4000W:
When frying food using the right heating port 4R (requires a maximum of 1500W), the remaining demand is 2500W.
If cooperative cooking is performed from this state, the remaining demand is 1000 W less than the 3500 W of power required for cooperative cooking, so it is necessary to reduce the heat power of the right IH coil. However, if the heat power is reduced while the automatic control menu is being executed, the cooking will not go well, so the heat power of the automatic control menu cannot be reduced.
In the end, with 4000W, it is not possible to secure the necessary firepower for the automatic control menu.

As is clear from the above explanation, before starting the "cooperative cooking mode" KM1, the power required for cooperative cooking (3500W) and the power required for the cooking menu of the right heating port 4R or left heating port 4L (1500W) are determined. ) It is necessary to determine (confirm) whether or not there is a demand (preliminary reservation of power demand) of 5000W, which is the total value of 5000W.

Next, FIG. 30 will be explained.
FIG. 30 shows the determination processing in steps ST6 and ST7 in FIG. 29. These determinations are performed by the permission condition determination unit 54.
Step ST5 is a stage in which the input key 153M is operated.
In the next step STX1, the permission condition determining unit 54 of the control device 40 compares the latest state of the cooking device 1 with the permission condition 1 and permission condition 2 described above, and compares the permission condition 1 and the permission condition 2 with the latest state of the heating cooker 1. Determine whether or not.

In step STX1 in FIG. 30, audio (notification) 1 to audio (notification) 4 indicate the content notified to the user US by the audio notification unit 50. In other words, the content of step ST8 in FIG. 29 is specifically shown.

Displays 1 to 4 in FIG. 30 show the contents displayed on the central display section 16M. Note that these Displays 1 to 4 are not displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 that is displayed from step SB2 in FIG. 28, but are displayed on the central display section 16M while the first specific screen is not displayed. It is to be displayed. In other words, this is an explanation of the display contents performed at step ST8 in FIG. 29 (audio notification is also performed).

The first specific screen 16M1 is not displayed unless the prerequisites (permission condition 1 and permission condition 2) for transitioning to the "cooperative cooking mode" KM1 are satisfied. Therefore, after the user US sets (selects) various conditions (for example, identification information 167) of "cooperative cooking mode" KM1, if it is determined that permission condition 1 or permission condition 2 is not satisfied, step After the display and audio notification in ST8, the process returns to the initial standby screen (step ST4 in FIG. 29). Therefore, the user US does not disallow the heating operation command for the first time after setting all the control conditions and the like for the cooperative cooking mode KM1, and is not forced to perform unnecessary input operations.

Next, FIG. 31 will be explained.
FIG. 31 explains the operation from starting the heating cooker 1 to acquiring a cooking recipe data CD for the heating cooker 1 from the communication terminal 200 or an external server (cloud server 300). be.

In this first embodiment, the recipe data CD of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 includes the cooperative cooking menu number (identification information 167), the order of the plurality of heating means used, the heating means used in the cooking process 1, and the cooking process 2. heating means used for each cooking step, if there are cooking steps after cooking step 3, default (standard setting) control conditions for each cooking step (heating power, heating time, heating target temperature, etc.) If there is, it includes information on the setting value or the range of the setting value, but is not limited thereto.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, a specific input key (such as 153M) to be inputted first is associated with each cooking process of the recipe data CD. That is, in the case where there are two cooking processes, the control device 40 has a first part M1 (of the recipe data CD) for setting cooking process 1, and a second part M1 for setting cooking process 2. The specific input keys of portion M2 that should be inputted in two stages have been determined.

In FIG. 31, steps SS1 to SS8 are operation steps specified in the integrated control program of the control device 40, and basically match the contents specified in the basic operation program explained in FIG.

First, when the operation button 20A of the main power switch 20 is pressed (SS1), the next step SS2 is a step in which the heating control section 43 determines whether there is an abnormality.

Steps SS1 to SS4 are the same as steps ST1 to ST4 described with reference to FIG. 29, so duplicate explanation will be omitted.

In step SS5, the heating cooker 1 confirms with the user US in advance whether to send a signal requesting the provision of the cooking recipe data CD to the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300 registered in advance. This is the desired movement. A "confirmation screen" is displayed on the central display section 16M, and the audio notification section 50 also makes a notification. This "confirmation screen" is one type of standby initial screen 16MH described later.

If the user US sets in advance to automatically execute the external connection in step SS5 using the function setting key 151KP of the input operation section 15, the external connection will be automatically executed at a specified timing.

In other words, as described in FIG. 1, pairing between the smartphone 200 and the cooking appliance 1 can be automatically performed, and wireless communication 330 can be established between the smartphone 200 and the cooking appliance 1.

In the external connection in step SS5, transmission and reception are alternately repeated several times between the cooking device 1 and an external communication device (such as the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300).
For example, when the cooking device 1 first transmits the signal 1, the communication terminal 200 receives the signal 1 and transmits the signal 2. Upon receiving this, the cooking device 1 transmits the internal state (e.g. , total power consumption setting value, etc.) and obtain "status information", which will be described later. If there is no problem with the content of the status information, the heating cooker 1 transmits a standby signal 2 to proceed to the next step.

Finally, the reception of the necessary "setting information" (including the recipe data CD) from the external communication device (such as the communication terminal 200) is completed. In other words, when the heating cooker 1 side receives a signal once, it performs several alternating communications such as sending back another signal immediately after, and finally receives the necessary "setting information". Complete. In this series of steps, there is a step in which the user US side is asked to decide whether or not to receive the recipe data CD. In other words, in this heating cooker 1, there is a step in which the user US can clearly and in advance recognize that the recipe data CD will be received, so the process proceeds to the step of executing the recipe data CD without the user US knowing. This is prevented. These details will be explained later.

On the other hand, as part of facilitating the external connection as described above, in step SS6, predetermined icons, information, etc. are displayed on the central display section 16M to inform the user US that the recipe data CD can be acquired. An example of this is shown in the display screen 2C in FIG. The display notifying the user US is concisely displayed in text, for example, on the display screen 2C in FIG. 41, as shown in the acquisition operation support information 60P.

If you do not agree to the connection to the external device (such as the communication terminal 200) in this step SS6, as shown in step SS9, the registered external device (the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300) will have the message "Current recipe A non-reception message such as "No data CD is being received" is sent. In this way, the user US can also set up to refuse reception.

This FIG. 31 shows the process of acquiring only one cooking process part in the recipe data CD.
When there are two or more cooking processes as in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the processes of steps SS5 to SS8 described above need to be performed in the same way in each of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2.

That is, in the case of a recipe data CD with two cooking processes, in the first part M1 (of the recipe data CD) for setting cooking process 1, a specific input key is pressed to agree to the acquisition of the first part M1. input operations are required. Incidentally, as mentioned above, when the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is "hamburger", the specific input key to be operated to obtain the first portion M1 is either 152R of the right operation section 15R or the left operation section. It is 152L of 15L.

On the other hand, if the user agrees to connect to the external device and issues an instruction to acquire data in step SS6, the data acquisition unit 53 of the cooking appliance 1 acquires the recipe data CD from the external device via the communication unit 51. The acquired recipe data CD is stored in a specified "temporary storage unit" (not shown) in the recipe data storage unit 42 (step SS7).

In the next step SS8, the contents of the recipe data CD acquired from the external device, particularly the identification information 167, are displayed on the central display section 16M. Furthermore, the voice notification unit 50 notifies the user of the fact of reception, such as, for example, "We have received the hamburger recipe."

In the first embodiment, the control device 40 is programmed to permit the data acquisition unit 53 to acquire the recipe data CD if the input key 180, which is the selection unit for the voice input mode 2, is operated during the standby period in which the control device 40 waits for a command to start the heating operation after the main power switch 20 is turned on and power supply is started.

That is, if the user US presses the input key 180 at step SS6, the step is determined as "Yes" and acquisition of the recipe data CD is permitted. However, several conditions must be met before the recipe data CD is actually acquired by the control device 40. This will be explained in detail later.
Note that if there are two or more cooking steps, the process returns to step SS5 after step SS8. In order to agree to the acquisition of the second portion M2 (of the recipe data CD) for setting the cooking process 2, it is necessary to input a specific input key in step SS6. For example, if the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is "hamburger" as described above, only one specific input key 153M is to be operated in order to obtain the second portion M2.

Next, FIGS. 32 to 38 will be explained.
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the main input steps for the three cooking modes after the main power is turned on in the cooking device 1. FIG. 33 is a flowchart 1 showing the input process in the cooking device 1 after the main power is turned on. FIG. 34 is a flowchart 1 showing the input process in the cooperative cooking mode in the cooking device 1. FIG. 35 is a flowchart 1 showing the input process in the complex cooking mode in the heating cooker 1. FIG. 36 is a flowchart 1 showing the input process in the individual cooking mode in the heating cooker 1.
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the main input steps when cooking by acquiring recipe data in the cooking device in three cooking modes after turning on the main power. FIG. 38 is a flowchart 1 showing the operation of acquiring recipe data CD from the outside in the cooking device 1. FIG. 39 is a flowchart 2 showing the operation of acquiring recipe data CD from the outside in the cooking device 1.

32 to 36 show the case of the above-mentioned "voice input mode 1A". That is, this is a case where one input operation section 15 (for example, central operation section 15M) includes the input key 154M as the "dual-purpose key" among the plurality of input keys.
Therefore, when the input key 154M changes to the "voice input mode 1A", the input functions of the input keys (156M, 158M, etc.) other than the input key (dual-purpose key) 154M are disabled from that point on. It's a pattern. Note that the voice input mode can be set using the input key 153M as well as with the input key 154M.

32 to 36 are not cases in which cooking is performed by acquiring recipe data CD from the outside (communication terminal 200, etc.), but the user US operates the input operation section 15 of the cooking device 1 to perform cooking. It explains when to do so.

FIG. 32 will be explained.
In FIG. 32, outlined symbols (such as 153M) indicate input keys 153M and the like to be operated in steps S2 to S15 below. In other words, the main input keys are displayed in white text.
Furthermore, the range indicated by the broken line frame indicates the range that can be input by voice in the "voice input mode 1" which is switched when the input key (multi-purpose key) 154M or the like is "long pressed".

Steps S2 to S6 show the operation steps in the cooperative cooking mode KM1.
Steps S7 to S11 show the operation steps in the combined cooking mode KM2.
Steps S12 to S15 show the operation steps in the single cooking mode KM3 using the first heating means HM1.

When the main power switch 20 is turned on, the standby initial screen 16MH is first displayed on the central display section 16M (step S1).
Next, when the input key 153M is touched, the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is selected (step S2), and the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed (step S3).

At this stage, on the first specific screen 16M1, at least three cooking menus are displayed simultaneously on one screen as explained in FIGS. 19 to 22, but each time the input key 154M or 155M is touched, , different cooking menus can be displayed one after another (step S4).

In step S5, control conditions for one cooperative cooking menu can be selected using input keys 156M and 157M. If input of control conditions is not necessary, the input key 151M may be pressed. In this way, it is possible to proceed to cooking process 1 of cooperative cooking mode KM1 (step S6).

As is clear from FIG. 32, if the input key (combined key) 154M is "long pressed" in step S4, the control device 40 switches to the "input standby state" by voice, so in steps S4 to S5 You can input the range of conditions by voice. For example, a cooking menu and control conditions can be input as a set by the user US's voice, such as "Hamburger preheat 180 degrees Celsius." Note that only the control conditions other than the food to be cooked may be input by voice, such as "heat power 7 hours 10 minutes". Note that the voice input mode can also be set by pressing and holding the input key 153M at step S2.

Next, FIG. 32 will be described.
In step S2, if the input key 154M or 155M is touched without touching the input key 153M, the composite cooking mode KM2 is selected (step S7) and the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed (step S8).
Each time the input key 154M or 155M is touched, different control menus (see FIG. 16) can be displayed one after another (step S9).

In step S9, if one control menu (for example, "warming") displayed on the second specific screen 16M2 is sufficient, then by pressing the input key 156M or 157M, the control conditions (microwave output, heating time, etc.) can be changed. can be selected (step S10).

In step S10, if the control conditions for one composite cooking mode are sufficient, pressing the input key 151M allows the process to proceed to cooking process 1 of composite cooking mode KM2 (step S11).

As is clear from FIG. 32, if the input key (combined key) 154M is "long pressed" in step S7, the control device 40 switches to the "input standby state" by voice, so in steps S9 to S10 You can input the range of conditions by voice. For example, a control menu (in this case, "warming") and control conditions can be input as a set by the user US's voice, such as "warming 500W." Note that only the control conditions may be input by voice, such as "500W for 10 minutes".

Next, FIG. 32 will be described.
If you touch either the input key 153L or 153R of the right operation section 15R or the left operation section 15L without touching the input key 153M in step S2 and without touching either of the input keys 154M or 155M in step S7, , the independent cooking mode KM3 using the first heating means HM1 is selected (step S12), and the third specific screen 16M3 is displayed on the right display section 16R or the left display section 16L (step S13).

Each time the input key 152L or 152R is touched, different control menus (see FIG. 41) can be displayed one after another (step S14).

In step S14, if one of the control menus (see FIG. 42) displayed on the third specific screen 16M3 is satisfactory, the user can then press input key 154L or 155L (in the case of the left operation unit 15L) or input key 154R or 155R (in the case of the right operation unit 15R) to select the control conditions (induction heating power, heating time, etc.) (step S15).

In step S15, if the control conditions for one single cooking mode KM3 are sufficient, induction heating is automatically started for a certain period of time (10 seconds) without pressing the input key.

As is clear from FIG. 32, if the input key (combined key) 153L or 153R is "long pressed" at step S12, the control device 40 switches to the "input standby state" by voice, so step S14 You can input the range of conditions by voice from ~S15. For example, a control menu (in this case, "boil water") and control conditions can be input as a set by the user US's utterance, such as "boil water, thermal power 6". Note that only the control conditions may be input by voice.

In addition, the control conditions can be set by operating input keys 151L or 151R (step S14). Furthermore, the timer setting time can be set using input keys 151R or 151L. These can also be input by voice after switching to voice input mode 1. For example, you can say something like "heat 6 timer 10 minutes."

As is clear from FIG. 32, the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment is
The input operation section 15 includes a first input operation section (a right operation section 15R and a left operation section 15L) for the first heating means HM1, and a second input operation section for the second heating means. (central operation section 15M),
It has input keys A (153L, 153R) arranged on the first input operation parts 15L, 15R, and input keys B (153M, 154M) arranged on the second input operation part 15M, respectively,
The control device 40 validates the touch input of the input key A (153L, 153R) or the input key B (153M, 154M), whichever comes first, and activates the heating cooking mode (cooperative cooking mode KM1, composite cooking mode). KM2, single cooking mode KM3) or control mode (the above-mentioned "warming", etc.) input process using the other input key does not start until the input of the control conditions (heating power, heating time, etc.) is completed and heating cooking is started. The structure was characterized by this.

In other words, for the three heating cooking modes (linked cooking mode KM1, combined cooking mode KM2, and single cooking mode KM3), only one of the input keys 153M, 154M, 153L, and 153R that is touched first is accepted by the control device 40, and the other input keys are placed in a state where no input command is accepted.

Therefore, for example, if input key 154M is touch-operated and switched to voice input mode by long press, input with other input keys becomes impossible (however, input keys 151M and 152M retain their input function. ).

Therefore, when the voice input mode is started by either the input key A (153L, 153R) or the input key B (153M, 154M), selection of other cooking modes or control modes is not possible. This makes it possible to prevent setting conditions from being inputted carelessly through voice input.

In addition, when inputting the cooperative cooking mode KM1 using one input key (for example, 154M) using the voice input mode, when the input key 151M is pressed to start cooking, the previous voice input The mode is canceled. Therefore, when the user US performs a touch operation to select another heating cooking method thereafter, confusion does not occur.

Next, FIG. 33 will be explained.
In FIG. 33, open symbols (for example, 153M) indicate input keys (153M, etc.) operated in steps SM3, SM4, and SM8.
In FIG. 33, step SM1 performs processing equivalent to the processing in steps ST2 and ST3 in FIG. That is, the central display section 16M is activated and the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed. The presence/absence of an abnormality is determined, and if there is no abnormality, a message to the effect that there is no abnormality and cooking can be started is displayed. Then, on the standby initial screen 16MH and the audio notification section 51, notification and audio guidance are performed to prompt selection of the heating means.

In the next step SM2, the input functions of all input operation units 15M, 15L, and 15R are enabled to prepare for touch input operation of each input key (153M, 154M, 153L, 154R, etc.). Further, the time measurement unit 15T (see FIG. 11) included in the input operation unit 15 starts measuring the elapsed time. Although FIG. 11 shows an example of the central operating section 15M, the right operating section 15R and the left operating section 15L also have the same configuration as the central operating section 15M. Therefore, it has a configuration corresponding to the time measuring section 15T.

In the next step SM3, the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is selected. In step SM4, the composite cooking mode KM2 is selected. In step SM8, the independent cooking mode KM3 is selected by the first heating means HM1.

First, in step SM3, it is determined whether or not the input key 153M has been touched, and if it has been operated, the process proceeds to the route A1 shown in FIG. 33 and FIG.
If there is no touch operation in step SM3, the determination is "No" and the process proceeds to step SM4. If either input key 154M or 155M is touched in step SM4, the determination is "Yes" and the process proceeds to the route B1 shown in Fig. 33 and Fig. 35.

In step SM4, if there is no touch operation, the determination is "No" and the process proceeds to step SM8. In step SM8, if either the input key 153L or 153R is touched, the result is "Yes" and the process proceeds to route C1 shown in FIGS. 33 and 36.

In step SM8 shown in FIG. 33, if there is no touch operation, the determination is "No" and the process proceeds to step SM5. In step SM5, the time measuring section 15T (see FIG. 11) determines whether a preset time limit TX has been exceeded. If the time limit TX has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SM3.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SM5 that the preset time limit TX has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM6 to automatically shut off the main power (hereinafter referred to as "automatic shutoff process 1"). It will be done. Then, the series of operations ends (SM7). In this manner, when no input operation is performed, the main power switch 20 is automatically opened when the time limit (for example, 30 minutes) is exceeded.

Next, FIG. 34 will be explained.
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing operations after the input key 153M is touched in step SM3 shown in FIG.
When the input key 153M is touch-operated, if the touch operation is a "long press", it is determined by the input mode determination unit 15C (see FIG. 11) of the central operation unit 15M.

Then, the determination in step SM40 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SM41. On the other hand, if it is a "short press", the determination is "No" and the process proceeds to step SM50.
Step SM41 is a step for determining whether or not the above-described "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are satisfied. If these permission conditions are not met, a denial process is performed at this stage (step SM47). Note that the disallowance process is the process of step ST8 described in FIG. 29.

If the determination in step SM41 is "Yes", the process advances to step SM42.
From step SM42, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed.
The state at the time when this first specific screen 16M1 is displayed is shown in FIG. 20, for example. Thereafter, the input key 154M or 155M is further touched to select a specific cooking menu (eg, hamburger) (it may be touched multiple times).

In FIG. 34, in step SM43, the time measurement unit 15T (see FIG. 11) starts measuring elapsed time to determine whether a preset time limit TY has been exceeded. After this step SM43, if a voice input is performed from the user US via the voice signal receiving section 56 (see FIG. 10), step SM44 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SM45.

By the way, at the stage of step SM43, the control device 40 has already been switched to the "voice input mode 1A". Therefore, if a touch input is made on the input key 155M after this step SM43, the input on the input key 155M will not be accepted by the control device 40 because of the "voice input mode 1A". In other words, unless voice input is performed, step SM44 will not become "Yes", and therefore the process cannot proceed to step SM46, which is the completion of input. Note that if the "voice input mode 1B" is set, touch input can continue as described above. Furthermore, as an exception, the voice input control program may be changed so that the "voice input mode" is canceled when the input key 154M is touched again (in this case, a "short press"). .

In this way, in this embodiment 1, immediately after the input key 154M is "pressed and held," the mode switches to voice input mode 1A, and voice input mode 1A continues automatically thereafter. However, voice input mode 1A is released when the heating operation starts (i.e., released when the input key 151M is touched).

If the time limit TY has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM46. In step SM46, it is determined whether the input has been completed, and if the determination in step SM46 is "Yes", the process enters a standby state waiting for input from the input key 151M (A21).

On the other hand, if Steps SM44 and SM46 are "No", the process returns to Step SM44 and waits for a voice input from the user US.
If it is determined in step SM45 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM45 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM48 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic cutoff processing shown in step SM6 in FIG. 33, and is a process in which the display returns from the first specific screen 16M1 to the initial standby screen 16MH and the input is not performed properly. This refers to displaying or giving an audio notification from the audio notification unit 50. After that, the process may proceed to step SM5, and then proceed to step SM6, where automatic shutoff processing is performed.

Continuing to use FIG. 34, steps after step SM50 will be described.
Step SM50 is a step of determining whether or not the above-mentioned "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are satisfied. If "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are not satisfied, a denial process is performed at this stage (step SM56). Note that the disallowance process is the process of step ST8 described in FIG. 29.

If the determination in step SM50 is "Yes", the process advances to step SM51.
From step SM51, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed.
The state at the time when this first specific screen 16M1 is displayed is shown in FIG. 20, for example. Thereafter, the input key 154M or 155M is further touched to select a specific cooking menu (eg, hamburger) (it may be touched multiple times).

In FIG. 34, in step SM52, the time measuring unit 15T (see FIG. 11) starts measuring elapsed time to determine whether a preset time limit TY has been exceeded. After this step SM52, if the user US performs a touch input via the audio signal receiving unit 56 (see FIG. 10), for example, by using the input keys 156M or 157M, step SM53 becomes "Yes" and the next Proceed to step SM54.

By the way, at the stage of step SM53, the control device 40 has already switched to touch input mode. Therefore, if the input key 155M is touch-inputted after step SM52, the input of the input key 155M is accepted by the control device 40 due to the touch input mode. In other words, as long as it is a touch input, step SM53 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SM46 where input is complete. However, as an exception, if the input key 154 is touch-inputted again (in this case, "long press"), the touch input mode may be released and changed back to "voice input mode 1".

In this manner, in this first embodiment, the touch input mode is maintained unless the input key 154M is "long pressed", and the touch input mode continues automatically thereafter. This touch input mode is automatically canceled when the heating operation is started.

If the elapsed time from step SM52 has not exceeded the time limit TY, the process advances to step SM55. Then, it is determined whether the input has been completed, and if the determination in step SM55 is "Yes", the process enters a standby state waiting for an input from the input key 151M (A22).

On the other hand, if steps SM53 and SM55 are "No", the process returns to step SM53 and waits for a touch input from the user US.
If it is determined in step SM54 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM54 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM57 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic cutoff processing shown in step SM6 in FIG. 33, and is a process in which the display returns from the first specific screen 16M1 to the initial standby screen 16MH and the input is not performed properly. This refers to displaying or giving an audio notification from the audio notification unit 50. After that, the process may proceed to step SM5, and then proceed to step SM6, where automatic shutoff processing is performed.

Next, FIG. 35 will be explained.
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing operations after either input key 154M or 155M is touched in step SM4 shown in FIG.
When the input key 154M is touch-operated, if the touch operation is a "long press", it is determined by the input mode determination section 15C (see FIG. 11) of the central operation section 15M.

Then, the determination in step SM60 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SM61. On the other hand, if it is a "short press", the determination is "No" and the process proceeds to step SM70.
Step SM61 is a step of determining whether "permission condition 3" is satisfied.
"Permission condition 3" here is different from permission condition 1 and permission condition 2 (see FIGS. 29 and 30) of the cooperative cooking mode. The "permission condition 3" in this composite cooking mode is defined as that the latest temperature of the heating chamber 6 checked by the temperature sensor group 30 is, for example, 80° C. or lower. This is because if the result measured by the temperature sensor group 30 is, for example, 100° C., it exceeds the temperature detection range (90° C. or less) of the control menu “warming”.

If "permission condition 3" is not satisfied, a non-permission process is performed at this stage (step SM67). Note that the non-permission process is a process in which a message such as "heating chamber is too high for cooking" is displayed on the initial standby screen 16MH, or a similar notification is made by the audio notification unit 50. Note that when cooking is performed in the heating chamber 6 using the third heating means HM3, the heating chamber 6 may remain at a high temperature for a while due to residual heat even after the cooking is finished.

If the determination in step SM61 is "Yes", the process advances to step SM62.
From step SM62 onwards, the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed.
The state at the time when this second specific screen 16M2 is displayed is shown in FIG. 16, for example. Thereafter, the input key 154M or 155M is further touched (it may be touched multiple times) to select a specific control menu (eg, warming).

In FIG. 35, in step SM63, the time measurement unit 15T (see FIG. 11) starts measuring elapsed time to determine whether a preset time limit TY has been exceeded. After this step SM63, if a voice input is performed from the user US via the voice signal receiving section 56 (see FIG. 10), the result of step SM64 is "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SM65.

By the way, at the stage of step SM63, the control device 40 has already been switched to the voice input mode 1. Therefore, if a touch input is made on the input key 155M after this step SM63, the input on the input key 155M will not be accepted by the control device 40 because of the voice input mode (the "voice input mode"). 1A”). In other words, unless voice input is performed, step SM64 will not become "Yes", and therefore the process cannot proceed to step SM66, which is the completion of input. As an exception, when the input key 154M is touched again (in this case, a "short press"), the "voice input mode 1" may be canceled. Further, when the "voice input mode 1B" is set, touch input of the input key 155M is accepted by the control device 40.

As described above, in the first embodiment, immediately after the input key 154M is "long pressed", the voice input mode 1 is switched to the voice input mode 1, but the voice input mode 1 is switched to the voice input mode 1 at the time when the command to start heating cooking is given (input key 151M (touch operation), it will be automatically canceled.

If the time limit TY has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM66. In step SM65, it is determined whether the input has been completed, and if the determination in step SM66 is "Yes", the process enters a standby state waiting for input from the input key 151M (B21).

On the other hand, if Steps SM64 and SM66 are "No", the process returns to Step SM64 and waits for voice input from the user US.
If it is determined in step SM65 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM65 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM68 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic cutoff processing shown in step SM6 in FIG. 33, and is a process in which the display returns from the second specific screen 16M2 to the initial standby screen 16MH and the input is not properly performed. This refers to displaying or giving an audio notification from the audio notification unit 50. After that, the process may proceed to step SM5, and then proceed to step SM6, where automatic shutoff processing is performed.

Continuing, steps SM70 and subsequent steps will also be described using FIG. 35.
Step SM70 is a step of determining whether the above-mentioned "permission condition 3" is satisfied. If permission condition 3 is not satisfied, a denial process is performed at this stage (step SM76). The "disapproval process" in this case has the same content as the disallowance process in step SM67.

If the determination in step SM70 is "Yes", the process advances to step SM71.
In step SM71, a second specific screen 16M2 is displayed.
The state at the time when this second specific screen 16M2 is displayed is shown in FIG. 16, for example. Thereafter, the input key 154M or 155M is further touched (it may be touched multiple times) to select a specific control menu (eg, warming).
At this stage, if the input key 154M is "long pressed", the mode is switched to voice input mode 1 and the process proceeds to step SM63. However, if the input key 154M is not "long pressed" and the input key 155M is inputted or the input key 154 is "short pressed", the "touch input mode" is maintained and the process proceeds to step SM72.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the voice input mode 1 is switched immediately after the input key 154M is "long pressed" in the complex cooking mode selection or control menu (e.g., warming). 1 does not continue automatically thereafter, but is canceled at the start of the heating operation. Note that when the same input key 154M is "short pressed", voice input mode 1 may be canceled at this point.

In FIG. 35, in step SM72, the timer 15T (see FIG. 11) starts measuring the elapsed time to determine whether the pre-set time limit TY has been exceeded. After this step SM72, if the user US performs a touch input, for example, using the input keys 156M or 157M, via the audio signal receiver 56 (see FIG. 10), step SM73 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SM74.

By the way, at the stage of step SM72, the control device 40 has already been switched to the touch input mode. Therefore, if a touch input is made on the input key 155M after this step SM72, the input on the input key 155M is accepted by the control device 40 because of the touch input mode. In other words, as long as it is a touch input, step SM73 will be "Yes", and the process will proceed to step SM75 to complete the input. As an exception, if the input key 154M is touched again (in this case, "long press"), the touch input mode may be canceled and the mode may be changed to return to "voice input mode 1." .

In this manner, in this first embodiment, the touch input mode is maintained unless the input key 154M is "long pressed", and the touch input mode continues automatically thereafter. This touch input mode is automatically canceled when the heating operation is started. Therefore, the normal touch input mode is restored.

If the time limit TY has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM75. Then, it is determined whether the input has been completed, and if the determination in step SM75 is "Yes", the process enters a standby state waiting for an input from the input key 151M (B22).

On the other hand, if Steps SM73 and SM75 are "No", the process returns to Step SM73 and waits for a touch input from the user US.
If it is determined in step SM74 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM74 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM77 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic cutoff processing shown in step SM6 in FIG. 33, and is a process in which the display returns from the second specific screen 16M2 to the initial standby screen 16MH and the input is not properly performed. This refers to displaying or giving an audio notification from the audio notification unit 50. After that, the process may proceed to step SM5, and then proceed to step SM6, where automatic shutoff processing is performed.

Next, FIG. 36 will be explained.
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing operations after either input key 153L or 153R is touched in step SM8 of FIG.
In order to simplify the subsequent explanation, the following explanation will be limited to the case where the left operation section 15L is operated.

If the touch operation of the input key 153L is a "long press", this is determined by the input mode determination section 15C (see FIG. 11) of the left operation section 15L. Although FIG. 11 shows an example of the central operation section 15M, the left operation section 15L also has a configuration similar to that shown in FIG. 11.

Then, the determination in step SM80 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SM81. On the other hand, if it is a "short press", the determination is "No" and the process proceeds to step SM90.
Step SM81 is a step for determining whether "permission condition 4" is satisfied.
The "permission condition 4" here is different from the permission conditions 1 and 2 of the cooperative cooking mode (see FIGS. 29 and 30) and the "permission condition 3" described above. "Permission condition 4" in this independent cooking mode KM3 is, for example, when the latest temperature of the top plate 3 is checked by the temperature sensor group 30 and the result is a high temperature exceeding, for example, 100 degrees Celsius. . This is because when the temperature of the object to be heated is detected in a non-contact manner to perform induction heating control, if the temperature is high from the start of the heating operation, accurate temperature control and induction heating control may be hindered.

If "permission condition 4" is not satisfied, a non-permission process is performed at this stage (step SM87). Note that the disallowance process is a process in which a message such as "Top plate cannot be used for cooking at a high temperature" is displayed on the initial standby screen 16MH, or a similar notification is made by the audio notification unit 50. Note that when induction heating cooking is performed, the top plate 3 may remain at a high temperature for a while even after the cooking is finished.

If the determination in step SM81 is "Yes", the process advances to step SM82.
From the time of step SM82, the third specific screen 16M3 is displayed.
An example of the third specific screen 16M3 is shown in FIG. 42, for example. The third specific screen 16M3 in FIG. It is slightly different from the third specific screen 16L3, 16R3 displayed in . Thereafter, the input key 154L or 155L may be further touched (touched multiple times) to select a specific control menu (eg, preheating).

By the way, at this stage, it has already been switched to "voice input mode 1", so in the next step SM83, the time measuring section 15T (see FIG. 11) checks whether the preset time limit TY has been exceeded. Measurement of elapsed time is started for determination. After this step SM83, if a voice input is performed from the user US via the voice signal receiving section 56 (see FIG. 10), the result of step SM84 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SM85.
For example, if the user US utters "preheat 200 degrees Celsius", the audio signal receiving section 56 converts this audio input into an electrical signal and inputs it to the audio signal analyzing section 58 .

In step SM85, it is determined whether or not the time limit TY has been exceeded. If the time limit TY has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM86.
In step SM86, it is determined whether the input has been completed, and if the determination in step SM86 is "Yes", the induction heating operation is automatically started within a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds). In other words, in the first heating means HM1 (in the case of independent cooking mode HM1) using the left operation part 16L, no special input key operation is required to start heating, and the heating operation is directly started (C21 ). Note that it may be changed so that the actual induction heating operation can be started when an input key 152L or 152R different from the input key (153L or 153R) operated in step SM8 (see FIG. 33) is touched.

On the other hand, if steps SM84 and SM86 are "No", the process returns to step SM84 and waits for voice input from the user US.
Also, if it is determined in step SM85 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM85 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM88 for error processing. Note that the error processing referred to here is slightly different from the automatic shutoff processing shown in step SM6 of Fig. 33, and refers to returning the display of the third specific screen 16M3 to the initial standby screen 16MH, displaying a message that the input has not been made properly, or notifying the user by voice from the voice notification unit 50. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SM5, and may proceed to step SM6 for automatic shutoff processing.

Continuing, steps SM90 and subsequent steps will be described using FIG. 36.
Step SM90 is a step for determining whether the above-described "permission condition 4" is satisfied. If permission condition 4 is not satisfied, a denial process is performed at this stage (step SM96). The "disapproval process" in this case has the same content as the disallowance process in step SM87.

If the determination in step SM90 is "Yes", the process advances to step SM91.
From the time of step SM91, the third specific screen 16M3 is displayed instead of the standby initial screen 16MH.
An example in which the third specific screen 16M3 is displayed is shown in FIG. 42, for example. The third specific screen 16M3 in FIG. 42 is an example when displayed on the left display section 16L. The third specific screen 16R3 on the right display section 16R is also basically the same. Thereafter, the input keys 154L, 155L, 151L, etc. are further touched (touched multiple times) in order to select a specific control menu (eg, preheating).

In FIG. 36, in step SM92, the time measurement unit 15T (see FIG. 11) starts measuring elapsed time to determine whether a preset time limit TY has been exceeded.

By the way, at this stage, it is the "touch input mode", so in the next step SM93, the time measuring section 15T (see FIG. 11) performs a process to determine whether or not the preset time limit TY has been exceeded. Measurement of elapsed time begins.

The input keys 154L, 155L, 151L, etc. may be touch operated to sequentially input control conditions such as a control menu (eg, preheating) and preheating temperature (touch operations may be performed multiple times). In this way, when a touch input is made by the user US, step SM93 becomes "Yes", and if the time limit TY has not been exceeded, the process advances from step SM94 to the next step SM95.
For example, if the user US inputs the conditions of "preheating" and "200°C" sequentially by touch input, the left operation unit 15L converts this input into an electrical signal and inputs it to the input signal analysis unit 52 (see FIG. 10). do.

Note that if the input keys 154L or 155R are "long pressed", these input keys do not have the function of switching to the voice input mode 1, so voice input cannot be performed.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the selection of the independent cooking mode HM1 of the first heating means HM1 and the selection of the heating parts (right heating part 4R, left heating part 4L) (using input keys 153R and 153L) are possible. Therefore, immediately after "long pressing" the input key 153R or 153L (step SM8 in FIG. 33), the mode switches to voice input mode 1, but voice input mode 1 continues automatically thereafter.

In other words, once you "long press" the input key 153L or 153R, voice input mode 1 is maintained regardless of the operation of the voice input key (if set to "voice input mode 1B") (if any). Even if the input key 153L (153R) is "long pressed" again (twice in succession), the voice input mode 1 remains.

If the time limit TY has not been exceeded in the determination of step SM94, the process proceeds to step SM95. Then, a determination is made as to whether the input has been completed. If the determination of step SM95 is "Yes", the induction heating operation will automatically start within a certain period of time (e.g., 10 seconds). In other words, in the first heating means HM1 using the left operation unit 16L (in the case of single cooking mode HM1), no special input key operation is required to start heating, and the process proceeds directly to the heating operation (C22). Note that the process may be modified so that the actual induction heating operation will start when an input key 152L different from the one operated in step SM8 (see FIG. 33) is touched.

On the other hand, if steps SM93 and SM95 are "No", the process returns to step SM93 and waits for a touch input from the user US.
If it is determined in step SM94 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM94 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM97 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic cutoff processing 1 shown in step SM6 in FIG. This refers to displaying the information or giving audible notification from the audio notification unit 50. After that, the process may proceed to step SM5, and then proceed to step SM6, where automatic shutoff processing is performed.

Next, FIG. 37 will be explained.
FIG. 37 shows the operation of the cooking device 1 when the recipe data CD is obtained from the outside (communication terminal 200, etc.) and cooking is performed. FIG. 37 shows the operation of the central operation section 15M. This is different from the explanatory diagram including the left and right operation sections 15L and 15R as shown in FIG.
The range indicated by the dashed line frame is voice input in "Voice input mode 1" which can be set by "long pressing" the input key (combined key) 153M and "Voice input mode 2" which can be selected with the input key 180. It shows the range of what is possible.

The same parts as those in FIG. 32 will be given the same reference numerals and duplicated explanations may be omitted.
Steps S2A to S6 show the operation steps in the coordinated cooking mode KM1.
Steps S7A to S11 show the operation steps in the combined cooking mode KM2.
Steps S12A to S15 show the operation steps in the single cooking mode KM3 using the first heating means HM1, i.e., the central heating port 4 C. Note that there is also cooking in which the microwave oscillator (magnetron) 11 and the radiant heat heating means 12 are used separately, but detailed explanations are omitted here.

When the main power switch 20 is turned on, the standby initial screen 16MH is first displayed on the central display section 16M (step S1).
Step S1A generally shows a series of processes for acquiring recipe data CD from external communication terminal 200, cloud server 300, etc.

Steps S2A, S7A, and S12A perform determination processing corresponding to steps S2, S7, and S12 in FIG. 32, respectively, but are slightly different from FIG. 32.
In steps S2, S7, and S12 in FIG. 32, the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the composite cooking mode KM2, etc. are determined in response to the input from the input operation section 15.
In contrast, in FIG. 37, in step S1A, the data acquisition unit 53 analyzes the first received "notice information 1" and identifies at least the identification information of the cooking menu. Note that, at this point, it is not necessary to specify one cooking mode from among the three types of cooking modes. For example, when receiving the first portion M1 of the cooking process 1 of the recipe data CD for "hamburger" in the cooking menu described above, the identification information 167 is recognized.

In step S1A, the identification information is further determined and the specific input key that needs to be operated to obtain data for cooking step 1 is identified as 153M. Then, a display is displayed to prompt the user to operate this specific input key 153. At the time of step S1, the initial standby screen 16MH is displayed, but upon receiving advance notice information 1 from the outside, the display changes to a receiving operation display screen 16MM (not shown) which indicates that a response operation to receive a recipe is in progress.

Furthermore, when the specific input key 153 is operated, predetermined selection information A is transmitted to the outside, and upon reception of the selection information A, the communication terminal 200 transmits the first part for setting the cooking process 1. Since the data of M1 is transmitted, the data is received in step S1A.

In steps S2A, S7A, and S12A, the data of the first portion M1 received in step S1A is analyzed to determine one cooking mode among the three types of cooking modes. In this first embodiment, when the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is selected and the cooking menu is "hamburger", the only specific input key is 153M of the central operation unit 15M. Note that in step S1A, after receiving the preview information 1 from the external communication terminal 200, cloud server 300, etc., there is a process of operating an appropriate specific input key corresponding to the preview information 1 in advance. Details of this processing will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 54, 55, 59, 60, etc.

As described above, in addition to analyzing the operation of the input operation section 15 in step S1A by the input signal analysis section 52, the data acquisition section 53 analyzes the contents of the notice signal A of one recipe data CD. Discrimination can be reliably performed for each of the four cooking steps (cooking steps 1, 2, etc.), cooking mode, cooking item (cooking menu), and specific input key. As a result of this determination (identification), the information on the identified cooking mode is sequentially used in subsequent steps S2A, S7A, and S12A.

In step S2A, it is determined whether the cooking mode is the cooperative cooking mode KM1. If it is determined that the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is selected here, the process advances to step S3.
In step S3, the display of the first specific screen 16M1 is started (if the above-mentioned "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are satisfied), and one cooking menu acquired from the outside and the control conditions are displayed. Ru. Therefore, by touching the input key 154M or 155M, it is possible to change the control conditions (heating power, heating target temperature, etc.) for that cooking menu and display the change results on the first specific screen 16M1 ( Step S5).

FIG. 37 shows a case where the mode is switched to the voice input mode before step S5.
As described with reference to FIG. 32, in the touch input mode, the control conditions (heating power, heating target temperature, etc.) can be changed by touching the input key 154M or 155M. In this FIG. 37, when operating the specific input key 153M at step S1A, if a "long press" operation is performed, the mode is switched to the voice input mode from that point on, so the desired control condition can be set by voice input. can be input by voice (step S20). In other words, there is no need to touch the input keys 154M or 155M.

In step S5, if the control conditions for one cooperative cooking menu (cooking name: hamburger) are sufficient, the input key 151M may be pressed. In this way, it is possible to proceed to cooking process 1 of cooperative cooking mode KM1 (step S6).

As described above, if the input key (combined key) 153M is "long pressed" in step S1A, the control device 40 switches to the "input standby state" by voice, so in step S20, Control conditions can be entered by voice. For example, a cooking menu and control conditions can be input as a set by the user US's voice, such as "Hamburger preheat 180 degrees Celsius." Note that only the control conditions other than the food to be cooked may be input by voice, such as "heat power 7 hours 10 minutes". In addition, since the cooking menu (for example, "hamburger") is already known at the stage of acquiring the preview information 1 or the recipe data CD, voice input of only the control conditions other than the food to be cooked may be used as described above. .

Continuing, FIG. 37 will be described.
If it is determined in step S2A that the cooking menu is not in cooperative cooking mode KM1, the process proceeds to step S7A. In step S7A, if it is determined that the cooking menu is in the complex cooking mode KM2, the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed on the central display section 16M (step S8). In this step S8, display of the second specific screen 16M2 is started, and one cooking menu acquired from the outside and control conditions are displayed.
That is, on this second specific screen 16M2, only one cooking menu targeted by the recipe data CD is displayed. This point differs from step S8 in FIG. 32.
In the touch input mode, in step S10, each time the input key 154M or 155M is touched, results reflecting different control conditions can be displayed on the second specific screen one after another.

However, in FIG. 37, if the specific input key (combined key) 153M is "long pressed" in step S1A, the control device 40 switches to the "input standby state" by voice, so in step S21, Control conditions can be input using voice input mode.

In step S10, if the control conditions for one (complex cooking mode) cooking menu are sufficient, by pressing the input key 151M, it is possible to move to cooking step 1 of the complex cooking mode KM2 (step S11).

In this way, since the state can be switched to an "input standby state" by voice at step S1A, in step S21, control conditions can be input by voice within a certain range. For example, a control condition can be input by the user US speaking, such as "500 W." Note that multiple control conditions can be input by voice at the same time, such as "500 W 10 minutes."

Continuing, FIG. 37 will be described.
If it is determined in step S7A that the mode is not complex cooking mode KM2, the process advances to step S12A. In step S12A, if it is determined that the recipe data CD is for a single cooking mode using the heating chamber 6 or the central heating port 4C, a third specific screen 16M3 is displayed on the central display section 16M (step S13 ). That is, in step S13, display of the third specific screen 16M1 is started, and the identification information of one cooking menu acquired from the outside and the control conditions are displayed.

Therefore, the control conditions (heating power, heating time, etc.) of the cooking menu displayed on the third specific screen 16M3 can be selected by pressing the input key 154R or 155R (step S22).

However, in this FIG. 37, when the input key 153M is "long pressed" at step S1A, the control device 40 is switched to the "input standby state" by voice, so in step S22, the control device 40 is switched to the voice input mode. Control conditions can be input using .
That is, since the control device 40 is switched to the "input standby state" by voice before step S22, control conditions can be input by voice within a certain range in step S22. For example, control conditions can be input by the user US's voice, such as "heat power 2 30 minutes". In this case as well, since the name of the dish has already been determined, there is no need to vocalize the name of the dish.

As is clear from FIG. 37, the heating cooker 1 of this Embodiment 1 is
The input operation section 15 includes a first input operation section (a right operation section 15R and a left operation section 15L) for the first heating means HM1, and a second input operation section (for the second heating means). It has a central operation section 15M),
It has input keys A (153L, 153R) arranged on the first input operation parts 15L, 15R, and input keys B (153M, 154M) arranged on the second input operation part 15M, respectively,
The control device 40 validates the touch input of the input key A (153L, 153R) or the input key B (153M, 154M), whichever comes first, and activates the heating cooking mode (cooperative cooking mode KM1, composite cooking mode). KM2, independent cooking mode KM3) or control mode (such as the above-mentioned "warming"), the input process using the other input key does not start until the input of the control conditions (heating power, heating time, etc.) is completed and heating cooking is started. The structure was characterized by this.

In other words, the three heating cooking modes (cooperative cooking mode KM1, combined cooking mode KM2, and independent cooking mode KM3) are controlled by only one of the input keys 153M, 154M, 153L, and 153R that was touched first. The input command is accepted by the device 40, and the other input keys are in a state where input commands are not accepted.

Therefore, for example, if input key 154M is touch-operated and switched to voice input mode by long press, input with other input keys becomes impossible (however, input keys 151M and 152M retain their input function. ).

Therefore, when the voice input mode is started by either the input key A (153L, 153R) or the input key B (153M, 154M), selection of other cooking modes or control modes is not possible. This makes it possible to prevent setting conditions from being inputted carelessly through voice input.

In addition, if the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is entered using one input key (e.g., 153M) in voice input mode, the voice input mode is cancelled when input key 151M is pressed to start cooking. Therefore, there is no confusion when the user US subsequently performs touch operations to select another cooking mode.

Further, "notice information 1" including information indicating a specific (one) cooking menu is transmitted from the external communication terminal 200, and the specific input key indicated by the notice information 1 is pressed in response to reception of the notice information 1. If an input operation is performed (step S1A), the process proceeds to a process of acquiring recipe data CD of the cooking menu related to preview information 1. In other words, selection of the cooking mode, cooking menu, control menu, etc. by touch input using the input keys 153 or 154 becomes unnecessary.

Furthermore, in this first embodiment, when using recipe data CD acquired externally for cooking that has two or more types of heating means and two or more cooking steps, as in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, at least the cooking Only when the correct specific input key (153M for cooking process 1 in FIG. 37) is input after receiving preview information 1 in advance at the stage of process 1 and the stage of cooking process 2, the recipe data CD It becomes possible to obtain

Next, FIGS. 38 and 39 will be explained.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart 1 showing the operation of acquiring recipe data CD from the outside in the cooking device 1. FIG. 39 is a flowchart 2 showing the operation of acquiring recipe data CD from the outside.

In FIG. 38, in step SL1, processing equivalent to the processing in step SM1 in FIG. 33 is performed. In the next step SL2, processing corresponding to the processing in step SM2 in FIG. 33 is performed.
Step SL3 is a process corresponding to step SS5 of external connection and notification described with reference to FIG. That is, this step is for the purpose of asking the user US to confirm in advance whether or not to send a signal requesting the provision of the recipe data CD to the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300 registered in advance.

As described above, it is also possible to automatically execute the external connection from this step SL3 (SS5) (if previously set using the function setting key 151KP described above).
Since this step SL3 includes input key operations by the user US, the details will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 54, 55, 59, 60, and the like. When the control device 40 acquires the recipe data CD, the next step SL4 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to step SL5.

The next step SL5 is a process of determining whether the received recipe data CD meets predetermined permission conditions. As described above, for example, in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, items that do not satisfy "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are not permitted as cooking menus (see FIGS. 29 and 30). Also in the composite cooking mode KM2, it is determined whether a specific "permission condition 3" is satisfied. Note that permission condition 3 is the same as that described in step SM61 of FIG. 35. Furthermore, for the first heating means HM1, it is necessary to satisfy the above-mentioned "permission condition 4" (see step SM81 in FIG. 36).

If it is determined in step SL5 that the permission conditions are not met, in the case of a cooking menu that belongs to the cooperative cooking mode KM1, a signal (data) is sent from the communication unit 51 to the outside to notify that the recipe data CD cannot be received (step SL9), as in the process described in step ST8 of FIG. 29. Note that while FIG. 29 shows the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM1, such a "non-received message" is also sent for the combined cooking mode KM2 and the single cooking mode KM3. This will be explained in more detail later.

If the permission conditions are met, the determined recipe data CD is stored in a predetermined storage area of the recipe data storage section 42 as regular data (step SL6).
Further, the identification information 167, 160 and control conditions (heating power, heating time, target temperature, etc.) included in the recipe data CD are displayed on the central display section 16. For example, a cooking menu for cooperative cooking mode KM1 is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (step SL6).

In the first embodiment, the control device 40 acquires the recipe data CD for cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 in a sequential manner for each cooking step, that is, in two stages, a first part M1 for setting cooking step 1 and a second part M2 for setting cooking step 2.
Therefore, when the recipe data CD for the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is acquired in step SL5, if the permission conditions are not satisfied in the first part M1, the process cannot proceed to step SL6. Therefore, since the cooking process 1 cannot be set, the process cannot proceed to acquiring the data for the second part M2 for the cooking process 2. In other words, only the second part M2 for setting the cooking process 2 cannot be acquired.

The next step SL7 is a step for modifying the control conditions. For example, in the linked cooking mode KM1, the control conditions (for cooking process 1) displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (e.g., heating time, target heating temperature, heat, etc.) can be changed as appropriate by operating the input keys 156M to 159M of the central operation unit 15M. Note that since the recipe data CD is acquired on a cooking menu basis, it is already determined that the cooking menu is a specific one (e.g., hamburger steak), and this cannot be changed to another cooking menu (e.g., roast beef).

If it is desired to modify the control conditions, for example, in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the contents of the change may be inputted as appropriate using the central operation unit 15M (step SL10). In this case, "voice input mode 1" can be selected, and it is also possible to input by voice.

If it is determined in step SL4 that the recipe data CD (first portion M1 for setting cooking process 1) has not been received, the process proceeds to step SL8. In step SL8, it is determined whether a preset time limit TX has been exceeded. If the time limit TX has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SL4. However, if the time limit TX has been exceeded, the process advances to step SL11. Step SL11 is "automatic shutoff processing 1" for automatically shutting off the main power supply, similar to step SM6 described in FIG. 33. Note that the time limit TX of step SL8 and the time limit TX of step SM6 described with reference to FIG. 33 may not be the same time, but may be set to different times.

In the case of cooperative cooking mode KM1, although FIG. 38 only shows the steps from obtaining the first portion M1 that sets cooking process 1 to correcting the control conditions, cooking process 1 is finished and cooking process 2 is started. Before doing so, as explained in step SL3 above, it is necessary to operate a specific input key that should be inputted before cooking step 2 to transmit selection information A (202) to communication terminal 200. .

Next, FIG. 39 will be explained.
FIG. 39 shows the operation when the input key 180 is operated to select "voice input mode 2".
In FIG. 39, step SS5 is the same as step SS5 described in FIG. 31, so duplicate explanation will be omitted.
Step SS10 is a step for determining whether or not the input key 180 in voice input mode 2 has been operated. If the input key 180 is pressed once, the answer is "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SS11. If the input key 180 is not operated, the process proceeds to the normal touch input mode (step SS15).

If the data acquisition unit 53 is able to acquire the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51, the answer to step SS11 is “Yes”.
If it is determined in step SS11 that the recipe data CD has not been received, the process advances to step SS16. In step SS16, it is determined whether a preset time limit TX has been exceeded. If the time limit TX has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SS11. However, if the time limit TX has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SS17. Step SS17 is "automatic shutoff processing 1" for automatically shutting off the main power supply, similar to step SM6 described in FIG. 33. Note that the time limit TX of step SS17 and the time limit TX of step SM6 described with reference to FIG. 33 may not be the same time, but may be set to different times.

It is determined whether the content of the recipe data CD received in step SS11 satisfies the above-mentioned "permission condition" (see step SL5 in FIG. 38), and if satisfied, step SS12 becomes "Yes".

If the permission conditions are not met, as described in step SL9 of FIG. 38, the communication unit 51 transmits a signal (data) to the outside to inform the outside that the recipe data CD cannot be received (SS18).

If the permission conditions are met, the determined recipe data CD is stored in a predetermined storage area of the recipe data storage unit 42 as legitimate data.
Further, the identification information 167, 160, etc. and control conditions included in the recipe data are displayed on the central display section 16. For example, when the recipe data CD is in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, it is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (step SS13).

The control conditions (for example, heating time, target heating temperature, heating power, etc.) displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 can be changed as appropriate by voice input obtained via the voice signal receiving section 56 of the input operation section 15 (step SS14, SS15).

When "voice input mode 2" is selected by the input key 180, the "voice input mode 2" continues until the heating operation of one cooking menu is started. There is no switching to "touch input mode" during the input stage. This is because switching in the middle of the input process may cause confusion in the user US's operations.

If you want to switch to the touch input mode, you can press the input key 180 again at some stage. Returns to touch input mode from the moment you press it. Note that after returning to the touch input mode, for example, if the input key 154M is "long pressed", the mode is switched to "voice input mode 1". Therefore, in the case of voice input mode 1 (set to voice input mode 1B), for example, when the input key 156M is inputted, the input function of the input key is not disabled, so that input can be performed.

The collaborative cooking mode KM1 has not been described in detail so far.
In the cooperative cooking mode KM1, it is necessary to sequentially acquire the first part M1 that sets cooking process 1 and the first part M2 that sets cooking process 2. Therefore, if it is determined in step SS12 that the permission conditions are not satisfied after receiving the first part M1, the operation of acquiring the recipe data CD cannot be continued at that point.

Next, FIG. 40 will be explained.
FIG. 40 is a flowchart for explaining the operation of the heating control section 43 in the cooking device 1 when the control device 40 switches to the voice input mode 1. Although FIG. 40 shows the case of cooperative cooking mode KM1, the process is basically the same in other cooking modes.

In FIG. 40, step SS20 indicates the time when the input mode of the control device 40 is switched to voice input mode 1.
In the next step SS21, the voice notification unit 50 and the central display unit 16M notify that the acceptance of voice input has begun. The state of the central display unit 16M at this point is, for example, as shown in Fig. 21. That is, a mark 154V indicating that the mode has been switched to the voice input mode is displayed on the central operation unit 15M, and voice input mode display information 179A indicating that voice input is being accepted is displayed as auxiliary information 179 on the first specific screen 16M1.

In the next step SS22, the audio signal analysis unit 58 transitions to an input standby state in which it receives a voice command from the user US. Further, a time measuring unit (not shown) inside the control device 40 starts measuring the elapsed time.

The voice input information emitted by the user US is acquired by the voice signal receiving unit 56 via a microphone (not shown). The audio signal receiving unit 56 converts the acquired audio information into a predetermined audio signal and transmits it to the audio signal analyzing unit 58 (step SS23).

The audio signal analysis unit 56 analyzes the received audio signal (step SS24) and displays the input content on the central display unit 16M (first specific screen 16M1). For example, as described with reference to FIG. 22, a notification such as "Hamburger right IH automatically selected" is announced, and also displayed in text on the first specific screen 16M1 (step SS25).

In step SS25, if the input information is insufficient, the voice notification section 50 further provides a voice guidance such as "Please specify the preheating temperature." Alternatively, a specific range of control conditions may be notified, such as "200° C. is recommended as the preheating temperature. Please specify the temperature."

If there is insufficient input of control conditions necessary to start the heating operation, the process returns to step SS23. Before returning to step SS23, the voice notification unit 50 points out the control conditions for which input is insufficient and performs an operation to prompt input (not shown).

If the heating control unit 43 determines that the input of the control conditions necessary to start the heating operation has been completed (step SS26), the process proceeds to step SS27. In step SS27, since the voice input has been completed, it is announced that the voice input mode 1 will be canceled, and a touch operation on the input key 151M is recommended (step SS27). Note that the voice input mode 1 is immediately canceled when the input key 151M is touched.

On the other hand, if the voice command is not accepted in step SS23, the process proceeds to step SS28. In step SS28, it is determined whether the elapsed time from step SS22 exceeds a predetermined time limit TZ. If the time limit TZ has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SS23. However, if the time limit TZ (for example, 5 minutes) has been exceeded, the process advances to step SS29. Step SS29 is "automatic shutoff processing 2" similar to step SM6 in FIG. 33. In addition, this "automatic shutdown process 2" issues an alarm to the user US by the audio notification unit 50 in the state of the first specific screen 16M1, then automatically switches to the initial standby screen 16MH, and then automatically switches to the standby initial screen 16MH. This is a series of processing in which the main power switch 20 is opened. This prevents the data from being left unattended for a long time during the input process for some reason, ensuring safety.

Next, FIG. 41 will be explained.
FIG. 41 shows the display contents of the central display section 16M corresponding to each main operation step after the main power switch 20 is turned on.
When the main power switch 20 is turned off, the central display section 16M is not activated and therefore does not display any information.
When the main power switch 20 is turned on, the control device 40 performs a self-diagnosis to determine whether there is an abnormality as described above, and then displays the "display screen", which is one display form of the standby initial screen 16MH in FIG. 1'' is displayed on the central display section 16M.

In the display screen 1 shown in FIG. 41, 60A is a display message notifying that the power is on. 60B is two-dimensional information (two-dimensional code) for guiding the user to the recipe data providing server 301, which is a dedicated recipe posting site, via the network NW. 60C is a text explaining the meaning of the two-dimensional code (hereinafter referred to as "two-dimensional information explanatory text").

When the two-dimensional code 60B is optically read by the communication terminal 200 described above, it is possible to guide and connect to the recipe data providing server 301 that holds information on various cooking recipes. This two-dimensional information explanatory text 60C and the display text 60A are one type of "standby common information" 60N.

After display screen 1 of FIG. 41 is displayed, display screen 2C is automatically displayed. On this display screen 2C, a recommendation message 60H prompts the user US to perform an input operation to select a heating source. Note that the display screen 2A or 2B may be displayed after the display screen 1.

On the display screen 2A, the text display 60D that reads "Beware of bumping" is one of the warning displays. This "bumping" is a phenomenon that occurs when heating a viscous food (liquid) such as curry or stew, and the inside of the food is overheated to a temperature above the boiling point, resulting in sudden violent boiling. A phenomenon that causes As steam is emitted from the heated liquid, hot liquid droplets may fly out and be dangerous. The timing and cause of bumping are said to be the introduction of foreign matter or impact from the outside. Therefore, when a metal pot or the like containing food to be cooked is placed on the top plate 3 and heated by induction, a warning is given when stirring the food. The information on this caution display 60E is one type of "standby common information" 60N.

The four display screens, display screen 1, display screens 2A, 2B, and 2C shown in FIG. 41, are referred to as a "common screen" or "standby initial screen" 16MH. Note that forms other than these four may be included in the common screen 16MH.

In the display screen 2B, 60E is a warning display warning that the inside of the heating chamber 6 is at a high temperature and not to touch it carelessly. If the control device 40 detects that the heating chamber 6 has not cooled down sufficiently after performing oven cooking in the heating chamber 6, it automatically switches to the state of the display screen 2.

Although the display screens 2A and 2B cannot be displayed at the same time, they may be displayed alternately at intervals of several seconds to call attention to both the bumping display and the high temperature display. Moreover, the content of the alert on the display screens 2A and 2B may be simultaneously provided by audio using the audio notification unit 50.

In the display screen 2C of FIG. 41, 60P is the acquisition operation support information described above. This acquisition operation support information 60P indicates that in order to acquire the recipe data CD in the cooking device 1, it is necessary to touch a specific input key in advance.
For example, in the case of a cooking menu called "hamburger" that belongs to the cooperative cooking mode KM1, cooking step 1 is performed using the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L, so it is not possible to touch the input key 152L or 152R. The acquisition operation support information 60P is displayed. In addition, in accordance with this display, the audio notification unit 50 may provide audio notification.

As is clear from display screen 1 to display screen 2A to 2C in FIG. 41, the display of these various pieces of information, including the acquisition operation support information 60P, is performed using the entire display screen. In other words, rather than displaying it partially in any of the first area 22 to third area 24 described above, in order to secure as large a display area as possible, the first area 22 to third area 24 are displayed as an integrated display so that they cannot be distinguished, and the user US sees it as if it is displayed in the entire central display section 16M.

Next, FIG. 42 will be explained.
FIG. 42 is an enlarged plan view illustrating the operation of the left display section 16L of the heating cooker 1.
FIG. 42 shows the third specific screen 16L3 for the independent cooking mode KM3. 42 is displayed when the input key 153L (see FIG. 6) is operated after step SS4 in FIG. 31.

Next, when the input key 152L is operated, control menus to be executed by the left heating port 4L are displayed one by one on the left display section 16L. As shown in the display screen 3A in FIG. 42, the control menu that is displayed first (default setting) can be set to "keep warm", "fried food" in the display screen 3B, or "fried food" in the display screen 3C. Users can make separate settings such as whether to use "preheating" or not.

Furthermore, when the input key 153L is operated at step SM8 in FIG. 33 and the input key 152L is operated at step SM93 in FIG. Is displayed. Each time the input key 152L is pressed, the display of the control menu changes one by one (such as keeping warm, frying, preheating, etc.). That is, each time the input key 152L is pressed, one can be selected from a plurality of control menus.

The control menus that can be selected with the left heating port 4L (in the induction heating independent cooking mode KM3) include, for example, "keep warm", "boil water", "simmer", "deep fry (automatic cooking)", "preheat", etc. The driving time, heating power, driving pattern, etc. of the left IH coil 9L differ for each control menu.

Display screen 3A in Fig. 42 shows a case where the "keep warm" control menu is selected. Display screen 3B shows a case where the "fry" control menu is selected. Display screen 3C shows a case where the "preheat" control menu is selected.
The auxiliary information 179A is displayed adjacent to the display portion of the name of each control menu on the third specific screen 16M3 after switching to the voice input mode. Therefore, it is not displayed when the mode is not the voice input mode.

In addition, in the central display section 16M, using the central IH coil 9M in charge of the central heating port 4C, select "Keep Warm" in the control menu (induction heating independent cooking mode KM3) ("IH Keep Warm" shown in FIG. 12). ), the display screen 3A shown in FIG. 42 can be displayed by touching the input key 154M or 155M several times or more. In this case, the central display section 16M takes a display form like the display screen 3A, and this screen is referred to as a "third specific screen" 16M3.

Next, FIG. 43 will be explained.
FIG. 43 explains the operation steps of the control device 40 of the cooking device 1 from acquiring the recipe data CD to finishing the cooking process. This is the case when cooperative cooking mode KM1 is selected.

FIG. 43 shows the process after acquiring the data of the first portion M1 for setting the cooking process 1 out of the recipe data CD for one cooking menu that requires the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2.
The control device 40 determines whether the first portion M1 has been successfully received (step SU1). If successful, the process advances to step SU2. In step SU2, the identification information (for example, 167) of the corresponding cooking menu, the set control conditions (heating power, heating time, etc.), and information on all cooking processes are displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 to the third specific screen 16M1. It is displayed on any one of the screens 16M3. Note that the "cooking process information" here may be process information 172 as described with reference to FIG. 44 below.

If the cooking is from the cooperative cooking menu, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed in step SU2. Therefore, if the content displayed on the first specific screen 16M is acceptable, heating cooking can be started, but if there is a preheating process by the first heating means HM1 before the cooking process 1, the selected left heating port 4L or the input keys (153L, 153R) of the left operating section 15L or right operating section 15R corresponding to the right heating port 4R are touch-operated.

Cooking process 1 is started (step SU3), and in the case of timer cooking, cooking process 2 is ended when the set time elapses (step SU4). If it is not timer cooking, the cooking process 1 is started (step SU3) and stopped (step SU4) in response to start and stop commands from the user US.

In step SU4, when the cooking process 1 is finished, in the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the first specific screen 16M1 (or 16L1, 16R1) of the cooking process 1 is maintained, and various settings for proceeding to the cooking process 2 are displayed. Information is displayed (step SU5).
In step SU5, information such as that cooking process 1 has been completed and that an input operation is required to obtain the second portion M2 for setting cooking process 2 is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1.

Next, when preview information 1 (201) is transmitted from the communication terminal 200 as a step before receiving the recipe data CD regarding the second portion M2 from the communication terminal 200, after receiving the preview information 1, A specific input key corresponding to preview information 1 is operated (step SU5).

For example, in the case of cooking using the cooperative cooking menu, when the cooking process 2 is performed in the heating chamber 6, it is necessary to operate the only specific input key 153M on the central operation unit 15M. For example, in the case of the above-mentioned "hamburger steak", the cooking process 2 is executed using the heating chamber 6 and combining the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3, so the specific input key 153M is pressed. Perform a touch operation (step SU6).

In the next step SU7, it is determined whether the second portion M1 of data from the communication terminal 200 has been successfully received. If successful, the process advances to step SU8.
In step SU8, the display contents at step SU2 are updated. This "update" means, for example, that the process information 172 (see FIG. 44) changes to a display that emphasizes the next process.
In step SU8, as explained in step SU2, the identification information (for example, 167) of the corresponding cooking menu, the set control conditions (heating power, heating time, etc.), and information on all cooking steps are sent to the 1 specific screen 16M1.

After that, by pressing the input key 151M of the central operation section 15M, the cooking process 2 can be started (step SU9). Moreover, in the case of timer cooking, the cooking process 2 can be automatically ended when the set time comes (step SU10). If the cooking is not on a timer, the user US can immediately end the cooking process 2 by pressing the input key 152M (step SU10). Furthermore, if the control conditions are such that the internal temperature of the heating chamber 6 or the temperature of the food to be cooked is detected and the process is automatically stopped, the cooking process 2 can be automatically terminated based on these temperature conditions (step SU10).

Next, FIGS. 44 to 46 will be explained.
44 to 46 are enlarged plan views showing the central operation section 15M and the central display section 16M when the recipe data CD is acquired and cooking (cooking name: hamburger) is performed in the cooperative cooking mode KM1.

FIG. 44 shows a state immediately after receiving preview information 1 from the communication terminal 200, and at this stage, data of the first portion M1 has not yet been received.
In FIG. 44, reference numeral 177 is reception start information indicating that the process is before the recipe data CD is acquired from an external device (the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300). "Before start of reception" is displayed in text, making it easy to see that the cooking menu (for hamburger cooking) displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 is currently in the process of being acquired.
172 is process information, and in this FIG. 44, a preheating process by the first heating means HM1, a cooking process 1 by the first heating means HM1, and a microwave heating means (second heating means HM2) are used. It can be seen that the three cooking steps 2 are executed sequentially.

170 is operation support information. In the example of FIG. 44, a specific input is made to the user US to select either the left heating port 4L or the right heating port 4R for the preheating process using the first heating means HM1. The user is prompted to operate either the key 152L or 152R. In the process information 172, the words "preheating" are displayed in white letters, which foretells that the process will proceed to the preheating stage.
As shown in FIG. 44, all input functions of the various input keys 153M to 159M, 151M and 152M of the central operation unit 15M are disabled, and a star-shaped figure is drawn at the position of the light emitting unit 21M. As can be seen from the fact that the light emitting section 21M does not emit light at all (including blinking).

Next, FIG. 45 will be explained.
FIG. 45 is an enlarged plan view 2 showing the central operation section 15M and the central display section 16M when the recipe data CD is acquired and cooking (cooking name: hamburger) in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is performed.
In FIG. 45, 173 is an external recipe identification unit indicating that the recipe data CD is acquired from an external device (the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300). It is easily understood that the cooking menu (for cooking hamburger steak) displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 is a recipe obtained from an external source by displaying the words "received recipe" in text.

In FIG. 45, the light emitting section 21M corresponding to the input key 151M is in a standby state where the heating operation can be started at any time. In order to indicate this, the input key 151M is blinking to prompt the user to operate the input key 151M. The broken line circle indicates that the light emitting section 21M is blinking.

In FIG. 45, a star-shaped figure is drawn at the position of the light emitting section 21M. The input function of each input key (for example, 156M, 157M) placed on the front side of the light emitting part 21M is valid, and if you touch it at this point, you can adjust the heat power, heating time, etc. It means that.

In Fig. 45, light-emitting section 21M corresponding to input keys 157M and 156M is not illuminated. This is because the heating port has been selected in advance on communication terminal 200 side, and advance notice information 1 (201) has been transmitted to cooking appliance 1.
If the left and right heating ports 4L and 4R have not been selected, as shown in Fig. 45, it is necessary to select either the heating section specification section 171L for selecting cooking with the left heating port 4L or the heating section specification section 171R for selecting cooking with the right heating port 4R. To make this selection, it is necessary to activate the input functions of the corresponding input keys 156M and 157M. Fig. 45 shows a case where the received notice information 1 (201) includes selection information of the two heating ports 4L and 4R during the process of acquiring the data of the first part M1 of the recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200. In other words, this is the state after the specific input key 152L of the left operation section 15L has already been operated and the selection information A (202) indicating the operation has been transmitted.

In this first embodiment, as explained in FIGS. 62, 63, etc., a function is provided to select either the left heating port 4L or the right heating port 4R in advance (see step SG5 in FIG. 63). , heating section specifying sections 171L and 171R in FIG. 45 are not displayed.

The data (information) of the first portion M1 of the recipe data CD acquired from the external device is displayed on the external recipe identification section 173 and displayed preferentially on the first specific screen 16M1. That is, the identification information 167 of the received recipe data CD is displayed in the "display position B" of the first specific screen 16M1. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, by pressing the input key 151M, the cooking process 1 of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 can be started immediately.
As will be explained later, when the cooking process 1 is performed using the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L after the first specific screen 16M1 as shown in FIG. Actual induction heating is not started unless one of the input keys (for example, input key 153L) of the right operation section 15R is touched.

In FIG. 45, the cooking device 1 is in a standby state in which the heating operation can be started at any time. In order to display this, the light emitting section 21M corresponding to the input key 151M is blinking to prompt the user to operate the input key 151M. The broken line circle indicates that the light emitting section 21M is blinking.

Next, FIG. 46 will be explained.
FIG. 46 shows a state immediately after receiving preview information 2 (of the second portion M2) from the communication terminal 200, and at this stage, data of the second portion M2 has not yet been received.
In FIG. 46, reference numeral 177 is reception start information indicating that the process is before the recipe data CD is acquired from the external device. "Before start of reception" is displayed in text, making it easy to see that the cooking menu (for hamburger cooking) displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 is currently in the process of being acquired.
172 is process information, and it can be seen that in FIG. 46, this is a stage before the cooking process 2 using both the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 is executed.

170 is operation support information. In the example of FIG. 46, the user US is requested to select the specific input key 153M of the central operation section 15M for cooking process 2.
As shown in FIG. 46, the input functions of all the input keys (154M to 159M, 151M and 152M) other than the specific input key 153M of the central operation unit 15M are disabled. That is, as can be seen from the fact that no star-shaped figure is drawn at the position of the light emitting part 21M, the light emitting part 21M does not emit any light (including blinking).
On the other hand, regarding the specific input key 153M, the corresponding light emitting section 21M is blinking to prompt the user to operate the specific input key 153M. The broken line circle indicates that the light emitting section 21M is blinking.

Next, FIG. 47 will be explained.
FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the cooking process of the cooperative cooking menu and the operation of the input operation section 15.
In the example shown in FIG. 47, the cooperative cooking menu is composed of two cooking steps 1 and 2.
FIG. 47 shows a case where cooking is performed using external recipe data CD.
Cooking process 1 is an example in which the second heating means HM2 is used.

The data of the first portion M1 (cooking process 1) of the recipe data CD is acquired during the preparation period P1 in FIG. 47.
In the data of the first portion M1 (cooking step 1), in the example of FIG. 47, the following conditions are defined in a predetermined computer program format. Control conditions such as firepower may also be specified.
(1) Identification information of cooking menu (167 etc.) and identification number of cooking process 1.
(2) The heating means to be driven (in the case of multiple heating means, the order in which they are driven) and the control conditions such as their heating power.
(3) When the first portion of preview information 1 (201) is received, information specifying the specific input key 153 is displayed on the display unit 16.
(4) When the setting information of the first portion is received, wait for a touch operation from the input key 151M and then start the heating operation of the cooking process 1.
(5) If there is an input from the input key 153R (153L), stop the heating operation of cooking process 1, or if certain conditions (continuous cooking time or reaching the target temperature) are met, start cooking process 1 at that point. stop heating operation.
(6) After stopping the heating operation in cooking process 1, a heating suspension period P3, which will be described later, is maintained for a certain period of time from that point on.
(7) When the cooking process 1 is stopped, notify the communication terminal 200 of the end of the cooking process 1 or the start of the heating suspension period P3.
(8) During the heating suspension period, communication with the communication terminal 200 regarding the cooking process 2 is permitted.
Note that data specifying the temporal length of the heating suspension period P3 may also be included. The data in (1) and (2) above are essential, and (3) to (8) may be omitted.

The data of the second portion M1 (cooking step 2) of the recipe data CD is acquired during the heating suspension period P3 in FIG. 47.
In the example of FIG. 47, the following conditions are defined in the data of the second portion M2 (cooking step 2) in a predetermined computer program format. Control conditions such as firepower may also be specified.
(1) Identification information of cooking menu (167 etc.) and identification number of cooking process 2.
(2) The heating means to be driven (in the case of multiple heating means, the order in which they are driven) and the control conditions such as their heating power.
(3) When the second part of the preview information 2 (201) is received, information specifying one or both of the specific input keys 152L and 152R is displayed on the display unit 16.
(4) When the setting information of the second portion is received, the heating operation of the cooking process 2 is started after a touch operation from the input key 153L or 153R.
(5) When there is a touch operation input on the input key 153L (153R), stop the heating operation in cooking process 2, or when certain conditions (continuous cooking time or target temperature reached) are met, start cooking at that point. Stop the heating operation in step 2. Note that the above data (1) and (2) are essential, and (3) to (5) may be omitted.

In the example of the recipe data CD in FIG. 47, cooking step 1 is performed using a microwave heating source (second heating means HM2), and cooking step 2 is performed by moving the food to be cooked onto the top plate 3 and heating it by induction. This is a configuration that performs the following.

In addition, this cooking device 1 has additional protection measures in place to prevent the cooking mode settings and control conditions from being inadvertently changed in response to an external command signal.

In the case of FIG. 47, the second heating means HM2 is operated first, and after the heating operation is completed, the first heating means HM1 is operated, but at the same time as the second heating means HM2, the third heating means HM2 is operated. Alternatively, the radiant heating means 12 may be operated.

As shown in FIG. 47, the collaborative cooking menu shown here is composed of four steps.
P1 is the first stage (preparation period), which is the period from when the input key 153M is operated to execute the coordinated cooking menu to when cooking step 1 in the heating chamber 6 is started by the input key 151M.

The operation of the specific input key 153M (central operation unit 15M) during the preparation period P1 is one method necessary for communicating from the communication terminal 200 to the cooking device 1. That is, when preview information 1 (201) regarding the first portion M1 of the recipe data CD is received from the communication terminal 200, it is necessary to touch the specific input key 153M in response.

Thereafter, when the input key 151M is operated after receiving the data regarding the first portion M1 of the recipe data CD, the preparation period P1 ends and the process shifts to the heating cooking period P2 (cooking step 1).
Note that at the stage when the first part M1 of the recipe data CD is received, the initial standby screen 16MH has been switched to the first specific screen 16M1, so when the user US presses the input key 151M, the central display section 16M This means that the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed.

P2 is a heating cooking period (cooking step 1) by the first heating means HM1.
In this cooking process 1, microwaves are supplied to the inside of the heating chamber 6, and the heating operation of the object to be cooked (not shown) is started.
This cooking process 1 is started when the control device 40 confirms that the door 7 is opened once during the preparation period P1 and then closed. The door opening/closing signal from the opening/closing detection section 10 described above is used by the control device 40.
Note that the control device 40 measures the time required from the time the door 7 is opened until the door 7 is closed again, and if a certain allowable time TX is exceeded, from that point on, the input key is not pressed. A safety measure has been adopted to prevent the heating operation from starting even if 151M is pressed. The cooking process 1 will not start unless the input key (start key) 151M is pressed after the door 7 is closed.

At the stage when the cooking process 1 is started, the control device 40 has already finished determining the permission conditions (1 and 2), so it knows the usage status of both the right heating port 4R and the left heating port 4L. .
Therefore, as a default setting, the control device 40 makes the heating ports that are not used for heating cooking in an occupied state at the time of starting the cooking process 1 in the cooperative cooking mode. In other words, both or one of the right heating port 4R and the left heating port 4L is occupied. As a result, the right heating port 4R and the left heating port 4L cannot be used for other cooking purposes.

The cooking process 1 is basically determined in advance by the operation program of the cooperative cooking menu. For example, when the standard heating time has elapsed, the audio notification section 50 will notify you, and the first specific screen 16M1 will also display a message such as "X minutes will soon pass." In other words, the user US is notified that the end time of the cooking process 1 is approaching.
To finish the cooking process 1, the user US only has to press the input key 152M once.

P3 is a heating pause period during which cooking process 1 by the second heating means HM2 is temporarily stopped and cooking process 2 by the first heating means HM1 is started.
When the heating pause period P3 starts, the input functions of the right operation unit 15R and the left operation unit 15L that may be used in the cooking process 2 are enabled. In addition, the left and right display units 16L, 16R also start to be driven, and the first specific screens 16L1, 16R1 start to be displayed.

This heating pause period P3 is a period necessary for checking the degree of heating of the food to be cooked in cooking process 1, adding seasoning, or adding another food to be cooked and performing cooking process 2. . Furthermore, it is a period necessary for moving the food to be cooked from the heating chamber 6 onto the top plate 3.

The operation of the specific input key 152L (left operation section 15L) or 152R (right operation section 15R) during the heating suspension period P3 is one method necessary for communicating from the communication terminal 200 to the cooking device 1. That is, when preview information 2 (201) regarding the second portion M2 of the recipe data CD is received from the communication terminal 200, it is necessary to touch the specific input key 152L or 152R accordingly.

The heating port for carrying out the cooking process 2 must be selected as either the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L. If the left heating port 4L is set as the default setting, it is necessary to touch the specific input key 152L of the left operation section 15L during the heating pause period P3.

Thereafter, when the input key 153L is operated after receiving the data regarding the second portion M2 of the recipe data CD, the heating suspension period P3 ends and the process proceeds to the heating cooking period P4 (cooking step 2).
Note that at the stage when the second portion M1 of the recipe data CD is received, the display of the first specific screen 16M1 that was displayed on the central display section 16M in the cooking process 1 is maintained on the left and right display sections 16L and 16R. That is, when the user US presses the input key 152L, the first specific screen 16L1 is displayed on the left display section 16L.

In the cooking process 2, the user US may be able to individually set control conditions (for example, cooking time and target temperature) by operating at least one of the two input keys 154L and 155L. Depending on the menu, the user US may not be able to change the control conditions.

When the input key 153L is pressed to command the stop of the cooking operation, the cooking process 2 ends. In addition, in the case of timer cooking, induction heating cooking ends automatically when the time elapses, and cooking process 2 ends.

As is clear from FIG. 47, from the time when the specific input key 153M of the central operation unit 15M used in the cooking process 1 is touched in order to select the cooperative cooking menu, the heating chamber 6
cannot be used for other cooking purposes. Note that depending on the cooking menu, the specific input key to be operated during the preparation period P1 may be the left operation section 15L. In that case, when the input key 152L of the left operation section 15L is operated, the left heating port 4L becomes occupied.

As is clear from the above description, the control device 40 performs the following function restriction processing.
(1) Input signals from various input keys in the central operation unit 15M where the specific input key 153M is located are subjected to processing to invalidate or restrict input. For example, the input functions of input keys 154M and 155M are disabled. As a result, during the heating cooking period P2 (cooking process 1) to heating cooking period P4 (cooking process 2), the central operation unit 15M is not used (input )become unable.
(2) Even in the heating cooking period (cooking step 1), the left and right operating sections 15L and 15R can be used (the input signals from the left and right operating sections 15L and 15R are not invalidated).

In this way, from the stage of the preparation period P1 before the cooking period (cooking process 1), only the heating chamber 6 of the cooking process 1 is occupied.
Therefore, the heating chamber 6 becomes "occupied" by selecting the cooperative cooking menu.

Note that even if the control device 40 detects that the door 7 has changed from the open state to the closed state before starting the heating cooking period (cooking process 1), the temperature inside the heating chamber 6 is still the standard. If it is higher than the above value, there is a concern that the control device 40, non-contact (infrared) sensor 13, and thermistor sensor 14 may mistakenly recognize the abnormally high temperature as the completion of cooking even before cooking begins in the heating chamber 6. There is.
Therefore, before the start of the heating cooking period (cooking process 1), if the temperature of the heating chamber 6 is too high, the first specific screen 15M1 displays the message "Due to the high temperature, the second heating The message ``Means HM2 (microwave heating means) cannot be used'' is displayed.

The period indicated by the thick arrow in FIG. 47 is the reception restriction period TZ1 for one recipe data CD. In the acquisition restriction period TZ1 indicated by the thick arrow, other than the one (one type) recipe data CD acquired in the preparation period P1, no other (different cooking) recipe data CD can be acquired. In other words, this indicates that the recipe data CD for the second cooking cannot be acquired during this acquisition restriction period TZ1.

After the input key 153M is touched once and the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, the restriction section 55 performs the restriction operation as described below.
Note that the reception/transmission function of the communication unit 51 is enabled at the time the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed (before that, at least the reception function is disabled).
In addition, if two or more specific input keys (for example, 153M and 152L) are inputted at the same time, the control device 40 recognizes that the operation is abnormal and inputs the input keys (for example, 153M and 152L) , 152L) are not processed as input signals. When transmitting selection information A (202) before acquiring recipe data CD, which will be described later, the control device 40 ignores such (simultaneous) input operations of a plurality of specific input keys, or Or, if the input is abnormal, a warning will be issued.

The restriction unit 55 built into the control device 40 operates as follows.
As shown in FIG. 47, cooking menu A of a specific cooperative cooking mode KM1 acquired from the outside cannot be changed to another cooking menu B (for example, "hamburger steak") of the same cooperative cooking mode KM1. To change, it is necessary to operate the input key 152M to temporarily cancel the cooperative cooking mode KM1 and return to the initial standby screen 16MH.

In other words, once the limited period indicated by the thick arrow in FIG. 47 has begun, the cooking using the specific linked cooking menu A obtained from outside can be cancelled at any time by operating the input key 152M. Once a cancellation operation has been performed in this way, the screen returns to the initial standby screen 16MH, and in this state (preparation period P1), it is necessary to touch the specific input key 153M again in accordance with the operation of the communication terminal 200.

In addition, for a specific cooperative cooking menu A based on the recipe data CD obtained from an external source, another cooperative operation will be performed during the period until all cooking processes (from cooking process 1 to cooking process 2 to cooking process N) are completed. The control device 40 cannot acquire the recipe data CD of the cooking menu C from the outside (smartphone 200, etc.).

In other words, when the limited period shown by the thick arrow in FIG. Cooking can be performed using the recipe data CD. However, until all the cooking steps of this cooking menu A are completed, no additional recipe data CD can be acquired from outside.
In this way, once the reception restriction period TZ1 of one recipe data CD is entered, reception of other recipe data CDs cannot be started. This reception restriction period TZ1 automatically ends when one cooking menu is completely completed (as shown in FIG. 47). Alternatively, when the start key 151M is pressed and heating cooking starts, it automatically ends. This latter example is not shown in FIG. In addition, the former "cooking menu is completely finished" means that the user US arbitrarily stops heating during the cooking process, and the control device 40 detects the elapsed time and temperature status and automatically starts heating. Including both if stopped.

Next, FIG. 48 will be explained.
FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the cooking process of the cooperative cooking menu and the operation of the input operation section.
In the example shown in FIG. 48, the cooperative cooking menu is composed of three cooking processes: cooking process 1, cooking process 2, and cooking process 3.
This FIG. 48 is not a case in which cooking is performed using a recipe data CD from an external source, but the user US selects a cooking menu using the input operation section 15 and selects a recipe data CD held in the recipe data storage section 42. This is an example to use. Note that the cooking process 1 is an example in which the first heating means HM1 is used.

Regarding the contents of the recipe data CD, in the example of FIG. 48, the following conditions are stored (stored) in the recipe data storage section 42 in a predetermined computer program format. Control conditions such as firepower are also specified. Note that FIG. 48 does not show an example of the simple recipe data CD.
(1) Waiting for the input of the input key 151M to start the induction heating operation at the right heating port 4R (or left heating port 4L).
(2) Stop the heating operation when there is an input from the input key 153R (153L), or stop the heating operation at that point when certain conditions (continuous cooking time or reaching the target temperature) are met.

The program included in the recipe data CD defines a heating suspension period P3 and a heating suspension period P5, as in FIG. 47.
The temporal lengths of these heating pause periods P3 and P5 are not specified. However, in order to prevent cooking from being interrupted for an excessively long time, for example, the elapsed time of each of cooking process 1 and cooking process 2 is counted based on the end point, and if 30 minutes have elapsed, for example, Processing such as issuing a warning and forcibly stopping execution of the cooking menu may be included.

In the example of recipe data CD in Figure 48, cooking step 1 is performed using the first heating means HM1, cooking step 2 is performed using a microwave heating source (second heating means HM2), and finally cooking step 3 is provided in which the food to be cooked is moved onto the top plate 3 and induction heating is performed to finish off the cooking by compensating for insufficient heating.

In the example shown in FIG. 48, the first heating means HM1 is operated first, and after the heating operation is completed, the second heating means HM2 is operated. However, at the same time as the second heating means HM2, the third heating means Alternatively, the radiant heating means 12 may be operated.

As shown in FIG. 48, the cooperative cooking menu shown here is composed of six stages.
P1 is a first stage (preparation period), in which the input key 153M is operated to execute the cooperative cooking mode KM1, and the input key 154M or 155M is operated to select the cooperative cooking menu. As explained in FIG. 45, when the left heating port 4L is set as default, the user presses the start key 151M using the central operating section 15M, and finally operates the input key 153R using the right operating section 15R. In this way, the period until the heating cooking operation is started at the right heating port 4R (induction) is the preparation period P1.
In addition, if you want to execute cooking process 1 with the right heating port 4R, operate the input key 156M or 157M as shown in FIG. 45, select the right heating port 4R, and then press the start key 151M. good.

If the "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are satisfied when the input key 153M is operated, the control device 40 displays the first specific screen 16M1. Note that FIG. 48 does not illustrate the operation (start, end) of the first specific screen 16M1.

When the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed (on the central display section 16M), one of the cooperative cooking menus can be selected by operating the input keys 154M and 155M. Thereafter, when the input key 153R is operated, the preparation period P1 ends, the mode shifts to the cooperative cooking mode (using the right heating port 4R), and the process proceeds to the heating cooking period P2.

At the stage when the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, if the identification information 167 of the cooperative cooking menu desired by the user US is displayed at a predetermined position on the first specific screen 16M1 (default display), the input key 154M, 155M operation is not necessary.

The heating cooking period P2 is a period of the cooking process 1 by the first heating means HM1.
In this cooking process 1, the induction heating operation is started after the object to be cooked, such as a suitable metal pot, is placed on the right heating port 4R and the input key 153R is pressed.
As described above, in the first embodiment, the cooking process 1 is started with the start key 151M, but immediately after that, it is necessary to touch the input key 153R or 153L on the corresponding right operation section 15R or 15L. be.

At the stage when the cooking process 1 is started, the control device 40 has already finished determining the permission condition 1 and the permission condition 2, so that the heating section of the first heating means HM1 (induction heating means) in use is I know it. In other words, the usage status of both the right heating port 4R and the left heating port 4L is grasped.
Therefore, as a default setting, the control device 40 determines to use the "right heating section" 4R in the cooking process 3 of the cooperative cooking mode, and makes the right heating port 4R occupied.

The cooking process 1 is basically determined in advance by the operation program of the cooperative cooking menu. For example, when the standard heating time has elapsed, the audio notification section 50 will notify you, and the first specific screen 16M1 will also display a message such as "X minutes will soon pass." In other words, the user US is notified that the end time of the cooking process 1 is approaching.
To finish the cooking process 1, the user US only has to press the input key 153R once.

P3 is a heating suspension period from when the cooking process 1 by the first heating means HM1 is temporarily stopped until the cooking process 2 by the second heating means HM2 is started.

This heating pause period P3 is a period necessary for checking the degree of heating of the food to be cooked in cooking process 1, adding seasoning, or adding another food to be cooked and performing cooking process 2. . Furthermore, it is a period necessary for moving the food to be cooked into the heating chamber 6.
The heating pause step P3 ends when the input key 151M is pressed, and the process proceeds to the cooking step 2 of P4.

This cooking process 2 is started when the control device 40 confirms that the door 7 is opened once during the pause period P3 and then closed. The door opening/closing signal from the opening/closing detection section 10 described above is used by the control device 40.

The control device 40 measures the time required from the time when the door 7 is opened until the door 7 is closed again, and if a certain "allowable time" is exceeded, from that point on, the input key 151M is Safety measures have been adopted to prevent the heating operation from starting even if you press . Note that the "permissible time" here may be set to the same time as the time limit TX (30 minutes) described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 39.

The cooking process 2 basically ends automatically when the heating time predetermined by the operation program of the linked cooking menu has elapsed or when the temperature of the food to be cooked rises to a set value (for example, 90° C.). . For example, in a certain cooperative cooking menu, heating is started with a microwave output of 500W. Furthermore, if the user US opens the door 7 at an arbitrary timing, the microwave irradiation is stopped instantly and the heating operation is stopped.

In the cooking process 2 of P4, the user US may be able to individually set control conditions (for example, cooking time and target temperature) by operating at least one of the four input keys 156M to 159M. Depending on the cooking menu, the user US may not be able to change the control conditions.

The example in FIG. 48 shows a case where the input key (stop key) 152M of the central operation section 15M is pressed to end the cooking process 2. When the input key 152M is pressed to issue a command to stop cooking, the cooking process 2 ends and the process proceeds to the heating pause period P5.

During this heating pause period P5, the user US opens the door 7, takes out the food to be cooked from inside the heating chamber 6, and places it on the top plate 3. Note that the object to be cooked is placed in an object to be heated N such as a metal pot.
Then, when the input key 153R of the right heating section 4 is pressed to command the start of cooking, the heating pause step P5 ends and the process proceeds to the heating cooking period P6 ("cooking step 3" of induction heating).

This heating pause period P5 is a period necessary for checking the degree of heating of the food to be cooked in cooking process 2, adding seasonings, or adding another food to be cooked and performing the next cooking process 3. It is. For example, in cooking process 2, only frozen food is heated as the food to be cooked, and in cooking process 3, food that has been soaked in seasonings or cooking liquid, or cooked separately by preheating etc. is heated in the same food. It can be added to thing N. This expands the range of cooking possibilities.

P6 switches from the cooking process 2 using the second heating means HM2 (microwave heat source) to the cooking process 3 using the first heating means HM1 (in this case, induction heating means, for example, the right heating port 4R).
In this cooking process 3, when cooking is being performed using the right heating port 4R as described above, by operating the input keys 154R and 155R (see FIG. 8), control conditions (for example, cooking time and target temperature) can be set. ) can be set individually by the user US.

In this cooking process 3, if the left heating port 4L is used for heating, the user US can individually set the control conditions (for example, cooking time and target temperature) by operating the input keys 154L and 155L. Can be set to

Then, when the user presses the input key 153R to command to stop cooking, the cooking process 3 ends and the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 ends. In addition, in the case of timer cooking, induction heating cooking ends automatically when the time elapses, and the cooking process 3 ends.

As is clear from FIG. 48, it is not the stage of selecting the cooperative cooking menu, that is, the time when the identification information 167 indicating the cooking name of the cooperative cooking menu is displayed on the central display section 16M, but the stage of selecting the cooperative cooking menu. From the time when the start of cooking is determined using the input key 151M, the right operation section 15R of the right heating port 4R becomes unusable. Note that if the left heating port 4L is set in the default settings, the left heating port 4L will be in an occupied state.

As is clear from the above description, the control device 40 performs the following function restriction processing.
(1) The input signal from the right operation section 15R is processed to invalidate or restrict input. For example, the input functions of input keys 151R and 152R are disabled. As a result, during the heating cooking period (cooking process 1) to the heating cooking period (cooking process 3), the right heating port 4R cannot be used (input) except in situations where input is required in cooperative cooking mode KM3. It disappears.
(2) Even in the heating cooking period (cooking step 1), the left operating section 15L can be used (the input signal from the left operating section 15L is not invalidated).

In this manner, when the heating cooking period (cooking process 1) begins, the control device 40 enters a state in which only the right heating port 4R of the cooking process 3 is occupied from the stage of the cooking process 1.

Therefore, the right heating port 4R becomes "occupied" by selecting the cooperative cooking menu. Furthermore, when looking at the entire first heating means HM1, the use of only a portion (the right side) of the three heating parts is "restricted".

Even when the heating cooking period (cooking step 1) ends, the above-mentioned restricted state of the right heating port 4R is not released.
Note that at the start stage of the cooking process 1, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, and the user US can easily understand that the cooperative cooking mode is entered.

Furthermore, even if the control device 40 detects that the door 7 has changed from an open state to a closed state before the heating cooking period (cooking process 2) begins, if the temperature inside the heating chamber 6 is higher than the reference value, there is a concern that the control device 40, the non-contact (infrared) sensor 13, and thermistor sensor 14 may mistakenly recognize the abnormally high temperature in the heating chamber 6 as indicating that cooking is complete even before cooking has begun.
Therefore, if the temperature of the heating chamber 6 is too high before the start of the heating cooking period (cooking process 1), the first specific screen 15M1 displays the message that "the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating means) cannot be used immediately due to high temperature."

The period indicated by the thick arrow in FIG. 48 is the reception restriction period TZ1 of one piece of recipe data CD, as described with reference to FIG.
When the input key 153M is touched once to select the cooperative cooking mode KM3, as shown in FIG. 48, it is not possible to obtain additional recipe data CD from an external device such as the communication terminal 200.

After the input key 153M is touched once and the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, the restriction section 55 performs the restriction operation as described below.
Note that the reception/transmission function of the communication unit 51 is enabled at the time the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed (before that, at least the reception function is disabled).

That is, the restriction section 55 built into the control device 40 operates as follows.
As shown in FIG. 48, cooking menu A of a specific cooperative cooking mode KM1 acquired from the outside cannot be changed to another cooking menu B (for example, "hamburger") of the same cooperative cooking mode KM3. To change, it is necessary to operate the input key 152M to cancel the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and return to the initial standby screen 16MH.

In other words, once the limited period shown by the thick arrow in FIG. 48 has entered, by operating the input key 152M, cooking according to the specific cooperative cooking menu A acquired from the outside can be canceled at any time. Once the cancellation operation is performed in this way, the screen returns to the standby initial screen 16MH, so it is necessary to touch the input key 153M again in that state.

In addition, for a specific cooperative cooking menu A based on the recipe data CD acquired from the outside, the control device 40 controls the recipe data CD of another cooperative cooking menu C until all cooking processes are completely completed. cannot be acquired from outside (communication terminal 200, etc.).

In other words, when the limit period shown by the thick arrow in FIG. Cooking can be performed using the recipe data CD. However, until all the cooking steps of this cooking menu A are completed, another (second) recipe data CD cannot be additionally acquired from the outside.

Next, FIGS. 49 to 53 will be explained.
FIG. 49 is a time chart 1 for explaining the entire recipe data obtainable period and control operation in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 in the heating cooker 1. FIG. 50 is a time chart 1 for explaining the entire recipe data obtainable period and control operation in the complex cooking mode KM2 in the heating cooker 1. FIG. 51 is a time chart showing a modification example 1 of the time chart shown in FIG. 49. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the input operation section 15 and the central display section 16M in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 corresponding to the modification of FIG. 51. FIG. 53 is a time chart showing a second modification of the time chart shown in FIG. 49.

In FIG. 49, SA1 to SA9 indicate operations of the control device 40.
First, the control device 40 detects that the main power switch 20 is turned on (step SA1), and transmits data indicating that it has been started (operating state data OS) from the communication unit 51 to the outside, and performs self-diagnosis. Start the mode (SA2). That is, it is checked whether the components of the cooking device 1, such as circuits and sensors, are normal.

Next, the display unit 16 is activated to display the standby initial screen 16MH (SA3). Thereafter, a display prompting the user US to select a heating means is displayed on the standby initial screen 16MH, and similar audio guidance is provided by the audio notification unit 50 (SA3A).

Next, the user US presses the input key 153M to select the cooperative cooking mode KM1. This is step SA4 in FIG. 49.

The "initial standby period" TP in the first embodiment is a period starting from step SA3A, and the timing at which this initial standby period TP ends is when the input key for starting the heating operation is pressed (SA7). It is. The start input key is the input key (start key) 151M in the cooperative cooking mode KM1.

The initial waiting period TP cannot exceed the first limit period (first time limit TX). That is, by the process of step SM5 explained in FIG. 33, the maximum time is, for example, within 30 minutes.

Next, if the input key 153M, which also serves as the selection section for the voice input mode 1, is not pressed during the initial standby period TP in which the user is waiting for a command to start the heating operation as described above, the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 will not be possible. Menu cannot be selected.
Therefore, when the input key 153M is operated, a "recipe acquisition permission condition" to be described later is satisfied. In other words, it is a program that allows the data acquisition section 53 to acquire the recipe data CD.

In other words, if the user US presses the input key 153M after step SA3A, the acquisition of the recipe data CD in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is permitted at the moment the user US presses the input key 153M (if in the combined cooking mode KM2) is the input key 154M or 155M). In the case of the single cooking mode KM3 using the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L, it is necessary to press the input key 152R or 152L.

By the way, the input key 153M also serves as a selection section for the audio input mode 1. Therefore, if the touch time TA exceeds the above-mentioned threshold value (5 seconds) by "long pressing" at step SA4, the mode is automatically switched to voice input mode 1 at the time the touch time TA exceeds the threshold value (5 seconds) (step SA5).

Therefore, since the mode is switched to voice input mode 1 from step SA5 shown in FIG. 49, during the period of voice input mode 1, the control conditions for cooperative cooking mode KM1 can be set by voice input.
Note that the voice input mode 1 automatically ends when a command to start the heating operation is given using the input key 151M.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the case of complex cooking mode KM2 will be described.
In FIG. 50, the user US operates the (specific) input key 154M to select the composite cooking mode KM2 (step SA4).
Then, during the initial standby period TP, the "recipe acquisition condition" is satisfied at the time of step SA4 when the input key 154M is pressed.

During the initial standby period TP, if the "recipe acquisition conditions" are met, the data acquisition section 53 acquires the recipe data CD of the control menu (for example, "warming") of the complex cooking mode KM2 only once via the communication section 51. can.

Furthermore, during the initial standby period TP, the recipe data CD of the cooking menu of the composite cooking mode KM2 acquired from outside can be cancelled by the input key 152M.
In practice, in the initial standby period TP, the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed first, and after the identification information 160 of the recipe data CD is displayed on that screen, the input key 152M may be pressed.

Furthermore, during the initial standby period TP, the control conditions of the acquired recipe data CD can be changed as appropriate by operating the input keys 156M to 159M (there are some control conditions that cannot be changed). In this case as well, since the control conditions are displayed on the displayed second specific screen 16M2, all that is required is to look at the display and press the input key 156M or the like.

By the way, the input key 154M also serves as a selection section for the voice input mode 1. Therefore, if the touch time TA exceeds the above-mentioned threshold value (5 seconds) by "long pressing" at step SA4, the mode is automatically switched to voice input mode 1 at the time the touch time TA exceeds the threshold value (5 seconds) (step SA5).

Therefore, since the mode is switched to voice input mode 1 from step SA5 shown in FIG. 50, during the period of voice input mode 1, the control conditions for complex cooking mode KM2 can be set by voice input.
Note that the voice input mode 1 automatically ends when a command to start the heating operation is given using the input key 151M.

In the case of FIG. 50 as well, the initial standby period TP ends when the input key (start key) 151M is operated (SA7). Then, the actual heating operation starts immediately after that (SA9).
Note that since the initial standby period TP ends at step SA9 as described above, the recipe data CD for another complex cooking mode KM2 cannot be obtained from the outside after this (however, if the recipe data CD is input during the cooking process, If the composite cooking mode KM2 is canceled using the key 152M, the recipe data CD can be acquired again).

The time difference between the acquisition of the recipe data CD in step SA3 and step SA4 in FIG. 50 is limited to within 30 minutes. If 30 minutes elapse, the control device 40 forcibly turns off the main power switch 20 for safety reasons, since the user US may have forgotten the operation input. Alternatively, the audio notification section 51 instructs an operation such as issuing a warning (see step SL8 in FIG. 38).

Note that instead of restricting the time difference between the recipe data CD acquisition between step SA3 and step SA4 to within 30 minutes, the period from step SA3A to step SA4 at the time when the initial standby period TP starts is restricted to within 30 minutes. You may change it to limit it.

As is clear from FIG. 50, the period from steps SA4 to SA7 during the initial waiting period TP is the period TB1 during which recipe data CD for the composite cooking mode KM2 can be acquired.

In the initial standby period TP, the period from steps SA4 to SA7 is the cancelable period TB2 of the recipe data CD in the complex cooking mode.
Further, the period from steps SA4 to SA7 is the control condition (control data) changeable period TB3 of the recipe data CD in the complex cooking mode KM2.

Next, FIG. 51 will be explained.
FIG. 51 is a time chart showing a modification example 1 of the time chart shown in FIG. 49. Similar to FIG. 49, SA1 to SA9 indicate the operations of the heating control section 43 of the control device 40 when cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is executed.
Step SA4 is the point in time when the user US selects the cooperative cooking mode KM1 by touching the input key 153M. In the case of FIG. 51 as well, the initial standby period TP is a period that starts from step SA3A and ends when the input key 151M is pressed (step SA7).

Even in the case of the collaborative cooking mode KM1 shown in FIG. 51, the input key 153M is pressed during the initial standby period TP, which is limited to a predetermined time (for example, within 30 minutes), so the "recipe acquisition permission condition" is met at the time of step SA4.

When the "recipe acquisition permission condition" is satisfied, the data acquisition section 53 can acquire the recipe data CD of the cooperative cooking mode KM2 only once via the communication section 51.
In FIG. 51, the acquisition timing of the recipe data CD is different from the example shown in FIG. 49, as described below.

Unless the input key 153M, which also serves as the selection section for the voice input mode 1, is pressed during the initial standby period TP, the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 cannot be selected. In other words, the recipe data CD to be acquired cannot be specified.

Therefore, when the input key 153M is operated, the "recipe acquisition permission condition" is satisfied. In other words, the data acquisition section 53 is a program that allows acquisition of the recipe data CD. The recipe data CD can be acquired from this step SA4 (in reality, the recipe data CD is subject to constraints such as the performance of the communication infrastructure, so acquisition may not be completed instantaneously, and may take a few seconds to 20 seconds. may be required).

By the way, the input key 153M also serves as a selection section for the audio input mode 1. Therefore, if the touch time TA exceeds the above-mentioned threshold value (5 seconds) by "long pressing" at step SA4, the mode is automatically switched to voice input mode 1 at the time the touch time TA exceeds the threshold value (5 seconds) (step SA5).

However, there are cases where the user US does not know that he has switched to voice input mode 1 at the above stage. Alternatively, it is assumed that the user was not aware of the long press operation.
Therefore, in the example of FIG. 51, when displaying on the first specific screen 16M1 that the recipe data CD has been acquired after the automatic switching, the screen displays that the mode has been switched to voice input mode 1 ( Step SA5A). At the same time, the audio notification unit 50 also provides notification. Note that FIG. 52 shows an example of the actual first specific screen 16M1.

Therefore, from step SA5A shown in FIG. 51, input in voice input mode 1 is accepted. Therefore, the control conditions for the cooperative cooking mode KM1 can be set by voice input from step SA5A.
Note that the voice input mode 1 automatically ends at the time when the command to start the heating operation is given using the input key 151M (step SA7).

Next, FIG. 52 will be explained.
FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the input operation section 15 and the central display section 16M in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 corresponding to the modification of FIG. 51.
The auxiliary information 179 shown in FIG. 52 is of two types. That is, one is voice input mode display information 179D indicating that voice input is being accepted since the mode is voice input mode. The other is reference information 179E that recommends input of control conditions and includes examples of control conditions that can be input (for example, standard values for preheating temperature).

At the stage shown in FIG. 52, as is clear from the fact that the light emitting parts 21M corresponding to the input keys 156M to 169M are not emitting light, control conditions cannot be input even if the input keys are touched (in this example, , because it is set to the above-mentioned "touch input mode 1A").
Further, as is clear from the fact that the light emitting section 21M corresponding to the input key 151M does not emit light, the heating operation cannot be started at this stage even if the input key 151M is pressed. This is because the input of the control conditions has not been completed.

Next, FIG. 53 will be explained.
FIG. 53 is a time chart for explaining the entire obtainable range of recipe data CD and control operations in cooperative cooking mode KM1, and shows a second modification of the time chart shown in FIG. 49.

In FIG. 53, SA1 to SA9 indicate operations of the control device 40, similar to FIG. 49.
In the example shown in FIG. 53, the hardware configuration of the voice input dedicated key 180 is changed. Specifically, the operation surface of the input key 180 is illuminated from below by a light emitting element (LED) (not shown) disposed below the operation surface.

The input function of the input key 180 becomes effective when the input key 153M or 154M is touched after the control device 40 is activated (step SA4). Furthermore, after the input function is enabled, the operation section (key operation surface) of the input key 180 becomes conspicuous in the operation section 15 because it is illuminated by the light emitting element (not shown).

The initial standby period TP starts from the time when the standby initial screen 16MH prompts the user US to select a cooking mode (step SA3A).

Step SA4 is the point in time when either one of the input keys 153M or 154M is touched, as in FIG. 50. At this point, since the "recipe acquisition permission condition" is satisfied, the recipe data CD can be acquired. Thereafter, the initial standby period TP ends when the input key 151M is operated.

In the example of FIG. 53, recipe data for the cooperative cooking mode KM1 can be acquired from the outside via the communication unit 51 after the input key 153M is touched. Note that when the input key 153M is not touched but the input key 154M is touched, the recipe data of the composite cooking mode KM2 can be acquired.

After the input key 153M or 154M is operated, when the input key 180 is touch input operated at step SA5, the control device 40 shifts to voice input mode 2. Therefore, after this step SA5, the user US can input control conditions by voice.
In the example of FIG. 53, the voice input mode 2A is used, so the input functions of (some) input keys (for example, 156M) other than the voice input dedicated key 180 are temporarily disabled. . Therefore, even if the input keys 156M and 157M are touched, nothing can be input.

Next, FIG. 54 will be explained.
What is shown in FIG. 54 shows the main processing of the control device 40 during the period until heating cooking is started using the recipe data CD acquired from the outside. In particular, it shows processing for displaying data on food ingredients and nutritional ingredients.

In FIG. 54, the recipe data CD (at least the first portion M1 and second portion M2) acquired from the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300 via the communication unit 51 is stored in the recipe data storage unit 42 of the storage device 41. It is stored (step SS30). Then, it is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (step SS31). This stage corresponds to step SS13 described in FIG. 39.

At the stage of step SS31, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed on the central display section 16M. That is, at least identification information 167 is displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 46 and 52).

In the next step SS32, in order to display food ingredients, it is determined whether there is a display command from the user US. In the example of FIG. 52, since the voice input mode 1 has already been entered, if a prescribed term (phrase) such as "food ingredients" or "calories" is uttered by voice, this step SS32 will be answered with "Yes". The judgment is as follows. The audio signal analysis unit 58 (see FIG. 10) analyzes this audio signal, and reads data on food components of the target cooking menu from the storage device 41.

In the central display section 16M, a food ingredient display screen 16M1A as shown in FIG. 24(A) is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (step SS33). The amount of energy, protein, fat and iron is then displayed in grams.
Next, the process advances to step SS34 for determining whether the input key 151M has been pressed. In this step SS34, an input is waited for a certain amount of time until the user US performs an operation. If the input key 151M is pressed during the standby time, the display returns to the first specific screen 16M1. Then, driving of the heating means (first heating means HM1, etc.) is started (SS35).

If the input key 158M is not pressed and there is no voice command to display food components for a certain period of time from the time of step SS31, the determination in step SS32 becomes "No".

If the determination in step SS32 is "No", the process advances to step SS36. In step SS36, it is determined whether there is a command to display the nutritional components of the food. In the example of FIG. 52, since the mode has already shifted to voice input mode 1, at this step SS36, a prescribed term (phrase) such as "nutrients" or "nutrition" is uttered by voice.

Then, the audio signal analysis section 58 (see FIG. 11) analyzes this audio signal, and reads out the nutritional component data of the target cooking menu from the storage device 41. Then, the determination in step SS36 is "Yes". Note that even if the input key 180 is pressed again to cancel voice input mode 2 and the input key 156M is pressed, the result in step SS36 becomes "Yes".

If the determination in step SS36 is "Yes", a nutritional component display screen 16M1B as shown in FIG. 24(B) is displayed on the display section 16 (center display section 16M) (step SS37). The amount of energy, protein, fat and iron is then displayed in grams. Then, the process advances to step SS34.

As mentioned above, if you have not operated the function setting input key 151KP in advance to display the food components and nutritional components individually each time before starting cooking, , the operations of steps SS33 and SS37 shown in FIG. 54 are not performed.

In the examples of FIGS. 49 to 53, the independent cooking mode KM3 is not shown, but similarly to the recipe data CD of the composite cooking mode KM2 and the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the data is transmitted via the communication unit 51 during the initial standby period TP. Recipe data CD can be acquired from outside.

Next, the communication terminal 200 shown in FIG. 55 will be explained.
The communication terminal 200 such as a smartphone includes a transmitter and a receiver 210, a communication controller 211, a central processing unit (CPU) 212, a ROM and RAM 213, a speaker 214, a touch-type operation unit 215, and a display screen. , a cooking device database (storage section) 217 , a posture detection section 218 , a remote control information generation section 219 , and a storage section 220 . The transmitting section and receiving section 210 have an NFC input/output section 221 for short-range wireless communication. Therefore, two routes can be used: wireless communication via the Internet and near field communication (NFC).

222 is an audio input unit that converts the speech (voice) of the user US etc. into an input signal.
The touch input type operation section 215, the terminal side display section 216, and the voice input section 222 are integrated in terms of hardware to form a display operation section 225. Note that a search unit that analyzes the audio signal from the audio input unit 222 and performs term searches, information searches, etc. is not shown. The search unit may be provided inside this communication terminal 200, or may be provided in an external cloud server 300 to provide a search function outside the communication terminal 200.

The attitude detection unit 218 is equipped with various sensors such as a gyro sensor, an acceleration sensor, and a gravity sensor, and can detect the tilt and orientation of the communication terminal 200. Thereby, a signal detecting the vertical direction of the communication terminal 200 is output to the central processing unit 212.

The central processing unit 212 receives a detection signal from the attitude detection section 218 and controls the display direction of the terminal-side display section 216.
The central processing unit 212 inputs the signal received from the communication unit 51 of the cooking device 1 to the remote control information generation unit 219.

The central processing unit 212 has a recipe data acquisition unit 230, a recipe data transmission unit 231, a terminal side recipe selection unit 232, and a food component data acquisition unit 233. The recipe data acquisition unit 230, the recipe data transmission unit 231, the terminal side recipe selection unit 232, and the food component data acquisition unit 233 may be functionally realized as a whole by a single computer program, or may be configured by separate control circuits.

The heating cooker database 217 holds "notification data" 223 of the heating cooker 1. Using this notification data, notification information (including image information) for the central display section 16M, left and right display sections 16L, 16R, and audio notification section 50 of the cooking device 1 is generated. The heating cooker database 217 also holds "remote control data" 224 for the control device 40 of the heating cooker 1.

Furthermore, the cooking device database 217 stores food ingredient/nutrient ingredient data 226 regarding the recipe data CD. In this embodiment, information on food components (energy, fat, protein, etc.) and nutritional components (potassium, calcium, etc.) are collectively referred to as "food component information" DD.

The notification data 223, the remote control data 224, and the food ingredient/nutritional ingredient data 226 may be stored in the communication terminal 200 from the beginning, but if the network NW is The food component information may be obtained by connecting through the cloud server 300 and downloading it from the cloud server 300. In other words, the cooking device database 217 does not need to be permanently stored and constructed, and information may be acquired as needed and temporarily stored in a volatile memory.

The heating cooker database 217 acquires from the cloud server 300 recipe data CDs for cooking menus (for example, "Ratatouille") that can be used in various types of cooking performed with the heating cooker 1, particularly in the cooperative cooking mode KM1. Alternatively, the information may be acquired from another communication terminal 200 via the NFC input/output unit 221.

The remote control information generating section 224 processes the signal acquired from the cooking device 1 via the central processing unit 212 and the input signal from the display operation section 225, respectively, and generates a remote control for the cooking device 1. Generate information.

The "remote control information" in the first embodiment refers to information issued from the communication terminal 200 for remotely operating the cooking device 1. Therefore, when cooking data is transmitted from the communication terminal 200 to the cooking device 1, the data becomes one type of remote control information.
The "remote control information" includes information regarding input operations of the heating cooker 1 that are compatible with all cooking modes including the cooperative cooking mode KM1 and compound cooking mode KM2, as well as information regarding input operations in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, compound cooking mode KM2, etc. It includes display information on the central display section 16M, and further includes display information on the right display section 16R and the left display section 16L. However, in all cooking modes including the cooperative cooking mode KM1, information serving as a command to start the heating operation is not included. Therefore, the cooking device 1 will not start the heating operation based on this remote control information.

Note that the "remote operation information" may not include the display information on the central display section 16M and the display information on the right display section 16R and the left display section 16L. Further, command information for functions that can be set using the function setting key 115 described above cannot be transmitted from the communication terminal 200, nor can it be generated by the communication terminal 200. That is, the function setting mode of the cooking device 1 cannot be started from the communication terminal 200.

The central processing unit 212 executes the overall processing of the communication terminal 200 according to a control program stored in the ROM/RAM, and reads necessary data from the ROM/RAM in the process of executing the processing, and performs processing. The data generated in the process of executing is stored in the ROM/RAM.

The storage unit 220 is a non-volatile memory made of a semiconductor, and can store information about the cooking device 1 read from the transmitting unit and the receiving unit 210. For example, it is used to temporarily store the recipe data CD of a specific cooking menu downloaded (read) from the cloud server 300.

Information about the heating cooker 1 is acquired from the first server 321 (not shown), which is a component of the cloud server 300. Then, the communication terminal 200 may obtain the information from the first server 321 via the network NW.

When the user US touches a specific part of the terminal-side display section 216 of the communication terminal 200, the remote operation information generation section 219 generates remote operation information based on this touch signal.
The remote control information is transmitted from the transmitter and receiver 210 to the cooking device 1 .

If the heating cooker 1 has already been powered and started, the control device 40 of the heating cooker 1 handles the received remote control information as cooking mode input operation information. For example, when a remote control signal related to the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is received, the standby initial screen 16MH of the central display section 16M changes from the receiving operation display screen 16MM for one cooking menu (for example, hamburger) in the cooperative cooking mode KM1. (not shown).

On the other hand, on the communication terminal 200 side that transmitted the remote control information, the display on the terminal side display section 216 changes based on the remote control information. In other words, the contents of the display screen of the terminal side display section 216 in the display operation section 225 of the communication terminal 200 and the display contents of the central display section 16M of the heating cooker 1 change in conjunction with each other at any time, but the timing of the change is It is not completely synchronized with the heating cooker 1.

In the communication terminal 200, even if command data for a specific cooking menu is generated as remote control information, in order for the heating cooker 1 to recognize it as regular setting information, a predetermined process (judgment) on the heating cooker 1 side is required. (including) has been completed.

The recipe data CD for the cooking menu (for example, hamburger steak) in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 includes data specifying the heating means from cooking step 1 to the final cooking step 2, and default setting control conditions (for example, heat level, heat power). (including, but not limited to) information such as value, heating time, etc.). This control condition information (recipe data CD) is transmitted all at once for each cooking process when a specific transmission key 240 (see FIG. 60) of the communication terminal 200 is pressed.

That is, on the first specific screen 16M1, detailed control condition data that can be arbitrarily set by the user US can be transmitted to the cooking device 1 without individually setting the data. Note that, as described above, the recipe data CD referred to here may be a simplified recipe data CD. The simple recipe data CD does not include information specific to the heating means (including information indicating the attributes of the heating means, information on the heating port, etc.), information on the cooking process, information indicating the order of the heating means to be driven, etc. It mainly consists of commands, data, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "commands" or "command data") that determine control conditions such as heating capacity and heating time.
In other words, the "simple recipe data" CD mainly consists of identification information that specifies a cooking menu (for example, "hamburger steak") and setting data (command data) for the control conditions.

The food component data acquisition unit 233 has data (food component data) on the components (e.g., energy content, protein, etc.) and nutritional components (e.g., vitamins A, C, iron, minerals, etc.) of various foods. .

The "food component data" of the food component data acquisition unit 233 does not have to be stored since the communication terminal 200 was manufactured. For example, in Japan, the Ministry of Education, Culture, Sports, Science and Technology makes the ``Japanese Food Standard Composition Table'' available to the public (on the Internet, etc.). Therefore, the communication terminal 200 may acquire data on a specific food from this data and store it in the food component data acquisition unit 233 for each food.

When the food component data acquisition unit 233 acquires a recipe data CD of a cooking menu (for example, hamburger steak) from the cloud server 300, data such as nutritional components for the food cannot be obtained from the cloud server 300. In this case, the communication terminal 200 can replenish data such as nutritional components and provide the data to the cooking device 1. This will be explained in detail later.

Next, FIG. 56 will be explained.
In FIG. 56, steps SE1 to SE12 show the main operation steps from the time of startup of the communication terminal 200, and mainly show the operation of transmitting the recipe data CD.

On the touch operation unit 215 of the communication terminal 200, the user US performs an operation to connect to the cloud server 300 or activate a search function (step SE1). Then, a search for a cooking menu is performed by operating a search condition input key, a cooking menu name input key, etc. shown on the terminal side display section 216 (step SE2).
By touch-operating the terminal-side display section 216, the user US can display the desired cooking menu on the terminal-side display section 216 (for example, one or more cooking menu candidates can be displayed on one display screen). displayed) (step SE3).

By default setting, the terminal-side display unit 216 may simultaneously display a large number of various cooking menus as a list in a predetermined order and rule. For example, the names of the cooking menus may be displayed in alphabetical order, or the user US can use the search function to say the cooking name, such as ``hamburger,'' and search using voice input. Also good.

When one cooking menu displayed on the terminal side display section 216 is selected (touch operation is performed), the screen is switched to a dedicated screen for that cooking menu. That is, if only such a specific cooking menu is selected, the determination in step SE4 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to step SE5.
On the other hand, on the terminal side display unit 216, input keys (icons) such as "Search for other menus" and "Search again" are also displayed on the screen displaying the search results, so if you touch them, This step SE4 results in a "No" determination, and the display returns to the search input screen.

What is displayed on the terminal side display section 216 in step SE5 is a first screen 216A, which will be described later.
The first screen 216A is a screen on which identification information (cooking name, etc.) regarding one selected cooking menu, information on the heating means to be used, etc. are displayed on the terminal side display section 216.

Select one cooking menu on the first screen 216A showing such search results by touch operation (touch operation on the input key 237A shown in FIG. 60 etc. described later), or select the cooking menu in the displayed range. , when selecting by voice input, the recipe selection unit 232 detects that one cooking menu has been selected (step SE6). Then, preview information 1 (201), which will be described later, is transmitted. Further, the display on the first screen 216A of the terminal side display section 216 is changed to the display on the second screen 216A.

The central processing unit (CPU) 212 displays identification information (cooking name, etc.) regarding one selected cooking menu, information such as the heating means to be used, etc. on the first screen 216A.
The first screen 216A will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 59(A) and FIG. 60, and the information displayed on the first screen 216A is, for example, as follows.
(1) Cooking time (2) Amount (2 servings, 4 servings, etc.)
(3) Ingredients (4) Preparation (5) How to make (name of cooking mode to be selected on heating cooker 1, input operation section, etc.).

When the user US touches the confirmation keys (icons) 237A, 237B (see FIG. 59) for the cooking menu on the first screen 216A, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 receives the input from the touch operation and switches the display content from the first screen 216A to the second screen 216B (step SE7). If the cooking menu displayed on the first screen 216A is not to be selected, the process returns from step SE6 to step SE2, where another cooking menu can be searched for and selected.

When the confirmation key (icon) 237A (see FIG. 59) for this cooking menu is touched, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 can identify a specific input key (for example, 153M) corresponding to the confirmed cooking menu. The correspondence information KID is read from the storage unit 220 or the cooking device database 217 and is transmitted all at once when transmitting "notice information 1" (201), which will be described later.

In FIG. 56, step SE6A is provided as an optional function and is therefore indicated by a broken line. In this step SE6A, when the confirmation key (icon) 237A (see FIG. 60) of the cooking menu is touched, a notification that the "notice information 1" (201) regarding the cooking process 1 has been sent to the heating cooker 1 is displayed. It is displayed on two screens 216B.

The purpose of the advance notice information (also referred to as "advance notice") 201 is to indicate that one recipe data CD is in the preparation stage to be transmitted to the cooking device 1 . However, in the case of a cooking menu that requires multiple cooking steps, such as cooperative cooking mode KM1, "Notice information 1" and "Notice information 2" are displayed for each cooking step, such as cooking step 1, cooking step 2, etc. The operation is performed in multiple transmissions, such as in the following example. Note that this preview information (201) may be simple data that allows the type of cooking mode to be identified. In other words, the information may be only identification information indicating one cooking menu, and there is no need to include information that can specify which of the three types of cooking mode KM1 is the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the individual cooking mode KM1.

After the advance notice information (201) is transmitted, that is, when the confirmation key (icon) 237A (see FIG. 60) for the cooking menu is touched, the display switches from the first screen 216A to the second screen 216B.
The second screen 216B includes information for requesting a decision as to whether or not to transmit the recipe data to the cooking appliance 1. Details will be described with reference to Fig. 60(B).
Depending on the cooking menu, either the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L may be usable. In that case, the advance notice information (201) includes information that prompts the user US to select whether to use the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L.

In response to the advance notice 1 (201), in the cooking device 1, it is necessary to press a specific input key (for example, 152L or 152R) on either the right operation section 15R or the left operation section 15L. In response to this operation, the cooking device 1 transmits to the communication terminal 200 "selection information A (confirmation information A)" 202 indicating that a specific heating port has been selected.
At the same time as the preview information 1 (201), correspondence information KID that can identify one specific input key may be included in the selection information (confirmation information) A and transmitted all at once. With this configuration, the heating cooker 1 can reliably determine the specific input key that requires operation by the user US. However, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, the correspondence information KID is held (stored) in the storage device 41, so the correspondence information KID does not necessarily need to be transmitted from the communication terminal 200.

When the cooking process 1 of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is performed using the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L, if the recipe data CD is not used, press the start key 151M on the central operation section 15M, and then press the right operation This was a two-step method in which the input key 153R of the section 15R or the input key 153L of the left operation section 15L was pressed.

On the other hand, in the case of cooking using recipe data, even if cooking step 1 of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is performed with the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L, the object for which confirmation operation is requested on the cooking device 1 side by the second screen 216B is the left and right operation units 15L, 15R (specific input keys 152L, 152R). In other words, when the advance notice information 1 (201) and advance notice information 2 (202) of the recipe data CD related to cooking step 1 and cooking step 2 are received, "selection information A" and "selection information B" (202) indicating the selection of a specific heating port in response to the advance notice information are transmitted by turning on the specific input key 152L or 152R of the left and right operation units 15L, 15R. In other words, the selection information A which selects the left and right heating ports 4L, 4R is not transmitted by operating the central operation unit 15M. This point is different from the case of cooperative cooking with manual settings as described in FIG. 20. In FIG. 20, the input keys 157M and 156M adjacent to each other on the left and right were operated to select either the right IH coil 9R or the left IH coil 9L.

When selecting the heating port as described above in the cooking process 1, when the communication terminal 200 receives the "selection information A" (confirmation information A) 202, a "Yes" determination is made in step SE8.
In FIG. 56, step SE6A and step SE8 are provided as optional functions, and are therefore indicated by broken lines.
If the optional function is not to be used, the process proceeds to step SE9 while maintaining the second screen 216B that started displaying from step SE6.

The step SE8 is for determining whether there is an operation of pressing either the input key (152L or 152R) of the right operation section 15R or the left operation section 15L of the cooking device 1.
When the specific input keys 152L, 152R on either the right operating section 15R or the left operating section 15L are pressed, the cooking device 1 transmits a signal indicating the result to the communication terminal 200, so the determination in step SE8 is The answer is "Yes" and the process advances to step SE8A.

Since the signal of advance notice information A (201) has been transmitted to the cooking device 1 at the stage of step SE6, upon reception of the advance notice information A (201) (step SE8), the control device 40 transmits the signal from the communication terminal 200. You may start processing to prepare for cooking using the acquired recipe data CD. For example, a warning message such as ``Since recipe data will now be received, you cannot start any other cooking'' may be displayed on all the display units 16 (16M, 16L, 16R).

On the other hand, the communication terminal 200 repeatedly checks at regular time intervals whether or not the selection information A (202) has not been received from the cooking device 1. If the selection information A (202) has not been received, the process proceeds to time limit processing (step SE12). . In the time limit process, the elapsed time from step SE6 is measured, and when a certain time limit (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, error processing is performed and the operation shown in FIG. 56 is stopped. In other words, even if the user US forgets the sending operation midway through, the process automatically returns to step SE2.

When the selection information A (202) of the heating ports 4L and 4R is received from the cooking device 1, the determination in step SE8 is "Yes", and the second screen 126B shown in FIG. 60(B), which started displaying in step SE6, is displayed. is changed to the second screen A (216B1) shown in FIG. 61(A).
Then, the user is advised to touch the transmission input key 240 displayed on the second screen A (216B1) (FIG. 61).

In step SE9, if the user US touches the send key (icon) 240 on the second screen A (216B1) or presses the send key 240 on the second screen B (216B) shown in FIG. 60(B). When the touch operation is performed, step SE9 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to step SE10.
In step SE10, the cooking menu (first portion M1 or second portion M2 of the recipe data CD) selected in step SE6 is transmitted to the cooking device 1.

Next, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 switches the display content from the second screen 216B or the second display screen A (216B1) to the third screen (step SE11). There are two types of third screens 216C1 and 216C2 as shown in FIG. 62. This will be explained with reference to FIG. 62.

Next, FIG. 57 will be explained.
FIG. 57 is an operation explanatory diagram (flowchart) showing the relationship between the recipe data receiving process and the cooking process of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) 200 shown in FIG. 55.
Steps SD1 to SD14 show the operation of the central processing unit (CPU) 212 of the communication terminal 200.

The user US uses the communication terminal 200 to transmit the first portion M1 and the second portion M2 of the recipe data CD to the cooking device 1 in the following order.
First, when a cooking menu confirmation key (icon) 237A (described in FIG. 59) is touched on the first screen 216A, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 receives the input from the touch operation and executes the cooking process 1. This means that you have selected (step SD1).

In the next step SD2, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 transmits preview information A (201) to the cooking device 1 (step SD2). Further, the display of the first screen 216A in step SD1 is switched to the display of the second screen 216B as shown in FIG. 60(B). That is, when the operation of a specific input key (152R, etc.) is triggered, a screen is displayed waiting for the selection information A (202) transmitted from the cooking device 1 (step SD3). At this stage, the second screen 216B displays an input key 240 for transmitting the first portion M1 of the recipe data CD that includes data related to the cooking process 1.

For example, when the specific input key 152R of the right operation section 15R of the heating cooker 1 is touched, the selection information A (202) is transmitted from the heating cooker 1, and the communication terminal 200 receives this ( Step SD4).
Next, the communication terminal 200 changes the display to the second screen A (216B1) as described in FIG. 61(A). On the second screen A (216B1), an input key 240 for transmitting the first portion M1 including data related to the cooking process 1 of the recipe data CD is displayed. When this input key 240 is pressed, the data of the first portion M1 is transmitted to the cooking device 1 (step SD5).

The second screen A (216B1) described in FIG. 61(A) is displayed according to option settings, so it is not necessary to display this second screen A (216B1). In that case, after operating the specific input key (152R, etc.), the user may touch the input key 240 on the second screen 216B shown in FIG. 60(B).

When the data of the first portion M1 transmitted in step SD5 is normally received by the heating cooker 1, the data of the first portion M1 is used as setting information of the cooking process 1, and the heating cooker 1 uses the data of the first portion M1 as setting information of the cooking process 1. The control conditions for the cooking process 1 can be set and the cooking process 1 can be started.
When the cooking process 1 is completed, the heating cooker 1 transmits information indicating the completion of the cooking process 1 (step SD6). However, step SD6 shown in FIG. 57 is added as an optional setting, and step SD6 is not essential. It can be seen that the pause period P3 has entered. Therefore, it is possible to prepare in advance to provide the data of the next second portion M2 to the cooking device 1.

When the data of the first portion M1 is normally received by the cooking device 1, the communication terminal 200 automatically returns to displaying the first screen 216A again. Alternatively, if the input key (icon) 244C for returning to the cooking menu display screen is pressed on the third screen 216C1 (described in FIG. 62) that notifies the user of a normal communication result, the first screen 216A Return to display. Then, preparations for transmitting the second portion of data related to the cooking process 2 can be made. The terminal side display unit 216 for "preparation for transmission" here will be explained with reference to FIG. 59(B).

Next, the user US uses the communication terminal 200 to transmit the second portion M2 of the recipe data CD to the cooking device 1 in the following order.
First, when a cooking menu confirmation key (icon) 237B (explained in FIG. 59) is touched on the first screen 216A, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 receives the input from the touch operation and executes the cooking process 2. This means that you have selected (step SD7).

In the next step SD8, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 transmits preview information 2 (201) regarding the cooking process 2 to the cooking device 1 (step SD8). Further, the display on the first screen 216A is switched to the display on the second screen 216B (step SD9). That is, when the operation of the specific input key (153M), which is a prerequisite for the cooking process 2, is triggered, the screen is displayed waiting for the arrival of the selection information B (202) transmitted from the cooking device 1 (step SD9). At this stage, the second screen 216B displays an input key 240 for transmitting the second portion M2 of the recipe data CD that includes data related to the cooking process 2.

When the specific input key 153M of the central operation section 15M of the cooking device 1 is touched, the selection information B (202) is transmitted from the cooking device 1, and the communication terminal 200 receives this (step SD10). ).
Next, although not specifically illustrated, the communication terminal 200 changes the display to the second screen A (216B1). The second screen A (216B1) displays an input key 240 (not shown) for transmitting the second portion M2 of the recipe data CD that includes data related to the cooking process 2. When the input key 240 is pressed, the data (setting information B) of the second portion M2 is transmitted to the cooking device 1 (step SD11).

When the data of the second portion M2 transmitted in step SD11 is normally received by the heating cooker 1, the cooking process 2 can be started in the heating cooker 1.
In order to end this cooking process 2, when the input key 152M of the heating cooker 1 is touched, the cooking process 2 ends. However, if the cooking process 2 uses the heating chamber 6 and the cooking process uses either the left or right heating ports 4L or 4R, the cooking process 2 is ended by the stop operation using the left and right operation parts 15L and 15R. do.

Since the heating cooker 1 transmits information indicating the end of the cooking process 2, the communication terminal 200 receives this information (step SD12). Thereby, the user US can know the end of the cooking process 2 not only through the heating cooker 1 but also through the communication terminal 200.

Next, FIG. 58 will be explained.
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the operation of the control device 40 of the cooking device 1 after receiving data from the communication terminal (information processing terminal) 200 shown in FIG.
In the control device 40, the communication unit 51 in charge of data acquisition processing performs operations in steps SC1 to SC11 described below in cooperation with the data acquisition unit 53 (see FIGS. 10 and 11). Note that, as described above, the recipe data CD is acquired from the communication terminal 200 for each cooking process (first portion M1, second portion M2, etc.). However, in FIG. 58, the common parts will be explained without distinguishing between the acquisition of each part.

In the heating cooker 1, at the stage of establishing an initial communication state with the communication terminal 200, the communication unit 51 provides the communication terminal 200 with data including the “device identification information” (also referred to as “preparation information 203”).
In the state where communication has been established, when recipe data CD is subsequently received from the outside via the communication unit 51, the data is temporarily stored in the temporary memory (step SC1).
The communication unit 51 first obtains the overall "status information" of the cooking appliance 1. This "status information" is information indicating the status of the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1. Therefore, for example, it is information ascertained by the heating control unit 43 in what status the first heating means HM1 to the third heating means HM3 are.

For example, the communication unit 51 acquires information such as that the control conditions have already been set, that the state is in a standby state immediately before heating starts, and that the temperature detection signal from the temperature sensor group 30 is being received ( Step SC2).

The communication unit 51 repeatedly performs this state checking operation for each component of the cooking device 1 at regular time intervals to collect the latest and accurate data.
In this way, information that can be used to determine whether or not the heating cooker 1 is in a state where it can shift to control according to the contents of the received recipe data CD is collected by the communication unit 51. That is, the communication unit 51 of the cooking device 1 compares the contents of the data including the device identification information transmitted immediately before with the contents of the recipe data CD received in the step SC1 from the communication terminal 200 (step SC3 ). Note that between steps SC3 and SC2 in FIG. 58, as indicated by the broken line, data collection and collation are performed many times within a certain time limit.

If it is determined that there is no discrepancy between the content of the data transmitted from the communication unit 51 and the content of the received recipe data, the determination of the status information is finished (step SC4). In addition, in this step SC4, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are satisfied, such as the temperature of the heating chamber 6 and the state of the "peak cut value" that defines the upper limit of the maximum power consumption. Judgments are also made at the same time.

If the determination result in step SC4 is "Yes", the data acquisition section 53 stores the recipe data CD in a predetermined storage area in response to the determination result from the communication section 51, and stores the recipe data CD in a predetermined storage area for the heating cooking that will be performed immediately thereafter. Prepare (step SC5).

Next, the process proceeds to step SC6, and the data acquisition unit 53 sends a signal (state confirmation result) from the communication unit 51 to the communication terminal 200, which is the source of the recipe data CD, indicating that the recipe data CD has been successfully acquired. Send. The "state confirmation result" here corresponds to the process of step SG10 in FIG. 64. In addition, upon receiving the information of the status confirmation result, the communication terminal 200 determines that the transmission of the recipe data CD has been successful (step SG11 in FIG. 64).

Furthermore, the data acquisition section 53 displays on the display section 51 that the recipe data CD has been acquired (step SC6). An example of this display is illustrated in FIG. 45, for example.
"Setting information A" included in the recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200 at this stage is control conditions prepared in advance on the communication terminal 200 side (for example, thermal power is 1000 W, heating time is 10 minutes). In other words, the remote control information 219 includes information on control conditions set by default.

Next, in step SC7, it is determined whether the control conditions specified by the user US are acceptable. When the user US presses the start key 151M, it is assumed that the user US has agreed to the control conditions, and the control device 40 treats the setting information A as "confirmed setting information" and stores " "Final setting information" storage area (step SC8). When the cooking process 1 is started using the right operation section 15R, the process shifts to a standby state in which it waits for the input key 153R to be touched (step SC9).

On the other hand, if the user US wishes to change the control conditions displayed in step SC6, by touching the input keys 156M, 157M, a different control condition is displayed in the central display section 16M in response to that operation (step SC10). Then, since it is possible to return to step SC7, the user agrees to the revised control condition and proceeds to step SC8. In other words, some of the control conditions of the setting information A are changed by input from the user US, and the setting information A becomes the "confirmed setting information".

In addition, at the stage of step SC8, the state of the center display section 15M immediately before the start key 151M is pressed is, for example, a display indicating that "heating will start when the start key is pressed" as explained in FIG. 45. On the other hand, after pressing the start key 151M, a display prompting the final operation is displayed on the display section of the corresponding heating section. When the right heating port 4R is used as described above, a display recommending pressing the input key 153R is displayed on the right display section 15R. Further, the light emitting portion 21R of the corresponding input key (153R) becomes a blinking display.

On the other hand, if the determination result in step SC4 is "No", the data acquisition unit 53 receives the determination result from the communication unit 51 and sends the recipe from the communication unit 51 to the outside (the communication terminal 200 as the transmission source). Data of a signal (notification of non-permission) containing information indicating that the data CD cannot be received is transmitted (step SC11). The "non-permission notification" here is transmitted to the communication terminal 200 at step SG10 in FIG. 64. Although FIG. 58 shows the case of the cooking menu belonging to the cooperative cooking mode KM1, such a "disapproval notification" message is also sent for the combined cooking mode KM2 and the independent cooking mode KM1.

When the communication terminal 200 receives the notification of disapproval of step SC11 from the cooking device 1, it displays this on the terminal side display section 216. Note that the notification may be made using the speaker 214 of the communication terminal 200. These will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 61.

Next, FIG. 59 will be explained.
FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram of the operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) 200 shown in FIG. 55, showing the relationship between the recipe data display screen and the cooking process.
What is shown in FIG. 59(A) is the first screen 216A. That is, it shows a state in which recipe information for one cooking menu (in this case, "Aqua Pazza") desired by the user US has already been found and displayed.

In FIG. 59(A), 245 is an identification information (cooking menu name) display section of the recipe data CD. For example, it is a part that displays cooking names, abbreviations, etc.
Reference numeral 235 denotes an image display section for displaying schematic diagrams, photographs (still images), etc. that provide a clear image of the food to be prepared in the cooking menu, and is displayed in a position close to the identification information display section 245.

As shown in FIG. 59(A), in addition to the information on the identification information display section 245, the following six pieces of information are simultaneously displayed on the first screen 216A. However, due to constraints on the display area of the terminal-side display unit 216, not all information can be viewed in list form.
(1) Cooking time (2) Amount (2 servings, 4 servings, etc.)
(3) Materials (4) Preparation (5) How to make (cooking direction in cooking process 1, cooking process 2, etc. performed with heating cooker 1)
(6) Cooking process information (heating means, its control conditions, etc.) 236A, 236B.
In FIG. 59(A), as shown in a first display section 251 and a second display section 252, which will be described later, default values of control conditions such as "IH temperature at 200°C" and "grill for 10 minutes" are shown. has been done. Default values of such control conditions can also be included in the recipe data CD and transmitted. Therefore, on the cooking device 1 side, data such as "preheating temperature 200° C." can be acquired as setting information for the control device 40.

The cooking process information 236A, 236B is displayed in one place for each cooking process. For example, in a cooking menu having cooking process 1 and cooking process 2 (for example, the above-mentioned "Aqua Pazza"), the contents of cooking processes 1 and 2 are displayed one at a time at the end of the menu.
This FIG. 59(A) shows only a part of the first screen 216A. By moving the first screen 216A upward while touching the fingertip FG as shown by the broken line, the screen can be scrolled upward. In other words, this first screen 216A continues in the vertical direction and is displayed so that new information can be seen sequentially from the bottom. As a result, detailed information such as ingredients and preparation will be displayed one after another.

237A is a confirmation key (icon) for selecting cooking step 1 of one cooking menu (for example, the above-mentioned "Aquapazza") displayed on this first screen 216A. This confirmation key 237A is the confirmation key (icon) for the cooking menu described in step SE5 of FIG.
Reference numeral 251 denotes a first display portion related to cooking step 1 in the recipe for cooking. The first portion M1 may or may not include information of the first display portion 251 in addition to the information of the identification information display portion 245 and the cooking step information 236A.
As is clear from FIG. 59(A), in the first screen 216A, the input keys 237A and the cooking process information 236A are arranged at the very end of the section displaying the “How to make” for cooking process 1, i.e., adjacent to the bottom end of the first display portion 251.

Next, FIG. 59(B) will be explained.
Since FIG. 59(B) is a screen that is continuous with the lower end of the first screen 216A shown in FIG. 59(A), the identification information (cooking menu name) display section 245 of the recipe data CD and the image display section 235 are is not displayed.
In the cooking method (recipe), the cooking process information 236B and an input key (icon) 237B are arranged below and adjacent to the second display section 252 regarding the cooking process 2, respectively. In addition, as shown in FIG. 59(B), the cooking method during the "heating pause period P3" between the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 is also displayed.
As shown in FIGS. 59(A) and 59(B), the first screen 216A includes information on what the user US should do from the cooking process 1 to the heating pause period P3, as well as information on the cooking method and ingredients in the cooking process 2. Information regarding control conditions such as heat power and heating time is also displayed in the order of cooking steps.

The second portion M2 may include the information of the second display portion 252 in addition to the information of the identification information display portion 245 and the cooking process information 236B, but does not need to include it.

Next, FIG. 60 will be explained.
FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the communication terminal 200 shown in FIG. 55.
What is shown in FIG. 60(A) is the first screen 216A. That is, a state is shown in which recipe information for one cooking menu desired by the user US has already been found and displayed.

In FIG. 60(A), 234 is a character display section indicating the type of display information on the first screen 216A. In FIG. 60(A), "IH menu" is displayed to indicate that the menu is for induction heating cooking. Note that this character display section 234 does not have to be displayed as shown in FIG. 59(A). In addition, if there are multiple cooking steps sandwiching the heating rest period P3, the character display section 234 may display cooking step numbers (step identification information 182) such as "Step 1" and "Step 2." good.

On the first screen 216A, the image display section 235, which displays schematic diagrams, photographs (still images), etc., that give a simple image of the food to be prepared in the cooking menu, is adjacent to the identification information (cooking menu name) display section 245. Displayed in position.

237A is a confirmation key (icon) for selecting one cooking menu displayed on this first screen 216A. This confirmation key 237A is the selection key (icon) for cooking process 1 explained in step SD1 of FIG. 238 is an input key (icon) for instructing to close this first screen 216A.

Next, we will explain Figure 60(B).
When the user US touches the confirmation key (icon) 237A (or 237B) for the cooking menu on the first screen 216A, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 receives the input from the touch operation and switches the display from the first screen 216A to the second screen 216B as shown in Figure 60 (B).

In the second screen 216B, 239 is a character display section indicating the type of information displayed on the second screen 216B. In FIG. 60(B), "Preparing to send IH settings" is displayed to indicate that the process is preparing to send induction heating cooking setting information.
Reference numeral 240 is an input key (icon) for instructing transmission, and when this is pressed, the recipe data of the cooking menu selected in FIG. It is divided and sent to the heating cooker 1 in sequence.

The second screen 216B shown in FIG. 60(B) is the “cooking process 1 transmission waiting screen” in step SE7 shown in FIG.
When the user US sees the display contents of this second screen 216B, he or she can recognize that he or she needs to touch a specific input key (icon) 152R or 152L on either the right operation unit 15R or the left operation unit 15L of the cooking appliance 1.
After this touch operation, the input key 240 on the second screen 216B is pressed. Note that 241 is an input key for canceling, and by touching this key, the state can be returned to that shown in FIG.

Next, FIG. 61(A) will be explained.
FIG. 61(A) shows the first portion M1 or the second portion of the recipe data CD for executing one cooking menu in response to reception of selection information A (202) by touch operation of a specific input key (152R, etc.). This is a second screen 216B1 showing a standby state for transmission of part M2.
FIG. 61(B) shows another second screen 216B2 displaying a transmission result different from that in FIG. 61(A) in response to reception of selection information A (202) by touch operation of a specific input key (152R, etc.). be.
These two types of second screens 216B1 and 216B2 are not dedicated screens that are always displayed on the terminal side display section 216 after the recipe data CD is transmitted from the communication terminal 200. A transition may be made from the state of FIG. 60(A) or FIG. 60(B) to FIG. 62(A) or FIG. 62(B).

There are at least two types of second screens 216B1 and 216B2 as shown in FIGS. 61(A) and 61(B). The first screen, as shown in the second display screen 216B1 shown in FIG. The contents request that setting information (either the first part M1 or the second part M2) be transmitted.
The other is a second screen 216B2 that notifies the user that the desired heating port or heating means cannot be used due to circumstances on the heating cooker 1 side. In other words, when the input key (icon) 237A on the first screen 216A is pressed, if the heating means used in the selected cooking menu is in use for another cooking, this second screen B will be displayed. (216B2).
As is clear from the second screen 216B2 in FIG. 61(B), advice information indicating that the recipe data should be sent after finishing the cooking that is being used first (right heating port 4R) is displayed. .

Next, FIG. 62 will be explained.
FIG. 62(A) is a third screen 216C1 that displays the transmission results. Further, FIG. 62(B) is another third screen 216C2 that displays the transmission result.
Either one of these third screens 216C1 and 216C2 is a dedicated screen that is always displayed on the terminal side display section 216 after the recipe data CD is transmitted from the communication terminal 200.

There are two types of third screens 216C1 and 216C2. The first screen is the third screen 216C1 shown in FIG. 62(A). The fact that the transmission was successful is displayed in text on the display section 244A.
The other is a third screen 216C2 that is displayed when the transmission from the heating cooker 1 ends in failure, as shown in FIG. 62(B).

As shown in FIG. 62(B), on the third screen 216C2, the fact that the transmission from the heating cooker 1 has failed and the cause thereof are displayed in text on the display section 244B.

Next, we will explain Figures 63 and 64.
Fig. 63 shows main operation steps of the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1 and related operation steps of the communication terminal 200. Further detailed steps will be described with reference to Fig. 64.
63 to 65 omit illustration of wireless communication between the cloud server 300 and the cooking appliance 1. Therefore, transmission of the status information periodically performed by the cooking appliance 1 to the cloud server 300, etc. is not shown in these figures.

In FIG. 63, steps SG1 to SG12 indicate operation steps of the control device 40 and the communication terminal 200.
SP1 is a "communication establishment step" (preparation step) after the communication state is established. This is a stage where information regarding a specific recipe data CD is not being transmitted or received.

The next SP2A is a "key identification step" in which (cooking process 1) preview information 1 (201) is transmitted from the communication terminal 200 and the content of the preview information 1 (201) is determined by the control device 40. be. In this key identification step SP2A, a specific input key to be operated on the heating cooker 1 is determined from the cooking menu (identification information) of the preview information 1 (201).

The next step SP2B is a "notification step" in which a specific input key is displayed on the display section 16 in response to the determination result of the key specifying step SP2A. Note that since the correspondence relationship between the specific input key and the display unit 16 is held in advance as data on the control device 40 side, for example, it is determined that the specific input key is “153M” of the central operation unit 15M. In this case, a command is issued from the control device 40 to display the information on the central display section 16M.

SP3 is a “confirmation step” in which the cooking appliance 1 confirms the contents of the advance notice information 1 (201) and transmits a confirmation signal (selection information A) 202 to the communication terminal 200.
SP4 is a "receiving step" for acquiring information on recipe data CD relating to one food item to be cooked.
SP5 is a "standby step" (standby state before cooking) in which the cooking appliance 1 waits for a command to start cooking after successfully acquiring the recipe data CD.
In FIG. 63, the following description will be given mainly on the process from the point in time when a communication state is established between the cooking appliance 1 and the communication terminal 200 (step SG1).
FIG. 63 shows the acquisition of the data portion of cooking process 1 of recipe data CD, i.e., the data of the first portion M1. To acquire the data portion of cooking process 2, i.e., the data of the second portion M2, it is necessary to execute step SG3B and subsequent steps again.

The communication state is established by, for example, transmitting and receiving a preparation signal (preparation information) 203 for mutual authentication between the cooking device 1 and the communication terminal 200. Note that this preparation signal (preparation information) 203 is automatically transmitted when the cooking device 1 is started. Alternatively, a call is made when a specific input key (the input key 153M) is pressed. The preparation signal 203 is a unified signal regardless of the heating means or cooking menu, and includes at least device identification information of the cooking device 1. Furthermore, as explained in FIG. 41, the two-dimensional information 60B that guides the communication terminal 200 to the cloud server 300 is displayed on the initial screen 16MH during initial standby, so that the communication terminal 200 acquires recipe data from the cloud server 300. It is easy to prepare.

In FIG. 63, a case will be described in which a cooking menu related to cooperative cooking mode KM1 is executed. Note that in communication terminal 200, as described above, it is not possible to specify a cooking mode and search for cooking menus for each cooking mode. Furthermore, since it is more efficient to search by type of cooking (for example, Japanese food, Chinese food, etc.), name, abbreviation, etc. than to search by cooking mode, the communication terminal 200 of the first embodiment A method is used to extract cooking menus based on cooking names (including abbreviations), etc.

First, communication terminal 200 searches for a cooking menu. Recipe data for the desired cooking menu may be obtained in advance from the cloud server 300 (step SG2). At this point, the terminal-side display section 216 is a search screen 216P (not shown) displaying search results for cooking menus.

In the communication terminal 200, when one of the plurality of cooking menus displayed on the search screen 216P is selected by touch operation, only the specific (one) cooking menu that the user US wants to cook is displayed on the first screen 216A. (Step SG3). At this point, setting information for executing one specific cooking menu is read from the cooking device database 217 and temporarily held in the recipe selection section 232.

When the user US touches the confirmation key 237A on the first screen 216A (see FIG. 60) at step SG3 (step SG3A), the central processing unit (CPU) 212 receives the input from the touch operation. Instead of the first screen 216A, the second screen 216B is displayed on the terminal side display section 216 (step SG3B) (see FIG. 60).

In the first embodiment, it is possible to freely touch a specific input key (for example, 153M) on the cooking device 1 side by the time of step SG3B. When a touch operation (input operation) is performed, selection information (202) unique to the specific input key is transmitted to the communication terminal 200 (see FIG. 65).
Therefore, in step SG3B, just before displaying the second screen 216B on the terminal display section 216, that is, at the stage of generating preview information 1 (notice notice) 201, which will be described later, the input key to be inputted (for example, 153M) is being operated.

As a result of this determination, it is determined that the input key (for example, 153M) operated in the past is the specific input key (for example, , 152L), advance notice information 1 (advance notice) 201 is transmitted to cooking device 1 (step SG3B).

In this way, when the cooking menu confirmation key (icon) 237A is pressed, the presence or absence of a specific input key (for example, 152L) that requires operation is determined, and the central processing unit (CPU) 212 of the communication terminal 200 Preview information 1 (201) is generated and transmitted.

On the second screen 216B, as explained in FIG. 60(B), information (selection request information) requesting input operation for confirmation on the cooking device 1 side is displayed. This information includes the preview information 1 (201).
In the example of FIG. 60(B), operation of either the right operation section 15R or the left operation section 15L is specified. In this example, the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is selected, and the first cooking step 1 may be induction heating, so it is necessary to touch the specific input key 152L of the right operation section 15R, for example.
Note that the touch operation in this case may be either the above-described "long press" operation or the "short press" operation, but when the "long press operation" is performed, the "voice input mode 1" is started.

In this way, on the cooking device 1 side that has received the advance notice information 1 (201), the display unit 15 (center display section 15M, left and right display sections 15L and 15R) (step SG4).

In this way, when the cooking menu confirmation key (icon) 237A is pressed, the presence or absence of a specific input key (for example, 152L) that requires operation is determined, and the central processing unit (CPU) 212 of the communication terminal 200 Preview information 1 (201) is generated and transmitted.

If it is determined in step SG3A that the specific input key (for example, 152L) has already been operated, the screen as shown in FIG. 61(A) is displayed from the first screen 216A in FIG. 60(A). The screen transitions to the second screen 216B, and the advance notice information 1 (201) indicating that "a specific input key must be operated" as shown in FIG. 60(B) is not sent again to the user US. In other words, as shown in FIG. 61(A), since the specific input key (for example, 152L) has already been operated, a message indicating that the input key 240 (send button) for transmission should be pressed is displayed. become.

As shown in FIG. 63, the key specifying step SP2A continues until step SG4. When the user US touches a specific input key (for example, 152L) before receiving the preview information 1 (notice of advance notice) 201, such input is detected as an input signal of the control device 40 in the key specifying step SP2A. It is detected by the analysis unit 52 (see FIG. 10), and information on the operated input keys is recorded (saved) in the storage device 41 in chronological order.

When the preview information 1 (201) is received, in the key identification step SP2A, the corresponding information KID corresponding to the cooking menu of the preview information 1 (201) is read from the storage device 41, and a specific input key that requires an input operation is read out from the storage device 41. Identify.
If the extracted specific input key is the input key 153 of the central operation unit 15M, and if the specific input key 153M has already been touched before receiving the preview information 1 (201), the specific input key 153M must be touched again. Since it is not necessary to do so, a message to that effect is displayed on the central display section 16M.

On the other hand, the number of extracted specific input keys is not necessarily one. As in the first embodiment, there are a right heating port 4R and a left heating port 4L, and in a specific cooking menu selected by the user US, cooking can be performed using either one of them.
In this case, if the predetermined specific input key corresponding to the cooking menu has not been input touch operated even once before receiving the preview information 1 (201), the control device 40 Information that can identify the required specific input key is displayed on the display section 16 such as the central display section 16M.
Suppose that after receiving the notice information 1 (201), the specific input keys to be operated in the key specifying step SP2A are the specific input key 152R of the right operating section 15R and the specific input key 152L of the left operating section 15L. , the case where it is reported that there are two will be described below.

In this step SG4, when the specific input key 152L is touched in order to select the left heating port 4L, the "occupied state" of the heating means is started as described above. If, at this step SG4, the input key 152R of the right operation section 15R is operated earlier than the input key 152L, the operation of the input key 152R will be recognized by the control device 40. . Then, in the next step SG5, the operation information of the specific input key is transmitted to the communication terminal 200.
Then, the communication terminal 200 can detect that the specific input key 152R has been operated.

Continuing to explain FIG. 63.
In the notification step SP2B, when the specific input key 152R is touched (step SG5), data indicating the touch operation result is acquired by the communication terminal 200 (step SG6). Data from the heating cooker 1 indicating this touch operation result may be referred to as a "confirmation signal" or "selection information A" 202 in the following explanation.
In step SG6, it is determined from the received selection information A that a specific input key (for example, 152R) has been operated, based on the unique selection information (202B).
Therefore, on the terminal side display unit 216 of the communication terminal 200, as shown in FIG. Displayed (if set as an option). If no option is set, the state of the second screen 216B shown in FIG. 60(B) is maintained.

Next, when the input key 240 on the second screen 216B shown in FIG. 60(B) is pressed, or when the input key 240 on the second screen A (216B1) shown in FIG. 58(A) is pressed. , recipe data CD (first portion M1) for executing a specific cooking menu are transmitted all at once from the communication terminal 200 (step SG7). That is, "command data" (setting information A) for setting the cooking device 1 to a specific state and making the cooking process 1 executable is transmitted from the communication terminal 200 all at once.

In the first embodiment, the communication unit 51 of the cooking device 1 is attached to the outer wall surface of the cooking device 1 in the form of an adapter, so the communication device 51 will be referred to as a “communication adapter” hereinafter.

When the communication adapter 51 receives the command data (step SG8), it acquires status information of the cooking device 1 itself, as will be described later. This "state information" is information indicating the state of the control device 40 of the cooking device 1, as also explained in FIG. Therefore, for example, the information is information that confirms the state of the first heating means HM1 by the heating control unit 43.
In this way, the contents of the status information of the heating cooker 1 and the received command data are analyzed, and it is determined whether there is any problem in executing heating cooking according to the received command data (see step SG9 in FIG. 64). .

When the cooking appliance 1 determines that there is no problem with carrying out the cooking, the communication adapter 51 transmits the status confirmation result to the communication terminal 200 (step SG10). Note that this transmission process corresponds to the transmission of the "permission notification" in step SC5 described in FIG. 58. If the cooking appliance 1 determines that there is a problem with carrying out the cooking, the communication adapter 51 of the cooking appliance 1 transmits data to the communication terminal 200 as a signal (notification of non-permission) including information that the recipe data CD cannot be received. This corresponds to the process of step SC11 shown in FIG. 58.

In the communication terminal 200, the central processing unit 212 analyzes the content of the "notification of permission" or "notification of non-permission" from the heating cooker 1 (step SG11).
Then, either the third screen 216C1 shown in FIG. 62(A) or the third screen 216C2 shown in FIG. 62(B) is displayed (step SG12).

As explained in FIG. 47, etc., there is a recipe data reception restriction period TZ1, so when data of a specific cooking menu (for example, "hamburger") is acquired by recipe data, that cooking menu can be transferred to another cooking menu. (For example, "karaage" or "pork cutlet") cannot be changed. Therefore, input using the input keys 154M and 155M corresponding to the first area 22 is unnecessary, and the corresponding light emitting section 21M does not emit light. Further, the cooking menu cannot be changed at this stage even by voice input.

When cooking with a specific cooking menu based on the received recipe data, the user can set control conditions (e.g. cooking time, target heating temperature, etc.) using the input operation unit 15 or voice input before starting cooking. However, for some cooking menus, the control conditions cannot be changed. In addition, the "tolerable setting range" of the control conditions is set in advance on the heating cooker 1 side, and even the cooking menu obtained from the communication terminal 200 cannot deviate from the "tolerable setting range". .

By pressing the start key 151M of the central operation unit 15M, the cooking process 1 of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 can be started (step SG12 in FIG. 63). However, if the cooking process 1 is an induction heating source (first heating means HM1) that drives the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L, in order to start the cooking process 1, the right operation part must be pressed. 15R or the input key 153R or 153L of the left operation section 15L needs to be touched again.

Next, FIG. 64 will be explained.
In FIG. 64, steps SG1 to SG16 indicate main operation steps of the control device 40 of the cooking device 1 and related operation steps of the communication terminal 200.
In FIG. 64, the same parts as in FIG. 63 are given the same reference numerals, so the following description will focus on the different parts.

Step SG9 analyzes the contents of the status information of the heating cooker 1 and the received command data (related to the cooking process 1), and determines whether there is any problem in executing the heating cooking according to the received command data. .
Here, the "status information" of the heating cooker 1 includes, for example, "the thermal power of induction heating is zero and it is in a standby state immediately before starting heating", or that the temperature detection signal from the temperature sensor group 30 is The communication adapter 51 acquires information such as the received state and detected temperature. Note that, inside the communication adapter 51, such a status confirmation operation is repeated many times at regular time intervals to collect the latest and accurate data.
In this way, the contents of the status information of the heating cooker 1 and the received command data are analyzed, and it is determined whether there is any problem in executing the heating cooking according to the received command data. Note that such determination processing has been explained in detail in step SC4 of FIG. 58, so the details will be omitted.

In the heating cooker 1, when cooking can be started using the received recipe data, the light emitting parts 21M, 21L, and 21R are used in the input operation part 15 to indicate to the user US the input key that can be operated first. to emit light.
For example, in the case of cooperative cooking mode KM1,
(1) When the cooking process 1 is performed in the heating chamber 6, the light emitting parts 21M of the input keys 156M and 157M are made to emit light (step SG13). Then, preparation is made for inputting control conditions.
(2) When the cooking process 1 is performed using either the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L, the light emitting portions 21L and 21R of the input keys 154L, 154R, 155L, and 155R are made to emit light (step SG13).

As described above, in step SG13, the light emitting sections 21 (21L, 21M, 21R) of the specific input keys in the input operation section 15 selected in step SG5 are caused to emit continuous light or blink light, thereby clearly indicating the presence of the specific input key (e.g., 152L) that should be operated first.
When the input key 152L of the left operation unit 15L is touched in step SG5, the selection information A is transmitted. The light emitting portion 21L of the input key 153L (see FIG. 7) in the left operation unit 15L blinks or lights up continuously (step SG13). Then, the operation of the input key (start key) 153L is guided to the user US so that induction heating is started.

At this point, the light emitting parts 21L of the input keys 155L and 154L may be blinked or lit continuously so that the heating power etc. can be adjusted, but the heating power and time cannot be adjusted after induction heating has actually started. It is possible to do so, so there is no need to blink or turn on continuously.

Next, the process advances to step SG15. In this step SG15, when the start key 153L of the left operation section 15L is pressed, induction heating cooking is started. The communication adapter 51 of the heating cooker 1 performs the operation of acquiring status information again at regular intervals immediately after starting this heating, and transmits the status information to the communication terminal 200.
For cooking in cooperative cooking mode KM1 that does not use recipe data CD, even if cooking step 1 is set to the left heating port 4L, to start cooking, press the input key 151M of the central operation section 15M, and then press the input key 153L. It was a two-step method: push. In this respect, the heating cooking start procedure for the left and right heating ports 4L and 4R is different when the recipe data CD is used and when it is not used.

In the next step SG16, the communication terminal 200 acquires status information data from the cooking appliance 1, and can monitor on the terminal display unit 216 that cooking is being performed according to the recipe data set by the user US. At this point, the third screen 216C is no longer displayed on the terminal display unit 216.

From step SG5 shown in FIG. 64, the reception restriction period TZ1 starts. That is, if the control device 40 (input signal analysis unit 52) determines that any one of the specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 153M has been operated after the notification step SP2B (see FIG. 63), the reception starts from that point. A restriction period (TZ1: see FIG. 47) is started.

If a specific input key (for example, 153M) is operated before the notification step SP2B, the reception restriction period (TZ1: see FIG. 47) starts from the time when the specific input key (for example, 153M) is operated. Begins. When this reception restriction period TZ1 starts, all of the specific input keys 152L, 152R, 153M and other input keys (excluding the start switch and stop switch of the input keys 151M, 152M, etc.) The input function in "normal state" is disabled. In other words, a valid input signal cannot be transmitted from the input operation section 15 to the control device 40. Therefore, it becomes impossible to acquire recipe data CD for another cooking menu or input a cooking mode (eg, cooperative cooking mode KM1).

The above-mentioned "unauthorized state" means that upon receiving advance notice information 1 (advance notice) 201 from the communication terminal 200, the heating cooker 1 prompts the user US to touch a specific input key (for example, 153M). except when requested. That is, it refers to a state in which input keys other than the specific input keys shown on the display section 16 are operated in the notification step SP2B to select a new cooking menu and set control conditions.

Next, FIG. 65 will be explained.
FIG. 65 is a time chart 3 showing the cooperative operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) 200 and the cooking device 1 in the heating cooking system of the first embodiment. After receiving advance notice information 1 (201) from the communication terminal 200, it is basic to operate a specific input key (for example, 153M) on the heating cooker 1 according to the advance notice information 1 (Figs. 63 and 64). reference). However, this FIG. 65 is an exceptional case. That is, FIG. 65 shows a case where a specific input key (for example, 153M) is operated on cooking device 1 before advance notice information 1 (201) from communication terminal 200 arrives.

In FIG. 65, steps SG1 to SG12 indicate main operation steps of the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1 and related operation steps of the communication terminal 200.
SP1 is a "communication establishment step" (preparation step) after the communication state is established as described in Fig. 63. This is a stage in which information regarding specific recipe data CD is not transmitted or received.

The next SP2A is a "key identification step" in which preview information 1 (201) is transmitted from the communication terminal 200 and the content of the preview information 1 (201) is determined by the control device 40. This key specifying step SP2A starts when a specific input key (for example, 153M) is touched on the cooking device 1. Alternatively, as described with reference to FIG. 41, the process starts when the display screen 2C is displayed on the display section 16 (center display section 16M) and the acquisition operation support information 60P is displayed.
Step SG1A is a step in which the display screen 2C (see FIG. 41) is displayed. In this step SG1A, when it is detected that the communication terminal 200 approaches and the communication establishment step SP1 is entered, the operation of a specific input key for acquiring recipe data CD from the outside on the display unit 16 is displayed. This can be prompted at an early stage (display screen 2C in FIG. 41).

When the user US touches an appropriate specific input key (for example, 153M) in order to execute a desired cooking menu (step SG1B), the history information of this input operation is recorded (stored) in the storage device 41. ) to be done. Further, the cooking device 1 transmits information on the input-operated specific input key (correspondence information KID) to the communication terminal 200 as selection information A (202). The central processing unit (CPU) 212 of the communication terminal 200 stores the selection information A (202) including information on the operated specific input key (correspondence information KID) in the cooking device database 217 or the storage unit 220. .
SG3 indicates a stage where a specific cooking menu is displayed on the terminal-side display section 216 of the communication terminal 200.

As explained in FIG. 63, step SG4 is a display step performed on the heating cooker 1 side in response to the notice information 1 (201), but this is a display step performed immediately after the "first determination" of the next step SG5A. It may take place at the same time. Therefore, it is shown in a broken line frame. For example, the display unit 15 (center display unit 15M, left and right display units 15L, 15R) indicates that the operation of one of the specific input keys 152R, 152L on the right operation unit 15R and left operation unit 15L is requested. Display in . In the case of the specific input key 153M, it may be displayed only on the central display section 15M.

Step SG5A is a process corresponding to step SG5 described in FIG. 63. This step SG5A is also called a "key determination step" performed in the confirmation step SP3.
In this step SG5A, information on a specific input key to be operated (key correspondence information KID) corresponding to the identification information of one cooking menu transmitted in advance notice information 1 in step SG4, and information on a specific input key to be operated (key correspondence information KID) and a key input key to be operated in the key identification step SP2 are provided. It is determined whether the specified input key and the specified input key match (hereinafter, this will be referred to as "first determination").

Next, if there is no match as a result of the first determination, it is determined whether a specific input key (for example, 152R) to be operated has been operated (hereinafter, this will be referred to as "second determination").

Note that if the result of the first determination is that there is no match, information on the specific input key to be operated is displayed on the display section 16 (for example, the center display section 16M, right display section 16R), and the displayed specific input key Displays in text, etc. that a key operation is required. That is, in this step SG5A, similar to step SG4 in FIG. 63, information that specifies the input key to be operated (for example, 152L) and prompts the operation is provided in this step SG5A, and then the second determination is performed. do.

If the first determination is that they match, and then the second determination is that they have been manipulated, selection information A (202) is transmitted to the communication terminal 200 (step SG5A).
In this way, when an appropriate specific input key is operated before receiving advance notice information 1 (201) from the communication terminal 200, and when an appropriate specific input key is operated after receiving advance notice information 1 (201). In either case, the cooking device 1 can be made to acquire the recipe data CD selected by the user US. Moreover, since the specific input key to be operated only needs to be operated once for one cooking process, the operation by the user US is simple.

As described above, when a specific input key (e.g., 152L) is operated in step SG5A to transmit selected information A, the left display unit 16L corresponding to this specific input key 152L displays a receiving operation display unit 174 (not shown) using characters and figures to indicate that the selected information A has been transmitted and that the device is transitioning to a receiving state for recipe data CD. If a command to transmit the selected information A is issued using the specific input key 153M of the shared operation unit 15M, the receiving operation display unit 174 (not shown) is displayed on the central display unit 16M.

Furthermore, in this step SG5A, a display may be performed to inform the user US of the latest situation.
For example, when it is confirmed in the confirmation step SP3 that the specific input key (for example, 153M) has been operated, the input operation section corresponding to the input operation section (for example, the central operation section 15M) in which the input key is arranged is In the display section (for example, 16M), the control device 40 displays information indicating that selection information A (202) has been transmitted (for example, text information such as "A response signal has been transmitted") or information on the recipe data CD. Information indicating the reception process (for example, text information such as "The reception process will begin now") is displayed on the display unit 16 (for example, 16M). This step is included in step SG5A shown in FIG. 65.

Next, FIG. 66 will be explained.
FIG. 66 is a time chart showing the heating operation in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 of the heating cooker 1 in the heating cooking system of the first embodiment. Steps SS40 to SS55 show the main control operations of the control device 40. If there is only one cooking process as in the independent cooking mode KM3, one cooking process ends at step SS47.
FIG. 66 explains in more detail the operational steps shown in FIG. 43, and the corresponding steps in FIG. ing.

Step SS40 is a stage in which preview information 1 (201) corresponding to the data of the first portion M1 for executing the cooking process 1 is received from the communication terminal 200.
In the next step SS41, the contents of the preview information 1 are analyzed. As described above, the preview information 1 includes identification information for specifying the cooking menu, process identification information 182 (not shown) for indicating the cooking process 1, and the like. Therefore, upon receiving the preview information 1, a specific input key that requires an input operation on the cooking device 1 side is extracted from the data in the storage device 41.

In step SS42, information indicating the extracted specific input key is displayed on the display section 16. In addition, the voice notification unit 50 may prompt the user to operate a specific input key by voice. Further, the (center) light emitting section 21M, the (right) light emitting section 21R corresponding to the right operation section 15R, etc. may be used to indicate a specific input key to be operated by continuous light emission or blinking light.

In step SS43, when a specific input key (for example, 152R of the right operation section 15R) is operated based on the information indicating the specific input key displayed on the display section 16, the control device 40 controls the specific input key (for example, 152R of the right operation section 15R). , 152R) is generated and transmitted from the communication unit 51.

In step SS44, the setting information (for the first portion M1 related to the cooking process 1) transmitted from the communication terminal 200 is received.
As described in steps SC4 to SC6 of FIG. 58, the communication unit (communication adapter) 51 determines whether or not it is in a state in which it can transition to control according to the contents of the received recipe data CD for the first portion M1.

When the determination result of the communication unit (communication adapter) 51 is “Yes”, the data acquisition unit 53 receives the determination result from the communication unit 51 and uses the data of the first portion M1 acquired immediately before as a recipe. The data is stored in a predetermined storage area of the data storage unit 42 in preparation for heating and cooking to be performed immediately thereafter.

Next, step SS45 is not an essential process, as indicated by the broken line, but is a function that can be added as an option. In this step SS45, the data acquisition unit 53 sends a signal ( status confirmation results). The "state confirmation result" here corresponds to the process of step SG10 in FIG. 64.

Next, in step SS46, the content of the acquired recipe data CD (data of the first portion M1) is displayed on the display section 16, so if the start of heating cooking is inputted using the input operation section 15, heating cooking (cooking process 1) is started. After that, the heating cooking (cooking process 1) ends (step SS47).

Since it is the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the heating suspension period P3 starts from step SS47.
During this heating suspension period P3, unless the data of the second portion M2 of the recipe data CD is obtained, the cooking process 2 cannot proceed.
Therefore, during this heating pause period P3, operations similar to steps SS40 to SS45 are performed.

Preview information 2 for the second portion M2 for executing the cooking process 2 is transmitted by operation of the communication terminal 200 by the user US.
Therefore, in step SS48, the preview information 2 (201) is received from the communication terminal 200.
In the next step SS49, the contents of the preview information 2 are analyzed. Then, upon receiving the preview information 2, a specific input key that requires an input operation is extracted from the data in the storage device 41.

In step SS50, information indicating the extracted specific input key is displayed on the display section 16. In addition, the voice notification unit 50 may prompt the user to operate a specific input key by voice. Further, the (center) light emitting section 21M, the light emitting section 21M corresponding to the central operation section 15M, etc. indicate a specific input key to be operated by continuous light emission or blinking light.

In step SS51, when a specific input key (for example, 153M of the central operation section 15M) is operated with reference to the information indicating the specific input key displayed on the display unit 16, the control device 40 controls the specific input key (for example, , 153M) is generated and transmitted from the communication unit 51.

In step SS52, setting information (of the second portion M2 related to the cooking process 2) transmitted from the communication terminal 200 is received.
In step SS52, as explained in step SS44, it is determined whether the control can be shifted to according to the contents of the recipe data CD regarding the second portion M2 received by the communication unit (communication adapter) 51.

If the communication unit (communication adapter) 51 judges that the data of the second portion M2 has been acquired immediately before, the data is stored in a specified storage area of the recipe data storage unit 42 in preparation for cooking step 2, which is performed immediately afterwards.

Next, step SS53 is not an essential process, as indicated by the broken line, but is a function that can be added as an option. In this step SS53, similarly to step SS45, the status confirmation result is transmitted to the communication terminal 200. Then, it is possible to check whether the communication was successful on the communication terminal 200 side.

Next, in step SS54, the content of the acquired recipe data CD (data of the second portion M2) is displayed on the display section 16, so if the start of heating cooking is inputted using the input operation section 15, heating cooking (cooking process 2) is started. At this point, the heating stop step P3 ends.
Thereafter, the heating cooking (cooking process 2) is completed by the user US's stop operation. Alternatively, the heating cooking (cooking step 2) is automatically terminated as the set heating time elapses (step SS55).

Although not explained in steps SS46 and SS54, before the start of cooking process 1 and cooking process 2, the user US can modify control conditions such as heat power and set temperature as appropriate. However, depending on the cooking menu, the setting conditions of the received first portion M1 or second portion M2 may not be changed. Moreover, the control conditions can also be corrected at an intermediate stage after the heating and cooking operation is started.

Summary of Embodiment 1.
As is clear from the above description, in the first embodiment, the heating cooker 1 related to the first disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is, one form of the heating cooker 1 according to the first disclosure is as follows:
Input operation section 15;
A first heating means HM1 and a second heating means HM2,
a communication unit 51 that wirelessly communicates with the outside;
Notification means 90;
a control device 40 that executes cooking using the recipe data CD acquired via the communication section 51;
The control device 40 sets, for the recipe data CD, a first part M1 that sets a cooking process 1 that uses one or two of the heating means, and a cooking process 2 that uses one or two of the heating means. The second part M2 to be set is acquired in two stages,
The control device 40 includes:
(1) a communication establishment step SP1 for establishing a communication state with a specific communication terminal 200;
(2) After the communication establishment step SP1, a notification step 1 (SP2A) in which the notification means 90 makes a specific notification A regarding the operation of the input operation unit (necessity, presence of a specific input key, etc.);
(3) After the notification step 1 (SP2A), a notification step 2 (SP2B) in which the notification means 90 makes a specific notification B regarding the operation of the input operation section (necessity, presence of a specific input key, etc.);
(4) a confirmation step 1 (SP3A) of transmitting selection information when the input operation unit notified in the notification step 1 is input operated;
(5) a confirmation step 2 (SP3B) of transmitting selection information 2 when the input operation unit notified in the notification step 2 is input operated;
to carry out,
This is a configuration characterized by the following.

With this configuration, the cooking device 1 can reliably acquire the external recipe data CD and use it for actual cooking.
Furthermore, in the first embodiment, on the side of the heating cooker 1, an input operation section to be operated (for example, a central operation section 15M with input keys 153M) suitable for acquiring the recipe data (cooking menu) selected by the user US is provided. ) in advance, or after receiving advance notice information 1 (or advance notice information 2 if there are multiple cooking steps) from the communication terminal 200, input operation is performed on the input operation section to be operated. In either case, the process proceeds to the recipe data CD acquisition operation after the user US performs a confirmation operation on the heating cooker 1 side (whether or not there is a specific operation on the input operation section 15). Mistakes can be prevented and usability can be improved.
In addition, the recipe data CD for a cooking menu with multiple cooking steps can be reliably acquired through the reception of the notice information 1, notice information 2, etc. and the confirmation operation (selection information A, selection information B) for each cooking step. Therefore, it can be expected to improve the operability of heating cookers that can handle a wide range of cooking by using multiple cooking processes.

In the first embodiment, the specific notification A is further performed in response to the acquisition of advance notice information 1 (201) regarding the first portion M1 from the communication unit 51 (notification step 1).
In addition, after the notification step 1, the specific notification B is performed in response to obtaining advance notice information 2 (201) regarding the second part M2 from the communication unit 51 (notification step 2). Therefore, the specific notification A and the specific notification B are executed reliably, and reliable operation of the input operation unit 15 by the user US can be expected.

Furthermore, in this Embodiment 1, the heating cooker 1 related to the second disclosure was disclosed as follows.
That is, one form of the heating cooker 1 according to the second disclosure is as follows:
Input operation section 15;
First heating means HM1 to third heating means HM3,
a communication unit 51 that wirelessly communicates with the outside;
Notification means 90;
a control device 40 that executes cooking using the recipe data CD acquired via the communication section 51;
The control device 40 controls, for the recipe data CD, a first part M1 that sets a cooking process 1 that uses one or more of the first heating means HM1 to third heating means, and obtaining in two stages a second portion M2 for setting a cooking step 2 using one or more of the means HM1 to the third heating means;
The control device 40 includes:
(1) When the specific input key A (for example, 152L) is operated after the notification means 90 notifies that the recipe data CD related to the first portion M1 can be acquired, the setting information of the first portion Proceed to the process where you can get an A,
(2) When the specific input key B (for example, 153M) is operated after the notification means 90 notifies that the recipe data CD regarding the second portion M2 can be acquired, the setting information of the second portion Proceed to the process where you can obtain a B.
This is a configuration characterized by the following.

With this configuration, the cooking device 1 can reliably acquire the external recipe data CD and use it for actual cooking.
That is, when the heating cooker 1 side acquires the recipe data (cooking menu) selected by the user US, it receives the preview information 1 from the communication terminal 200 (if there are two cooking steps, the preview information 2). Only when a specific input key (for example, 152L) notified by the notification means 90 (to be operated) is operated after receiving the ``recipe data CD'', the process proceeds to the acquisition operation of the recipe data CD. Mistakes can be prevented and usability can be improved.
Furthermore, for a recipe data CD of a cooking menu with a plurality of cooking steps, for each cooking step, the notification information (201) is received, the notification means 90 notifies a specific input key, and the specific input key is confirmed. Since it can be reliably obtained through three stages, it can be expected to improve the operability of the heating cooker, which can handle a wide range of cooking by using multiple cooking processes.

Furthermore, in this Embodiment 1, the heating cooking system related to the third disclosure was disclosed as follows.
That is, one form of the heating cooking system related to the third disclosure is as follows:
A heating cooker 1 having a plurality of input operation units 15 (15L, 15M, 15R) and a communication function (communication unit 51),
A communication terminal 200 connected to the heating cooker 1 by wireless communication,
The communication terminal 200 includes:
(1) On the terminal side display unit 216, the first screen 216A and the second screen 216B are sequentially displayed,
(2) On the first screen 216A, the recipe data CD regarding the selected cooking item is displayed in the order of the first display section 251 regarding the cooking process 1 and the second display section 252 regarding the cooking process 2 (see FIG. 59). Step SG3),
(3) When the first display portion 251 displayed on the first screen 216A is selected, a display is displayed on the second screen that displays information specifying the input operation section 15 used in the cooking process 1. Switching (see Figure 61),
(4) Displaying on the second screen 216B an input key 240 that can transmit setting information A regarding the cooking process 1 of the recipe data CD;
(5) when the input key 240 is operated, transmitting the setting information A regarding the cooking process 1 selected on the first screen 216A to the heating cooker 1;
This is a configuration characterized by the following.

With this configuration, the cooking device 1 can sequentially acquire the recipe data CD held in the external communication terminal 200 for each cooking process and use it for actual cooking.
Furthermore, in the communication terminal 200, information on the cooking process is displayed on the terminal side display section 216 in the order of the first display part 251 related to the cooking process 1 and the second display part 252 related to the cooking process 2, and By displaying the input key 240 for transmission, the operation of the user US can be guided by visual information so that the recipe data CD can be reliably acquired. Therefore, even when executing a cooking menu that includes two or more cooking steps, it is possible to prevent operational errors and confusion by the user US and improve usability.

Furthermore, in this Embodiment 1, a heating cooking system related to the fourth disclosure was disclosed as follows.
That is, one form of the heating cooking system related to the fourth disclosure is as follows:
A cooking device 1 having a display section 16, a plurality of specific input keys provided on an input operation section 15, and a communication function;
A communication terminal 200 connected to the heating cooker 1 by wireless communication,
The communication terminal 200 has a recipe selection section 232 that displays recipe data CD regarding the food to be cooked on the terminal side display section 216,
The communication terminal 200 includes:
(1) Displaying a first screen 216A and a second screen 216B sequentially on the terminal side display unit 216,
(2) On the first screen 216A, the recipe data of the food to be cooked that is the target of the recipe data CD is displayed in the order of a first display section 251 related to cooking process 1 and a second display section 252 related to cooking process 2,
(3) Displaying on the first screen 216A a transmission input key 237A (of preview information 1) for notifying that the cooking process 1 displayed on the first screen 216A has been selected;
(4) When transmitting processing is performed using the input key 237A, the display is switched to the second screen 216B,
When the heating cooker 1 receives the advance notice information 1, the heating cooker 1 displays information specifying the specific input key corresponding to the cooking step 1 indicated in the advance notice information A on the display section 16, and displays the information on the display section 16. When the target specific input key is operated, selection information A is issued,
When the communication terminal 200 receives the selection information A, it becomes possible to transmit the setting information A regarding the cooking process 1 to the heating cooker 1;
This is a configuration characterized by the following.

With this configuration, the cooking device 1 can reliably acquire the recipe data CD held in the external communication terminal 200 and use it for actual cooking.
Furthermore, the communication terminal 200 can display the input key 237A for transmission in the first display section 251 regarding the cooking process 1 to guide the user US's operation to obtain the recipe data CD.
Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1, after turning on the main power switch 20, information for specifying the specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 153M corresponding to the cooking process 1 is displayed on the display section 16, and the correct specific input key is displayed on the display section 16. Since the selection information A necessary for acquiring the recipe data CD is transmitted only when the user US is operated, it is possible to prevent the user US from making operational mistakes and improve usability.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
After the main power switch 20 is turned ON, the control device 40 performs the following operations.
(1) When any one of the specific input keys 153M, 152L, 152R is inputted, generates individual selection information A (202A, 202B, 202C) corresponding to the specific input key,
(2) When receiving preview information 1 (notice signal) (201) of a specific cooking menu (for example, "hamburger") targeted by the recipe data CD, the specific input key corresponding to the cooking menu (for example, 153M) from among the specific input keys, and starts a confirmation step SP3 of determining whether or not the identified specific input key is being operated for input;
(3) transmitting the selection information A (202A, 202B, 202C), triggered by the input operation of the specific input key (for example, 153M) to be inputted, which was identified in the confirmation step SP3;
This configuration is characterized by the following.

With this configuration, the cooking device 1 can reliably acquire the external recipe data CD and use it for actual cooking.
Moreover, if the user US operates a specific input key (for example, 153M) suitable for acquiring the selected recipe data (cooking menu) on the side of the heating cooker 1 in advance, or if the input key from the communication terminal 200 is In any case, if you operate a specific input key that should be operated after receiving advance notice information 1 (including advance notice information 2, etc. in the case of a cooking menu with two cooking steps), After the user US confirms the operation of the heating cooker 1 (whether or not the specific input key 153M is operated), the process proceeds to the acquisition operation of the recipe data CD, which prevents the user US from making operational mistakes and improves usability. be able to.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of this Embodiment 1,
a first heating means HM1 that heats the object to be heated at a first location (above the top plate 3) where the object to be heated is placed;
a second heating means HM2 that heats the object to be cooked at a second location (inside the heating chamber 6) where the object to be cooked is accommodated;
first input operation parts 15L, 15R of the first heating means HM1;
a second input operation section 15M of the second heating means HM2;
a control device 40 that controls the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 and executes cooking using recipe data CD acquired from the outside;
Equipped with
Specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 153M are arranged in the first input operation units 15L, 15R and the second input operation unit 15M, respectively,
After the main power switch 20 is turned on (ON state), the control device 40
(1) When acquiring the recipe data CD, specifying the specific input keys 152L, 152R of the first input operation sections 15L, 15R or the second input operation section 15M determined by the cooking menu of the recipe data. a notification step SP2B of notifying any one of the input keys 153M;
(2) a confirmation step SP3 of transmitting selection information A (202) for the source of the recipe data CD when the specific input keys 152L, 152R notified in the notification step SP2B are inputted;
This is a configuration characterized by executing the following.

With this configuration, the cooking device 1 can reliably acquire the external recipe data CD and use it for actual cooking.
Furthermore, in order to ensure that the specific input key to be operated can be operated on the cooking device 1 side, the operation of acquiring the recipe data CD is performed after the confirmation operation of the cooking device 1 (whether or not the specific input key 153M is operated). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the user US from making operational mistakes and improve usability.

Furthermore, in the heating cooking system of this Embodiment 1,
In the heating cooker, specific input keys 153M, 152L, and 152R to be operated on the input operation section 15 are determined for each cooking menu, and when the specific input keys are operated, selection information A (202A, 202B, 202C) is determined. ) is transmitted to the communication terminal 200,
The communication terminal 200 includes:
(1) A first step of displaying the recipe data CD regarding one selected cooking item on the terminal side display section 216 (step SG3 in FIG. 63);
(2) a second step (step SG3B in FIG. 63) of determining whether the specific input key corresponding to the recipe data CD displayed in the first step is operated;
(3) In the second step, if it is determined that the specific input key is operated, the input key 240 is used to transmit the setting information A (201) regarding the recipe data CD to the cooking device 1. a third step (step SG6 in FIG. 65) of displaying on the terminal side display section 216;
This is a configuration that executes sequentially.

With this configuration, when a specific input key to be operated that is suitable for acquiring recipe data (cooking menu) is operated in advance on the heating cooker 1 side, the communication terminal determines whether or not such specific input key is operated. After confirmation (judgment) on the 200 side, the second screen 216B can be displayed and the user can be guided to the transmission operation of the setting information of the recipe data CD (see step SG7 in FIG. 65). This prevents the user US from making operational mistakes. Moreover, usability can be improved.

Furthermore, as explained in FIG. 65, if the specific input key specified in the cooking menu notified by the advance notice information 1 is operated before the advance notice information 1 (201) is received, the operation shown in FIG. Since the display operation in step SG4 is not performed (see FIG. 65), the user US who is facing the heating cooker 1 can avoid unnecessary misunderstandings (interpreting that it is necessary to operate a specific input key again). This is a configuration that can avoid the occurrence of

Furthermore, in the heating cooking system of this Embodiment 1,
The communication terminal 200 includes:
(1) On the terminal side display unit 216, the first screen 216A and the second screen 216B are sequentially displayed,
(2) Display the recipe data CD regarding the selected cooking item on the first screen 216A (for example, step SG3 in FIG. 63);
(3) When the recipe data CD displayed on the first screen 216A is selected, the display is switched to the second screen 216B that displays preview information 1 (201) that specifies the cooking menu of the recipe data CD. (Step SG3A in FIG. 63),
(4) If the selection information A (202A, 202B, 202C) is received before the preview information 1 is displayed, the specific input key (for example, 153M) to which the selection information A relates and the preview Determine whether the specific input key (for example, 153M) corresponding to the cooking menu of the recipe data CD related to information 1 matches (step SG3B in FIG. 63),
(5) If the determination confirms that the specific input key (for example, 153M) matches, the setting information A regarding the recipe data CD of the cooking menu displayed on the first screen 216A is 1 (see step SG7 in FIG. 65).

With this configuration, if the user US operates a specific input key (for example, 153M) suitable for acquiring the selected recipe data (cooking menu) on the side of the heating cooker 1 in advance, After confirming (determining) on the communication terminal 200 side whether or not the user US has operated a specific input key on the cooking device 1 side in advance, the second screen 216B as shown in FIG. 60(B) is displayed, Since the user can be guided to the operation of transmitting the setting information of the recipe data CD, it is possible to prevent operational errors by the user US and to improve usability.

Furthermore, as explained in FIG. 61, if the specific input key specified in the cooking menu notified by the advance notice information 1 is operated before the advance notice information 1 (201) is received, the heating cooker Since the display operation of step SG4 in FIG. 63 is not performed on the 1 side (see FIG. 65), the user US who is facing the heating cooker 1 may have unnecessary misunderstandings (needing to operate a specific input key again). This is a configuration that can avoid causing problems (which can be interpreted as such).

Furthermore, in this embodiment 1, the following heating and cooking system is disclosed.
That is, one embodiment of the heating and cooking system includes:
A cooking device 1 having a plurality of input operation units 15, a display unit 16, a communication function, and a plurality of heating means (HM1 to HM3);
A communication terminal 200 connected to the cooking appliance by wireless communication,
The input operation unit 15 has individual operation units 15L and 15R corresponding to only one of the heating means, and a common operation unit 15M corresponding to a plurality of the heating means,
The cooking device 1 has first specific input keys 152L and 152R arranged on the individual operation units 15L and 15R, and a second specific input key 153M arranged on the shared operation unit 15M,
By selecting the first specific input keys 152L and 152R, first menu information (a single cooking mode of induction heating cooking) can be displayed on the display unit 16 (16L and 16R),
By selecting the second specific input key 153M, second menu information (combined cooking mode) can be displayed on the display unit 16 (16M),
The communication terminal 200 includes:
(1) Having a function of receiving selection information A (202A, 202B, 202C) generated from the cooking appliance 1 as a result of input operations of the first specific input keys 152L, 152R and the second specific input key 153M,
(2) displaying either the first menu information or the second menu information on the first screen 216A in response to a user input;
(3) When a cooking menu item belonging to either the first menu information or the second menu information displayed on the first screen 216A is selected (when the input key 237 is selected), the display is switched to the second screen 216B,
(4) In the second screen 216B, when the selection operation (input) of either the first specific input key or the second specific input key corresponding to the one selected cooking menu has been completed, “first information” (see second screen 216B1 in FIG. 61 ) for transmitting recipe data CD corresponding to either the first menu information or the second menu information is displayed, and when the selection operation (input) of neither the first specific input key nor the second specific input key has been completed, “second information” (see advance notice information 201 in FIG. 60 (B)) for requesting the selection operation of either the first specific input key or the second specific input key is displayed.
(5) When the second information (notice information 201) is displayed on the second screen 216B, determining whether the selection operation of the first specific input key or the second specific input key has been completed by waiting for reception of the selection information A (202A, 202B, 202C) from the cooking appliance (step SG6);
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

With this configuration, the cooking device 1 can reliably acquire the recipe data CD held in the external communication terminal 200 and use it for actual cooking.
Moreover, if the user US operates a specific input key (for example, 153M) suitable for acquiring the selected recipe data (cooking menu) on the heating cooker 1 side in advance, such user US After confirming (determining) on the communication terminal 200 side whether or not a specific input key on the heating cooker 1 has been operated in advance, the second screen 216B1 as shown in FIG. 61(A) is displayed, and the recipe data CD is displayed. Since the "first information" for transmission can be displayed, it is possible to reliably guide the user to the operation of transmitting the setting information of the recipe data CD.
This prevents the user US from making operational mistakes and improves usability.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 has a plurality of heating means, a first heating means HM1 controlled by the individual operation parts 15L and 15R, and a second heating means HM1 controlled by the shared operation part 15M. The configuration included a heating means HM2 and a third heating means HM3.

With this configuration, it is possible to select the three heating means HM1 to HM3 and sequentially execute cooking in the independent cooking mode KM3, combined cooking mode KM2, and cooperative cooking mode KM1 without mutual interference. . This makes it possible to provide a heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 has a function of executing at least two or more cooking modes, a single cooking mode, a composite cooking mode, and a cooperative cooking mode, by the various heating means,
The single cooking mode is controlled by the first specific input keys 152L and 152R arranged on the individual operation unit,
The composite cooking mode KM2 is characterized in that it is controlled by the third specific input key 154M arranged on the shared operation section 15M.

With this configuration, cooking in the independent cooking mode KM3, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the cooperative cooking mode KM1 can be performed sequentially without mutual interference.
In addition, the third specific input key 154M arranged in the shared operation section 15M can control the acquisition of recipe data in the complex cooking mode KM2 and the cooperative cooking mode KM1, so that input keys and switches can be used depending on the number of cooking modes. The input operation section 15 can be realized without increasing the number of operation buttons.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, one specific input key 153M, 152L, 152R is provided for each of the input operation sections 15 (15L, 15M, 15R), regardless of the heating cooking mode KM1 to KM3 to be selected. and when the specific input key is operated, unique selection information A (202A, 202B, 202C) that can identify the specific input key is transmitted to the communication terminal 200,
The communication terminal 200 has information that allows each of the specific input keys 153M, 152L, and 152R to be specified (identified) in the cooking device database 217, and the specific input key corresponding to the specific recipe data CD is stored in the cooking device database 217. 15 (15L, 15M, 15R) is operated (see FIG. 63). and providing a transmitting means (input key 240) for transmitting the setting information to the heating cooker 1 when the selection information A indicating that the specific input key has been operated is obtained;
This is a configuration characterized by the following.

With this configuration, when a specific input key (for example, 152R) to be operated is operated in advance, whether or not the specific input key on the heating cooker 1 side has been operated by the user US is checked on the communication terminal 200 side. After confirmation (see step SG6 in FIG. 63), the second screen 216B1 as shown in FIG. 61(A) can be displayed to display the first information for transmitting the recipe data CD. It is possible to guide the user to the operation of transmitting the CD setting information.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent operational errors by the user US and to improve usability.
Furthermore, the specific input keys 153M, 152L, and 152R are provided for each of the input operation sections 15 (15L, 15M, and 15R), regardless of the heating cooking mode KM1 to KM3 to be selected. In particular, even when cooking in complex cooking mode KM2 or cooperative cooking mode KM1 that uses the shared operation section 15M, there is always one specific input key (153M) to be operated, which prevents the user from getting confused about the operation. .

Furthermore, the communication terminal 200 allows input operations for transmitting the first screen 216A that displays identification information of the recipe data CD and the setting information to the cooking device 1 on the terminal side display unit 216. The second screen 216B and the third screen 216C that displays the transmission result information of the setting information are sequentially displayed.
Therefore, the content of recipe data, the necessity of input operations to send setting information, and the results of sending setting information can be confirmed individually on each display screen (1st screen to 3rd screen). can check the situation accurately and easily.

Further, the second screen 216B displays the result of determining whether the specific input key corresponding to the recipe data CD is operated, as shown in the second screen A (216B1) in FIG. 61(A). This is the configuration that will be used.
Therefore, the user US can accurately and easily confirm the necessity of inputting the specific input key.

Furthermore, the second screen 216B is configured to separately display a state 1 (see FIG. 60(B)), which indicates that the operation of the specific input key corresponding to the recipe data CD is requested, and a state 2 (see FIG. 61(A)), which indicates that the operation of the specific input key has been completed.
Therefore, the user US can accurately and easily confirm the necessity of the input operation of the specific input key.

Furthermore, one form of the heating cooker 1 disclosed in this Embodiment 1 is as follows:
Furthermore, when one recipe data CD is selected using the specific input key 153M or the like, a reception restriction period TZ1 is set, and the process of acquiring the recipe data CD of another cooking menu cannot be started (FIGS. 47 and 65). etc.).
Therefore, if you decide to obtain a specific recipe data CD and press the specific input key 153M, etc., you may accidentally enter another cooking menu (control of other cooking modes) during the setting of the cooking menu. It is possible to prevent the operation of receiving menus (including menus and control menus for the independent cooking mode) from an external communication terminal 200, etc., and stably execute the cooking menu of the received recipe data CD.

Furthermore, the heating cooking system disclosed in this Embodiment 1 has the following features:
A communication terminal 200 connected to the heating cooker 1 by wireless communication,
The input operation sections 15L, 15M, and 15R of the heating cooker 1 include an individual operation section 15M that corresponds to only one of the heating means, and a shared operation section 15L, 15R that corresponds to a plurality of the heating means. ,
Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 has first specific input keys 152L and 152R in the individual operation sections 15L and 15R, and a second specific input key 153M in the common operation section 15M,
By selecting the first specific input keys 152L and 152R, a first cooking program (induction heating cooking program) is selected from the storage device 40 and first menu information (induction heating cooking menu) is displayed on the display section 15. It is possible to display
By selecting the second specific input key 153M, a second cooking program (for cooperative cooking, combined cooking, induction heating) is selected from the storage device 41, and the second menu information (cooperative cooking) is displayed on the display section 16. (cooking menu, combined cooking menu, induction heating menu).
Recipe data CD that can be executed by the second cooking program is transmitted from the communication terminal 200 divided into cooking process 1 and cooking process 2,
The communication terminal 200 includes:
(1) In response to the input from the user US, one cooking menu corresponding to a specific recipe data CD is selected from the range of the first menu information and the second menu information, and 216A),
(2) When the cooking menu displayed on the first screen 216A is confirmed, the second screen 216B is displayed;
(3) The second screen 216A displays whether or not the first specific input keys 152L, 152R or the second specific input key 153M corresponding to the recipe data CD displayed on the second screen 216B are selected. The selection request information shown is displayed (see FIG. 60(B)),
(4) When a transmission command is received at the time when the selection of the first specific input keys 152L, 152R or the second specific input key 153M is completed (step SG7, see FIGS. 63 and 64), the specific recipe is transmitting the data CD to the heating cooker 1;
This is a configuration characterized by the following.

With this configuration, the recipe data CD held in the external communication terminal 200 is sequentially transmitted to the cooking device 1 for each cooking process (cooking processes 1, 2, etc.) to ensure that it is acquired. can be used for actual cooking.
Moreover, the notification means 90 (display section 16) of the heating cooker 1 changes the specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 153M of the input operation section 15 to be operated in advance to the preview information 1 according to the operation of the user US. It can be presented according to the corresponding correspondence information KID. Therefore, when the advance notice information 1 is received from the communication terminal 200, the correct specific input key is notified by the notification means 90, and the operation of the confirmation step SP3 by the user US can be correctly guided.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent operational errors by the user US and to improve usability.

Furthermore, the heating cooking device 1 illustrated in the first embodiment uses the key specifying section 21 (light emitting sections 21M, 21L, 21R) of the notification means 90 to determine the input operation to be performed in advance according to the operation of the user US. The specific input keys in the sections 15 (15L, 15M, 15R) can be individually notified.
This guides the user US to operate the confirmation step SP3 (to the correct specific input key), thereby preventing the user US from making operational mistakes and improving usability.

In the first embodiment, further, upon receiving the selection information A (202), the communication terminal 200 changes the setting information A regarding the recipe data CD displayed on the first screen 216A to the cooking device 1. If it is determined that the setting information A has been transmitted to the heating cooker 1 (see step SG11 in FIG. 63), transmission success information 244A indicating that the setting information A has been successfully transmitted is transmitted to the heating cooker 1. A configuration characterized by displaying on three screens 216C (see step SG12 in FIG. 63) was adopted.

With this configuration, the transmission status of the recipe data CD can also be confirmed on the communication terminal 200 side on the terminal side display section 216 (third screen 216C).
With these, it is possible to realize a heating cooking system that improves usability for the user US.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 shown in Embodiment 1 adopted the following configuration.
That is, the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment has the following features:
The input operation section 15 has touch-type input keys (153M, 154M, 153L, 153R, etc.) for selecting cooking contents,
The input operation unit 15 instructs the control device 40 to start a voice input mode according to the touch state of the input key,
After activating the display unit 16, the control device 40 displays a standby initial screen 16MH on the display unit 16,
When the control device 40 receives a command to start the voice input mode from the input operation section 15 during the period in which the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed, the control device 40 transmits the recipe data CD via the communication section 51. The configuration is characterized in that it enables the acquisition of the recipe data CD, and receives a control condition setting command for the recipe data CD.
Specifically, the input operation unit 15 has touch-type input keys (153M, 154M, 153L, 153R, etc.) for selecting three types (cooperative, combined, independent) cooking modes or cooking menus,
The input operation unit 15 determines whether it is necessary to switch the voice input mode (voice input mode 1) from the touch state of the input key, and issues a voice input mode compatible signal MC1,
When the control device 40 receives the voice input mode compatible signal MC1, the control device 40 enables the acquisition of the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51, and receives a control condition setting command from the user US. This is a configuration characterized by the following.

With this configuration, the timing of acquiring various recipe data CDs from the outside can be controlled by the input keys (153M, 153L, 153R, etc.) of the input operation section 15. In addition, the touch-type input keys (153M, etc.) on the input operation unit 15 can also be used to select the heating cooking mode, control mode, cooking menu, etc., and switch to the voice input mode, so that the heating operation can be started. The troublesome work of the previous input process can be input by voice. This makes it possible to improve the operability and reduce the workload of the user US. Furthermore, the number of installed input keys is not increased, which is advantageous in terms of cost and improved operability.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 shown in Embodiment 1 has the following features:
The control device 40 has a cooperative cooking mode KM1 in which one cooking is performed by driving the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 with a time difference,
When the control device 40 receives a command 1 (see step SB1 in FIG. 28) to select the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 from the input operation unit 15, when the permission conditions (see FIG. 29) are satisfied. displays a first specific screen 16M1 on the display unit 16 for executing the cooperative cooking mode KM1;
The control device 40 issues command 2 from the input operation unit 15 (input keys 158M, 159M or audio signal receiving unit 56) while the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed (see FIGS. 17 and 18). If received, the display section 16 displays information on at least one of food components and nutritional component amounts regarding a specific cooking item (see FIG. 24) that can be executed in the cooperative cooking mode KM1. It had a configuration to do so.

That is, when the user US issues a command to display either the food ingredients or the nutritional ingredients by voice input at the stage shown in Figures 20 to 23, or when the input key 158M or 159M is touched at the stage where the operational support information 170 is displayed (see Figure 20), the first specific screen 16M1 temporarily switches to the display screens shown in Figures 24 (A) and 24 (B), and the food ingredient display screen 16M1A and the nutritional ingredient display screen 16M1B can be displayed.

With this configuration, when a specific cooking menu (for example, "hamburger") is selected using the cooperative cooking mode KM1, it is possible to easily obtain information on the ingredients and nutrients of the food related to the cooking menu. Can be done. Therefore, the convenience of the cooking menu selection operation by the user US can be improved.

For example, users US can select an appropriate cooking menu based on information on food ingredient amounts and nutritional ingredient amounts, depending on their family's health management, dietary restrictions, etc., thereby contributing to improving their eating habits. can.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 shown in Embodiment 1 has the following features:
A mode in which identification information 167 of one cooking menu (for example, "hamburger steak"), a dedicated food ingredient display screen 16M1A showing food ingredients, and a dedicated nutritional ingredient display screen 16M1B showing nutritional ingredients are switched and displayed. Therefore, the user US can easily and clearly identify each piece of information.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 disclosed in the first embodiment,
The control device 40 enables the data acquisition unit 53 to acquire the recipe data CD during an initial standby period TP,
When the control device 40 receives a command 1 to select the cooperative cooking menu KM3 from either the voice input means or the touch input means, if the permission conditions are satisfied, the control device 40 displays a specific cooking menu (e.g., “hamburger steak”) of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 as a first specific screen 16M1 on the display unit 16,
When the control device 40 receives a command 2 from either the voice input means or the touch input means while the first specific screen 16M1 is being displayed, it displays at least one of information on food ingredients or nutrients related to the cooking menu (food ingredient display screen 16M1A or nutritional ingredient display screen 16M1B),
The control device 40 acquires the recipe data CD (the first part M1 of the cooking process 1) when the voice input means and the touch input means are operated within a first limit period TX,
The input operation unit 15 determines whether or not it is necessary to switch to a voice input mode (voice input mode 1) based on the touch state of the input keys, and issues a voice input mode corresponding signal MC1.
When the control device 40 receives the voice input mode corresponding signal MC1 from the input operation unit 15 during the display period of the first specific screen 16M1, the control device 40 enables acquisition of the recipe data CD (the first part M1 of the cooking process 1) via the communication unit 51, and receives a command to set control conditions by voice of the user US via the voice signal receiving unit 56;
The configuration was characterized by the following.

With this configuration, when selecting a specific cooking menu (for example, "hamburger steak") using the cooperative cooking mode KM1, it is possible to easily obtain information on the ingredients and nutrients of each food item. . Therefore, the convenience of the cooking menu selection operation by the user US can be improved. For example, the user US can select an appropriate cooking menu based on information on food components and nutritional components, depending on the family's health management, dietary restrictions, etc., thereby contributing to improving dietary habits.

Furthermore, since the recipe data CD regarding the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is received by a special operation by the user US, the timing of data acquisition from the outside is controlled.
In other words, the recipe data CD can be acquired when the voice input means and the touch input means are operated within the first limit period TX (see especially FIG. 38). Therefore, the recipe data CD will not be received inadvertently due to the proximity of the communication terminal 200 or the like. Therefore, the user US's sense of security can be improved.

Further, in the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure, the specific input keys (input keys 153M, 154M) of the input operation section 15 are also used as the selection section for the voice input mode 1.
With this configuration, it is possible to avoid increasing the number of operation keys (operation sections) of the input operation section 15, and it is possible to easily switch to voice input mode 1 by the user US. This can be prevented. In addition, in the right operation section 15R and the left operation section 15L, the input keys 153R and 153L that can select voice input mode 1 may be set as specific input keys.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 according to the first disclosure, the first specific screen 16M1 is not displayed unless the prerequisites (permission condition 1 and permission condition 2) for starting the cooperative cooking mode KM1 are satisfied. Therefore, after the user US sets (selects) various conditions (for example, firepower level, target temperature, heating time, etc.) for the cooperative cooking mode KM1, it is determined that permission condition 1 or permission condition 2 is not satisfied. Therefore, the step is not forcibly returned to the stage of the initial screen 16MH during the first standby. Therefore, the user US is not forced to perform unnecessary input operations.

Moreover, since the determination of permission condition 1 and permission condition 2 is executed at the first cooking step 1 of the recipe data CD, cooking in an inappropriate state may occur at an early stage after selecting one cooking menu. You can eliminate the reception of Therefore, subsequent unnecessary input operations by the user US can be prevented.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure, the input operation unit 15 is provided with a selection key 180 for selecting a voice input mode 2 using the voice input means.
Therefore, even if the user US has his/her hands full during cooking and cannot perform touch operations, he/she can conveniently give instructions by voice.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 according to the first disclosure, the acquisition condition for acquiring the recipe data CD from the outside is that the input key 180 and one input key (for example, the specific input key 153M) of the touch input section is satisfied when the operation is performed within the first time limit (TX).

That is, the initial standby period TP cannot exceed the first limit period (first time limit TX). For example, the maximum time is 30 minutes.

Therefore, even if the user US had interrupted the operation of the input operation section 15 for some reason, the cooking appliance 1 would automatically be in a state where no input could be made (the main power switch 20 could not be forcibly turned on). open). Therefore, there is no possibility that cooking control data or the like is acquired from outside without the user US's knowledge, and safety is improved.

The input operation section 15 is provided with an input key 180 as a selection section for voice input mode 2, and an input key (for example, input key 158M) for instructing to display information on the food component data DD. Therefore, the operability for the user US is good.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 11 of the first embodiment, in a configuration in which the input keys 180 and an input key (e.g., input key 158M) for commanding the display of information on food component data DD are located on the central operation unit M, and since the central display unit 16M is also located nearby, when the user US is standing in front of (near) the central operation unit 15M while cooking, the necessary display and operation units are within the range of operation and visibility of the user US, and the user US can perform operations without moving from his/her standing position. This is expected to have benefits such as reducing the physical burden on the user US while cooking.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 according to the first disclosure, the control device 40 controls the input key 180 when the input key 180 is not operated, and one specific input key (153M) of the input operation section 15 also If the controller is not operated within the time limit (TX), at least one of cutting off the main power supply or instructing the notification unit 90 to perform an alarm operation is executed. (See automatic shutoff process 1 in step SL11 in FIG. 38).

That is, as explained in FIG. 39, the elapsed time from the step (SS10) of determining whether the input key 180 or the specific input key 153M that can switch to voice input mode 1 has been operated is, for example, 30 minutes. It is limited within. Alternatively, the limit on the elapsed time from the first step SS5 in which the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed is set to within 30 minutes.

Therefore, if the user US forgets to perform an input operation or is unable to perform an input operation for some reason, the control device 40 may forcibly open the main power switch 20 or issue an alarm for safety reasons. It has a configuration that improves safety.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure, the input operation section 15 has a function setting key 151KP,
When the function setting key 151KP is operated, the control device 40 shifts to a function setting mode,
The function setting mode has a configuration in which it is possible to set the necessity or condition for displaying the food component or nutritional component on the central display section 16M.
With this configuration, functions can be set according to the user US's wishes, proficiency level, etc.

Furthermore, in this Embodiment 1,
The restriction unit 55 is configured to acquire new recipe data CD from the communication unit 51 until the cooking process of the cooking menu to which the acquired recipe data CD is applied starts or until the cooking process ends. A cooking device 1 has been disclosed which is characterized by limiting (setting a reception restriction period TZ1).

With this configuration, by selecting the two heating means, each of the independent cooking mode KM3, combined cooking mode KM2, and cooperative cooking mode KM1 can be sequentially executed without mutual interference. This makes it possible to provide a heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, since there is a restriction unit 55, once the recipe data is acquired for one specific cooperative cooking menu A, the recipe data CD of another cooperative cooking menu B can be acquired immediately before the start of the cooking process or at the cooking process. The control device 40 will not inadvertently acquire the information during the process. Therefore, for example, another cooking menu (including a control menu for a complex cooking mode and a control menu for an individual cooking mode) will not be accidentally received in the middle of cooperative cooking. Therefore, there is no concern about confusion on the part of the user US or interference with the operation of the cooking device 1 due to reception.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
The input operation unit 15 includes input keys 153L and 153R for selecting the independent cooking mode KM3, input keys 154M and 155M for selecting the composite cooking mode KM2, and input key 153M for selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM1. It disclosed a configuration in which each of these was provided separately.

With this configuration, the three cooking modes can be selected individually using each input key (input means), so even if the heating cooker 1 has an increased number of heating sources, the operability of the user US can be improved. can be improved.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
The restriction unit 55 restricts the acquisition of new recipe data CD from the communication unit 51 until the cooking process of the cooking menu to which the acquired recipe data CD is applied is completed,
If the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is canceled by the input operation unit 15 after the recipe data is acquired but before the cooking process is started, the data acquisition unit 53 can acquire the recipe data CD again. The structure was characterized by the following.

This prevents you from inadvertently receiving another cooking menu (including the control menu for complex cooking mode and the control menu for single cooking mode) during cooperative cooking, and prevents you from receiving a recipe data CD that has been stably received. Can execute cooking menu.

Furthermore, it is possible to prevent problems with the operation of the control device 40 and to prevent misunderstandings or confusion on the part of the user US, which may occur due to the inadvertent receipt of recipe data CD for a different cooking menu during the cooking process.

Furthermore, if cooperative cooking mode KM1 is canceled, the recipe data CD that was previously acquired and not used for heating cooking can be canceled and the desired recipe data CD can be acquired. You can avoid confusion with acquisition and cancellation.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 disclosed in the first embodiment,
After the main power is turned on by the input operation unit 15, the control device 40
(1) Display the standby initial screen (common screen) 16MH on the display unit 16,
(2) When the touch input keys 153M and 154M for selecting either the cooperative cooking mode KM1 or the composite cooking mode KM2 are operated, the acquisition and use of the recipe data CD obtained from the communication section 51 is restricted. limited by section 55;
(3) When the input keys 153M and 154M are operated, the display of the initial screen (common screen) 16MH is automatically changed to the display of the first specific screen 16M1 or the second specific screen 16M2,
(4) With the first specific screen 16M1 or the second specific screen 16M2 displayed, moving to an initial standby period TP in which a cooking start command is received from the input operation section 15;
(5) During the initial standby period TP, in the case of cooperative cooking mode KM1 from the communication unit 51, the acquisition of the recipe data CD is limited to two times: the first portion M1 and the second portion M2. ,
(6) When a specific input key (154M) among the input keys 153M and 154M is touched, upon receiving the audio input mode compatible signal MC1 issued from the input operation section 15 in accordance with the touch state, This configuration shifts to the "control condition voice input mode" for executing the recipe data CD.

According to this configuration, when the standby initial screen (common screen) 16MH is displayed, if the selection input keys 153M and 154M are operated after that, the first specific screen dedicated to the cooperative cooking mode or the complex cooking mode can be displayed. It is easy to understand that recipe data can be acquired from the outside by displaying the second specific screen 16M1 and 16M2.
You can also switch to voice input mode using some of the input keys.
Therefore, it is possible to avoid confusion or misunderstanding in the input operations of the user US from immediately after the main power is turned on until the start of cooking, and it is expected that the usability will be improved by utilizing voice input and touch input.

Furthermore, when the heating cooking device 1 of the first embodiment finishes the input process for one heating cooking and starts heating cooking, the voice input mode is automatically canceled and the default setting touch input mode is set. When starting input for the next heating cooking, there is no need to touch an input key or the like just to cancel the voice input mode, making it easy to use.

In addition to what has been described above, the heating cooker 1 disclosed in the first embodiment has the following characteristic configurations.
(1) At least one input key capable of selecting "voice input mode 1" (operated by "long press") is provided for each heating cooking menu. In other words, the total number of menus corresponds to three types: the cooperative cooking menu, the "RG menu group" in FIG. 18 (excluding the "IH menu group" in FIG. 12), and the control menu group for the induction heating independent cooking mode KM3. There are four.
That is, for selecting voice input mode 1, a total of four input keys 153M (for cooperative cooking mode), 154M, 153L, and 153R are provided.
In other words, the three input operation units 15L, 15M, and 15R are provided with input keys that allow you to select at least one voice input mode 1, so you can use the three input operation units located at separate locations to select the voice input mode, respectively. This is convenient because you can choose from 1.

(2) The control menu group of the induction heating independent cooking mode KM3 can be executed by heating cooking using the heating port 4R using the right operating section 15R and heating cooking using the left heating port 4L using the left operating section 15L. Input keys 153L and 153R are provided corresponding to the left and right operation units 15L and 15R, respectively, which can select "voice input mode 1" (can be operated by "long press").
Therefore, when manually setting the induction heating cooking using the left and right operation sections 15L and 15R, voice input mode 1 can be selected individually using these operation sections, resulting in good operability.

(3) Although it has three input operation units, one input operation unit (for example, central operation unit 15M) can be used with an input key (for example, 154M) that allows you to select “voice input mode 1” on that operation unit. ), the input process of the other input operation sections (in this case, the left and right operation sections 15L, 15R) cannot be started, and therefore, the voice input mode 1 cannot be selected either. However, in the above case, if heating cooking is being performed using the other input operation units (in this case, the left and right operation units 15L and 15R), the "touch input" operation of the input keys on that input operation unit will not work. It is possible. Therefore, changing the heat power or stopping heating during cooking can be performed without any restrictions.

In other words, when one input key (e.g., 154M) is pressed to set "voice input mode" in one of the multiple input operation units, the input process for "starting new cooking" cannot be started in the other input operation units. In an input operation unit that is already performing cooking, input operations other than the voice input mode are possible. Therefore, cooking that is currently being performed can be controlled (e.g., stopping heating, changing heat, etc.) by operations other than voice input (touching, pressing).

With this unique configuration, it is possible to avoid simultaneous voice inputs on one input operation section and another input operation section, so when cooking in two places at the same time, or when cooking in one place. In addition, when another heating cooking is to be started, input commands do not interfere with each other, and reliable input operations can be performed, resulting in high safety.

Embodiment 2.
67 to 77 show a heating cooker and a heating cooking system according to the second embodiment. Note that the same or corresponding parts as the configuration of the first embodiment described in FIGS. 1 to 66 are given the same reference numerals.

In the second embodiment, the configuration of the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1 is different from that of the first embodiment. In addition, the configuration of the cloud server 300 is also changed.
In addition, in this embodiment 2, only one specific input key 151KP, 152L, 152R is selected for each of the three input operation units 15L, 15M, 15R, and among them, the input key 151KP is significantly different from the embodiment 1 in that it does not have a function for selecting a cooking menu or cooking mode.

Also in this second embodiment, when acquiring recipe data (including the above-mentioned "display condition data") from an external communication terminal 200, etc., the restriction unit 55 controls the input function and display function of the cooking device 1 side. Limit some. For this purpose, the data acquisition unit 53 issues various control commands via the communication unit 51 in response to the operation of acquiring recipe data from the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300. In this second embodiment as well, the control device 40 controls, for the recipe data CD, a first portion M1 that sets the cooking process 1 using one or more of the heating means, and the other heating means. The second portion M2, which sets the cooking process 2 using , is obtained in two stages.

FIG. 67 will be explained.
A refrigerator 331 and a heating cooker 1 are installed inside the kitchen 601, and the refrigerator 331 and the heating cooker 1 can each exchange information with the wireless router 340 by wireless communication.

The wireless router 340 is also an access point for a network NW such as the Internet. The wireless router 340 can access the first server 321 located in an external space.
In this second embodiment, the cloud server 300 described in the first embodiment includes a first server 321, a second server 322, a recipe data providing server 301, and a food ingredient information server 326, which will be described later. .

The cooking device 1 can acquire at least the recipe data CD through wireless communication 330BT or 330WF with the communication terminal 200. This recipe data CD includes not only cooking control data for executing the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 but also cooking control data of the composite cooking mode KM2 and the like.

The communication terminal 200 can also perform direct wireless communication with the wireless router 340 in this second embodiment. This communication terminal 200 has the same basic configuration as the communication terminal 200 described in the first embodiment.

As described in Embodiment 1 (FIG. 55), communication terminal 200 has notification data 223 and remote control data 224. In the second embodiment, these notification data 223 and remote control data 224 are downloaded from the first server 321 that is connected to the first server 321, which is the information providing means, through the network NW. It may be something you have acquired.

In addition, the cooking device database 217 stores food component/nutrient data 226, and this food component/nutrient data 226 is sent to a second server from a food component information server 326 that provides various food component information. It was obtained via the server 322. The code DD is food component information (component data) that includes both food components and nutritional component data.

The food component information server 326 may use, for example, data from the "Japanese Food Standard Composition Table" published by the Ministry of Education, Culture, Sports, Science and Technology.

The communication terminal 200 can transmit recipe data CD and remote control information RS, such as commanding a heating cooking operation, to the cooking device 1, respectively.

The communication terminal 200 has a voice input section 222 (see FIG. 55) that converts voice from a user US into a predetermined voice input signal VS.
Therefore, when the user US speaks into this communication terminal 200, a voice input signal (voice data) VS can be transmitted to the second server 322. In other words, necessary input operations can be performed without touching the touch operation unit 215 (see FIG. 55).

When the heating cooker 1 is activated, the user US gives speech information to the communication terminal 200 by voice, extracts a desired recipe data CD from the recipe data providing server 301, and sends the desired recipe data CD via the communication terminal 200. can be provided to the heating cooker 1.

For example, since the party receiving the voice input signal VS is the second server 322, the speech information may include, for example, "〇〇〇 (an example of a name or nickname for identifying the second server 322), a cooperative cooking recipe, etc. ``Search for'', etc.
The utterance information “〇〇〇, search for a recipe” is one type of external command information that can be applied to the cooking device 1.

Further, the utterance information “〇〇〇, search for a cooperative cooking recipe” is information specifying the cooking mode for the heating cooker 1.

Further, the utterance information "〇〇〇, look for a recipe that can be made using a microwave and IH" is utterance information that extracts possible cooking menus in the cooperative cooking mode KM1.

These utterance information are utterance information that can be converted into standard commands prepared in advance at the second server 322.

Speech information issued by the user US to the communication terminal 200 is converted into text data in the communication terminal 200, and is transmitted to the second server 322 in the text data (voice input signal VS) format of the speech information.

The control unit 322C of the second server 322 receives text data (voice input signal VS) via the input/output unit 322A, and determines whether it can be converted into a standard command stored in the storage unit 322R.

The control unit 322C converts text data of speech information (voice input signal VS) into various commands (also referred to as "command data") prepared as standard commands. The "command" here includes an instruction to extract recipe data for executing one cooking from the recipe database stored in the recipe data providing server 301. Note that the input/output unit 322A is, for example, an API gateway.

The first server 321 and the second server 322 are connected by a network NW such as the Internet.
An inquiry signal (inquiry data) SN is transmitted from the input/output unit 322A of the second server 322 to the first server 321. This inquiry signal SN is, for example, a command requesting to extract the recipe data CD from the recipe data providing server 301. Further, it is a command signal generated by an input operation of the communication terminal 200 when you want to know various data about the operating state of the cooking device 1 (for example, the content and progress of the cooking process). In other words, these data are operation support data GS for the user US.

Note that the second server 322 does not require any special control or processing unique to the cooking device 1, so existing servers such as servers for various systems such as an AI assistant, an intelligent assistant, or a smart speaker can be used. can.

The first server 321 shown in FIG. 67 is operated by the company (manufacturer) that manufactured the heating cooker 1, and provides special control and processing unique to the heating cooker 1 (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as Since the user has a good understanding of the cooking device control information (hereinafter referred to as "cooking device control information"), it is possible to accurately grasp the operating state of the cooking device 1 (including both heating operation and non-heating operation). The storage unit 321R stores data corresponding to the "cooker control information". Therefore, if the first server 321 acquires the operating state data OS, which will be described later, the actual operating state of the cooking device 1 can be accurately analyzed on the first server 321 side.

The first server 321 is configured to acquire various "operating status data" OS from the cooking appliance 1 as described below via the wireless router 340 at any time.

The operating state data OS includes data indicating ON/OFF of the main power switch 20, selection data of the cooperative cooking mode KM1, data on control conditions such as heating temperature and heating time, and further information on the top plate 3 and the heating chamber 6. Contains the latest temperature measurement data, etc.

The recipe data providing server 301 can exchange information with the first server 321 by wireless communication. Note that a "system control server" serving as a control means for making these recipe data providing server 301, first server 321, etc. cooperate with each other is not shown. Note that among the individual recipe data CDs prepared in the recipe data providing server 301, those related to the cooperative cooking mode KM1 are prepared for each of a plurality of cooking processes. The entire cooking process is provided to the communication terminal 200 at once.

The recipe data providing server 301 may be incorporated and integrated into the first server 321. The food ingredient information server 326 is connected to the first server 321 via a wired or wireless communication network NW.

In the first server 321, each cooking device 1 is registered in advance, and the operating state data OS transmitted from each cooking device 1 is acquired in association with the user US of the cooking device 1. It is configured to do this.

The first server 321 has an input/output unit 321A for individually performing wireless communication with the wireless router 340 and the second server 322. This input/output unit 321A is, for example, an API gateway. This input/output unit 321 receives recipe data from the recipe data providing server 301.

The first server 321 includes a control unit 321C. The control unit 321C decodes the inquiry signal (command) SN from the second server 321, generates necessary control information in response to the inquiry signal SN, and transmits it to the second server 322.
Further, the first server 321 analyzes the operating state data OS transmitted from a large number of cooking appliances 1 and the user identification information of each cooking appliance 1 . That is, the cooking device 1 of each user US can be specified from the information in the user identification information database held in the storage unit 321R.

The first server 321 has a database related to control of each cooking device 1 registered in advance in the storage section 321R. Therefore, if the data requested by the heating cooker 1 is not compatible with the heating cooker 1, it is not transmitted.

Similarly, even if there is an inquiry signal SN from the communication terminal 200, the first server 321 sends specific operation support data GS to the communication terminal 200 as a set with data such as the model identification number. Send via server. For this reason, for example, if there is an input from the communication terminal 200 of control conditions that are not compatible with a specific recipe data CD, the first server 321 will not accept such input, or will not accept it. Notification is made to the communication terminal 200 with the reason why there is no such information. Therefore, in the voice input mode, if the control conditions input (voiced) by the user via the communication terminal 200 exceed the range allowed by the cooking device 1, a notification is sent to the communication terminal 200. The configuration is such that the input of another control condition is requested.

Furthermore, the first server 321 also has a function of controlling the timing of providing the second server 322 with the recipe data CD of a specific cooking menu acquired from the recipe data providing server 301. This will be explained in detail later.

In this second embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, an input key 180 for selecting voice input is arranged on the central operation section 15M of the input operation section 15. This input key 180 may be a mechanical switch or may be an input key of a touch type input switch like the input keys 153M to 159M.

Next, FIG. 68 will be explained.
FIG. 68 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the cooking device 1, and corresponds to FIG. 10 of the first embodiment.
As is clear from FIG. 68, the control device 40 of the second embodiment does not have a configuration corresponding to the audio signal analysis section 58 shown in FIG. 10 of the first embodiment. In other words, this control device 40 does not have a function of receiving an audio signal from the outside and analyzing it.

Further, the control device 40 of the second embodiment does not have a configuration corresponding to the audio signal receiving section 56 shown in FIG. 10 of the first embodiment. In other words, the input operation section 15 of this second embodiment does not have the function of receiving an audio signal from the outside. The rest of the configuration is the same as that shown in FIG. 10 of Embodiment 1, so redundant explanation will be omitted.

Next, FIG. 69 will be explained.
FIG. 69 is a block configuration diagram illustrating the relationship between the control device 40 and the central operation section 15M. This FIG. 69 corresponds to FIG. 11 of the first embodiment. Note that the right operation section 15R and left operation section 15L have basically the same configuration as the central operation section 15M.

As is clear from FIG. 69, the control device 40 includes an input signal analysis section 52. The input signal analysis section 52 includes an input mode determination section 52C.
The input mode determination unit 52C receives the measurement time data MJ from the input operation unit 15 (15M, 15L, 15R), and if it is 5 seconds or more after a predetermined threshold (for example, 5 seconds), the input mode determination unit 52C It is determined that the input mode is "input mode 1". If it is less than this threshold, it is determined that the operation is a normal "short press" operation.

The "measurement time data MJ" inputted from the input operation section 15 to the control device 40 corresponds to a voice input mode compatible signal.

On the other hand, each input operation section 15L, 15M, 15L including the central operation section 15M is provided with a time measurement section 15T. The measured time data MJ measured by the time measurement section 15T is transmitted as is to the input signal analysis section 52 of the control device 40.
That is, the time measuring unit 15T measures the “touch time” from when the user US touches with his finger until he releases it, and transmits the measured time data MJ to the input signal analysis unit 52.

The input mode determining unit 52C analyzes the measured time data MJ (signal corresponding to audio input mode), and when determining that the setting conditions for "audio input mode 1" are satisfied, input mode switching signal MC2 is set to It is output to the input control section 70. For example, if the measured time data MJ is time data with a length equal to or longer than a threshold value (for example, 5 seconds), it is determined that the setting conditions for audio input mode 1 are satisfied, and the input mode switching signal MC2 is output.

15D is a storage section. The storage unit 15D stores various control parameters for the touch detection unit 15A, time measurement unit 15T, etc. as described above, program information for determination processing, and the like.

15E is a central processing unit (CPU) that performs various information processing operations as an input operation unit (central operation unit 15M).
15F is an input signal transmitter. The input signal transmitter 15F transmits the above-described unique identification signal of the input key, measurement time data MJ of "touch time", etc. to the input signal analyzer 52 of the control device 40.

In FIG. 69, the touch detection section 15A, time measurement section 15T, storage section 15D, etc. are depicted as individual independent blocks, but instead of having separate hardware configurations, for example, one microcomputer Each of these functions may be realized by software.

In FIG. 69, the input mode determination section 52C is depicted as a part of the input signal analysis section 52, but it may be configured separately in hardware. Further, for example, each function of the input mode determination section 52C, input signal analysis section 52, etc. may be realized by software of one microcomputer.

Further, in FIG. 69, the central operation section 15M is explained as an example, but the control device 40 also identifies inputs from the right operation section 15R and the left operation section 15L. Therefore, the input key identifying section 15A in the right operating section 15R includes data identifying the input key present in the right operating section 15R in the signal from the input key and transmits it to the control device 40. This also applies to the left operating section 15L.

Upon receiving the input mode switching signal MC2, the input processing section 70 enters an input standby state in preparation for receiving any input from the first server 321 regarding the recipe data CD.

In FIG. 69, the touch detection section 15A, the time measurement section 15T, etc. are depicted as individual independent blocks, but instead of having separate hardware configurations, they can be implemented, for example, by the software of one microcomputer. Each of these functions may be realized.

In this second embodiment, since mutual authentication is performed between the communication terminal 200 and the cooking device 1, when the cooking device 1 is started, the cooking device 1 sends a signal for automatic connection (“ When the "scan signal" is transmitted, mutual communication for automatic connection is performed between the cooking device 1 and the communication terminal 200. Note that the scan signal may be transmitted from the communication terminal 200 side.

Once the connection between the cooking device 1 and the communication terminal device 200 is established, the state in which the cooking device 1 and the communication terminal device 200 can directly communicate wirelessly with each other continues. If the communication terminal 200 moves with the movement of the user US and becomes distant from the heating cooker 1, it may become temporarily unable to communicate, but if it returns to a communicable range (distance), The connection status will be automatically restored.

During the period from the time when the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed until the specific input key 151KP is pressed (for example, to select the cooperative cooking mode KM1), acquisition of the recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200 is basically not possible. prohibited. Recipe data CD cannot be acquired. (However, the recipe data CD of the cooking menu performed using the left and right operation units 15L and 15R can be obtained by operating the specific input keys 152L and 152R).

Moreover, no recipe data CD can be acquired from the communication terminal 200 during the period after the main power switch 20 is turned on until the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed.

When the cooking device 1 receives the recipe data CD, the cooking device 1 temporarily stores the recipe data in a predetermined storage area (or a dedicated buffer memory) of the recipe data storage unit 42 . In other words, the first part M1 that defines cooking process 1 and the second part M2 that defines cooking process 2 are linked (processed so that they can be identified in a one-to-one relationship) with the identification information of one cooking menu. and saved in the form of one recipe data. Note that reception of the above-mentioned notification data 223 and remote control data 224 is also permitted, and are temporarily stored in the storage unit 42 in association with the recipe data CD of the cooking menu (for example, "Ratatouille").

Next, FIG. 70 will be explained.
FIG. 70 is a plan view of the center display section, the center operation section, the left and right operation sections, and the center heating status display section of the cooking device 1 according to the second embodiment.
One of the features of this second embodiment is the display section 16. As shown in FIG. 70, the display section 16 includes three parts: a left display section 16L, a center display section 16M, and a right display section 16R.

The three display sections 16L, 16M, and 16R have no difference in display function, effective area of the display screen, and planar shape. In other words, the function of the central display section 16M shown in the first embodiment is also provided in the left display section 16L and the right display section 16R in the second embodiment. The initial standby screen 16MH at startup, immediately after the main power is turned on to the cooking device 1, is not displayed only on the center display section 16M, but also on the right display section 16R and the left display section 16L at the same time. The content will be displayed.

First specific screens 16M1, 16L1, and 16R1 are displayed on the central display section 16M, left display section 16L, and right display section 16R at appropriate timings.
Similarly, the second specific screens 16M2, 16L2, 16R2 and the third specific screens 16M3, 16L3, 16R3 are also displayed at appropriate timings. However, as will be explained below, the central display section 16M has temporal priority in some display timings.

The central display section 16M displays a cooperative cooking mode KM1 in which the first heating means HM1 to the third heating means HM3 are combined. Also, displays related to cooking in the individual cooking mode KM3 and the combined control mode are displayed.
The left display section 16L displays information regarding the left heating port 4L and the left operating section 15L.
The right display section 16R displays information regarding the right heating port 4R and the right operation section 15R. Note that, in FIG. 70, illustration of the input key 180 for selecting the voice input mode common to all input operation units is omitted.

The integrated display section 30, the left side display section 31L, and the right side display section 31R display various information in the cooperative cooking mode. That is, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed to display related information when operating in the cooperative control mode.

In the heating cooker 1 shown in FIG. 70, the cooking courses can be roughly divided into a course in which a microwave grill-related "compound cooking mode/single cooking mode" is selected, and a course in which a "cooperative cooking mode" is selected. There are two.

As shown in FIG. 70, as in the first embodiment, the central operation unit 15M operates in an independent cooking mode KM3 of the microwave heating source (microwave oscillation unit) 11, an independent cooking mode KM3 of the radiant heat heating means 12, Various input keys that are shared by four cooking modes, composite cooking mode KM2 and cooperative cooking mode KM1, are grouped together.

The second feature of this second embodiment is the input key 151KP. The input key 151KP shown in FIG. 70 is an input key for the function setting mode described in the first embodiment, but at the same time, it is also a specific input key that can transmit a signal (selection signal A) to which the user US responds when it receives preview information 1 (or preview information 2) (201) of recipe data CD. Note that this input key 151KP can select the function setting mode only when it is "pressed and held." Also, input keys 153M and 154M do not have the function of a specific input key.

Next, FIG. 71 will be explained.
FIG. 71 is an enlarged plan view of the central display section 16M, the central operation section 15M, and the central heating status display section 17M of the heating cooker 1.
The first feature of this second embodiment is that the input key 151KP is the (only) "specific input key" in the central operation section 15M. On the touch operation surface of this input key 151KP, characters explaining the function "preparation for reception" are written (on the upper surface of the central operation section 15M).
The input key 153M located to the right of the input key 151KP is used to select the cooperative cooking mode KM1, similar to the input key 153 in the first embodiment. However, as explained in FIG. 70, the input key 153M does not have the function of a specific input key.

Further, two input keys 155M and 154M on the right side are used to select the composite cooking mode KM1. In addition, the functions of these three input keys 153M, 154M, and 155M are the same as those described in the first embodiment, and include the function of selecting a cooking menu or a control menu by touch operation.

As explained in Embodiment 1, the input keys 153M, 154M, and 155M have the function of allowing a "voice input mode" to be selected by a "long press" operation. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 71 (on the top surface of the central operation unit 15M), explanatory characters for the function "voice input" are written.

FIG. 71 shows the display contents of the central display section 16M at a stage in the middle of acquiring recipe data CD of a cooking menu using the central operation section 15M from the communication terminal 200.
Reference numeral 174 is a receiving operation display section, which in this scene indicates that the receiver is on standby to receive recipe data CD from the outside.

Here, "on standby" refers to a state in which the operation of receiving the recipe data CD has not actually started yet. In other words, the reception operation is not performed in either the first portion M1 that defines the cooking process 1 or the second portion M2 that defines the cooking process 2.
Reference numeral 175 indicates operation support information, and in this scene, pressing the input key 151KP is displayed in text to guide the user US in the recipe data acquisition operation and to support the progress of the operation.

In FIG. 71, when selecting one cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 described in Embodiment 1, advance notice information 1 (201) has already been received, so the specific input key for response (in this case, 151KP) ) is at the stage where touch operations are required. If it is "hamburger" which is one of the cooking menus in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, it corresponds to either the specific input key 152L or 152R of the left and right operation parts 15L and 15R instead of this specific input key 151KP. The light emitting unit 21L or 21R operates to emit light (including blinking). FIG. 71 shows an example in which the light emitting section 21M of the central operation section 15M emits light.

In this second embodiment, as described above, at least the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed not only on the center display section 16M but also on the left and right display sections 16L and 16R simultaneously. FIG. 71 shows the case of "hamburger steak", but unlike the first embodiment, the standby initial screen 16MH of FIG. 71 is simultaneously displayed on the center display section 16M and the left and right display sections 16L and 16R.

Next, FIG. 72 will be explained.
FIG. 72 shows an example of a specific display screen that displays that recipe data is being received from the communication terminal 200 regarding one cooking menu item "hamburger steak" cooked in the cooperative cooking mode KM1.
FIG. 72 shows the case of "hamburger steak", but unlike the first embodiment, the reception operation display screen 16MM of FIG. 72(B) is displayed simultaneously on the center display section 16M and the left and right display sections 16L and 16R. . This is because, for example, inputting the preheating temperature through the right operation section 15R is necessary in the preheating process of this "hamburger steak."

FIG. 72(A) is a schematic diagram showing an enlarged view of the reception operation display screen 16MM. The standby initial screen 16MH is switched to a reception operation display screen 16MM, which shows that a recipe reception operation from the outside is in progress, as shown in FIG. 72(A).

In FIG. 72(A), 16F denotes a number of progress marks that appear on the receiving operation display screen 16MM according to the progress of the receiving operation. There are two types of progress marks 16F: black triangular shapes and white triangular shapes. In FIG. 72(A), 174 denotes a receiving operation display section, which displays in text a message indicating that the recipe data CD is currently being received from outside. In FIG. 72(A), the receiving operation display section 174 does not display whether the first portion M1 defining cooking step 1 or the second portion M2 defining cooking step 2 is currently being received. However, appropriate display information such as "cooking step 1" or "first step" may be added. Also, identification information 167 of the cooking menu (in this case, "hamburger steak") may be displayed.

The receiving operation display screen 16MM is displayed, for example, immediately after pressing one specific input key and transmitting the selection information A, in place of the standby initial screen 16MH. In addition, in this Embodiment 2, as described above, since the recipe data CD is received for "hamburger" as the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM1, for example, the right operation Touch the specific input key 152R of the section 15R.

As shown in FIG. 72(A), immediately after the start of the recipe data CD reception operation, there is one black triangular progress mark 16F, but as the reception operation progresses, the number gradually increases, and eventually there are five black triangular progress marks 16F lined up. As the number of black triangular progress marks 16F increases, the same number of white rectangular progress marks 16F disappear.

The progress mark 16F may display the degree of progress by changing the size or color of a single figure, or may be expressed by animation.
FIG. 72(B) is a schematic diagram showing the first specific screen 16M1 immediately after receiving the recipe data CD.
As shown in FIG. 72(B), auxiliary information 179 is displayed in a wide area where the second area 23 and third area 24 are combined.
Three types of auxiliary information 179 are displayed.
One is reception information 179F indicating that the recipe data CD for "hamburger steak" for which cooking step 1 is to be performed at the right heating port 4R has been received.
The second is reference information 179E that recommends input of control conditions and includes examples (standard values) of control conditions that can be input.
The third item is voice input mode display information 179D indicating that voice input is being accepted. If the mode is not the voice input mode, this voice input mode display information 179D is not displayed. Note that this voice input mode can be selected when the input keys 153M, 154M, etc. are pressed after the external recipe identifying section 173 is displayed. Alternatively, if any of the specific input keys 152L and 152R of the left and right operation sections 15L and 15R is the specific input key to be operated in a state in which advance notice information 1 (201) has been received, those specific input keys 152L and 152R You can also select the voice input mode by pressing and holding one of the buttons.

As shown in FIG. 72(B), the received information 179F does not indicate which of the first part M1 that defines cooking process 1 and the second part M2 that defines cooking process 2 has been received. However, information specifying such a cooking process may be added and displayed.

As described in the first embodiment, also in the second embodiment, the external recipe identification unit 173 determines that the cooking menu currently displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 is based on the recipe data CD acquired from the outside. It is easy to see that. In addition, in the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the external recipe identification unit 173 may display a cooking process number or a cooking process name (for example, "first half process", "first half recipe", etc.). .

In the example of FIG. 72(B), the reference information 179E on the first specific screens 16M1 and 16R1 indicates that the standard temperature at which a hamburger is first preheated is 180°C. The preheating temperature setting can be changed by the user US by voice input (for example, by saying "preheating 190° C."). Note that this reference information 179E is displayed on the first specific screens 16M1 and 16R1 of the center display section 16M and the right display section 16R corresponding to the selected right heating port 4R, respectively.

When the recipe data CD is determined to be a "disallowed process" as a result of the determination of the permission conditions, the receiving operation display section 174 changes to a disallowed display 174F indicating that the receiving operation has failed, as shown in FIG. 71(C).
174A is reception support information. In FIG. 72(B), the reason for disallowing the recipe data CD was that the peak cut power setting value was less than 5000W among the permission conditions, so an improvement method is displayed and the user US function It prompts you to change settings using setting key 151KP.

As shown in FIG. 72(B), the information of the recipe data CD stored in the recipe data storage unit 42 is displayed in the first specific screen 16M1 (cooking a hamburger in the cooperative cooking mode KM1). case).

Instead of the reception operation display screen 16MM shown in FIG. It is also possible to display the information in multiple stages. For example, at the beginning of the receiving operation, the number of LEDs lit is one, and as the receiving operation progresses, the number of LEDs lit is increased. Alternatively, the progress is expressed by blinking the LED or switching the lighting color. Thereby, the completion of the reception operation may be notified to the user US in an intuitive and easy-to-understand manner.

Next, FIG. 73 will be explained.
FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram of the operation of the central operation section 15M and the central display section 16M showing the process of receiving recipe data. This figure is a modification of the display format shown in FIG. 71.
FIG. 73 shows the process of receiving recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200. For all heating cooking modes including the composite cooking mode KM2, the display design of the receiving operation display screen 16MM is unified as shown in FIG. 73(A). In other words, a wide display area is secured by combining the first area 22 to the third area 24.

Immediately after starting to receive recipe data CD from the outside, the standby initial screen 16MH switches to a reception operation display screen 16MM that shows that the reception operation is in progress, as shown in FIG. 73(A).
Reference numeral 174 is a receiving operation display section, which displays in text that the recipe data CD is being received from the outside. The display information on the reception operation display section 174 may include the cooking mode name, control menu name, identification information 160, 167, etc. In FIG. 73, "Microwave heating" is displayed, and it can be confirmed at this stage that the cooking is using the heating chamber 6. In the case of cooperative cooking mode KM1, the reception operation display section 174 indicates which of the first part M1 that defines cooking process 1 and the second part M2 that defines cooking process 2 is being received. It may also be displayed as For example, display information such as "cooking step 1" or "first step" may be added as appropriate.

FIG. 73(A) is an example of the reception operation display screen 16MM of the central display section 16M. Similar receiving operation display screens 16ML and 16MR are displayed on the left and right display sections 16L and 16R (not shown in FIG. 73).

When the recipe data CD is determined to be "disallowed" by the determination of the permission condition (permission condition 1, etc.), as shown in FIG. The display changes to information (disapproval information) 174F.
174A is reception support information. In this Figure 73(B), the reason for disallowing the recipe data CD was that the peak cut power setting value was less than 5000W among the permission conditions, so the improvement method was displayed and the user US It is recommended to change the setting of the peak cut function of the cooking device 1 using the setting key 151KP. In addition, in the case of cooperative cooking mode KM1, the above-mentioned permission condition 1 and permission condition 2 are determined at the stage of receiving the data of the first part M1 that defines cooking process 1, and if the permission condition 1 and permission condition 2 are not permitted, cooking process 2 It is not possible to proceed to obtain the second part M2 of .

In addition, in FIG. 73, an example was explained in which "permission condition 1" was used as the criterion for "disapproval processing" of heating cooker 1. This is the case for the menu (microwave heating "warm"). Conditions other than these may be added to the criteria for "permission condition 1".

Next, FIG. 74 will be explained.
FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing display contents on the terminal-side display section 216 of the communication terminal 200 used in the heating cooking system of the second embodiment.
FIG. 74(A) is an explanatory diagram of the first screen 216A that displays identification information (cooking name, etc.) regarding one cooking menu selected by the user US, and information on the heating means to be used, etc. .

As explained in detail in FIG. 59 and FIG. 60(A) of the first embodiment, the first screen 216A displays the cooking time, quantity (2 servings, 4 servings, etc.) for one cooking menu (food to be cooked), Various information such as ingredients, preparation, and how to make (the name of the cooking mode to be selected with the heating cooker 1, the input operation section, etc.) is displayed.

When the user US touches the cooking menu confirmation key (icon) 237 on the first screen 216A, the notification information 1 (201) is sent from the communication terminal 200 to the cooking device 1 in response to the input by the touch operation. is sent.

The second screen 216B that starts to be displayed after transmitting the preview information 1 (201) is information that requests the heating cooker 1 to determine whether or not to transmit the recipe data CD related to the selected cooking menu. Contains. In the example of FIG. 74, since the central operation section 15M is used in the cooking process 1, the user US needs to operate the specific input key 151KP of the central operation section 15M after receiving the notice information 1 (201). be.

In FIG. 74(A), 236 is cooking process information indicating one type of heat source, which is part of the above-described "how to make". In the example of FIG. 74(A), it can be seen that cooking is performed in a control mode called "range grill" (complex cooking mode KM2). Cooking with a "range grill" is cooking using both the microwave oscillator 11 and the radiant heat heating means 12, and is a type of automatic cooking. Note that since the mode is complex cooking mode KM2, there is no (plural) cooking process in which the heating cooking location is changed by moving the food to be cooked. In other words, since there is one cooking process, the cooking process information 236 is displayed in only one place.

237 is a confirmation key (icon) for the cooking menu displayed on this first screen 216A. When this is touched, the communication terminal 200 switches the display content from the first screen 216A to the second screen 216B in response to the input by the touch operation.
234 is a character display section indicating the type of display information (one of the display menus) on the first screen 216A. In FIG. 74(A), "heating chamber menu" is displayed to indicate that the heating chamber 6 is used for cooking.

Next, FIG. 74(B) will be explained.
When the user US touches the cooking menu confirmation key (icon) 237 on the first screen 216A in FIG. 74(A), the central processing unit (CPU) 212 receives the input from the touch operation and The display switches to the second screen 216B shown in B).

In the second screen 216B, 239 is a character display section showing the type of display information of the second screen 216B. In Fig. 74(B), "Preparing to send heating chamber setting" is displayed to show that the preparation stage for sending the setting information of the heating chamber 6 is in progress.
Reference numeral 240 denotes an input key (icon) for commanding transmission, and when this key is pressed, the recipe data CD of the cooking menu selected in FIG.

The second screen 216B shown in FIG. 74(B) displays the preparation work on the cooking device 1 side for the user US. Specifically, it shows operating the central operating section 15M for use in cooking process 1, and recommends pressing the "preparation button on the central operating section". This "preparation button" refers to the input key 151KP shown in FIG. 71.
At this point, the cooking device 1 has already received the advance notice A (201) and makes the light emitting section 21M of the central operation section 15M emit light in preparation for the user's operation of pressing the input key 151KP. The light emission of the light emitting unit 21M is an operation support operation corresponding to step SG13 described in FIG. 64 of the first embodiment.

When the input key 151KP is pressed, in response to this operation, the cooking device 1 sends "selection information A ( Confirmation information A)" 202 is sent.
Therefore, when the input key 240 on the second screen 216B displayed in FIG. 74(B) is pressed, the recipe data CD of the one cooking menu selected in FIG. 74(A) is sent to the cooking device 1. Ru.

Next, FIG. 75 will be explained.
FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram showing a modification of the display content on the terminal side display section 216 shown in FIG. 74.
In the second screen 216B shown in FIG. 75, 201 is the preview information 1 (201) (related to cooking process 1). A part of this advance notice information 1 (201) has already been transmitted to the heating cooker 1 as advance notice information 1 (201) at the stage of the first screen 216A before this second screen 216B is displayed. That is, the heating cooker 1 acquires both or one of the information that the central operation unit 15M and the heating chamber 6 are to be used. Therefore, in the cooking device 1, the light emitting section 21M corresponding to the corresponding input key 151KP starts blinking light emission.

As shown in FIG. 75, the preview information 1 (201) includes information requesting that the central operation unit 15M used in this recipe (cooking) be operated before transmitting the recipe data CD. There is.
In the example of FIG. 74(B), it is displayed that the input operation section 15 to be operated is the central operation section 15M. Furthermore, in the actual central operating section 15M, the light emitting section 21M corresponding to the input key 151KP is blinking, and in the central operating section 15M, the other light emitting sections 21M are not blinking or emitting continuous light. .
Therefore, as shown in the preview information 1 (201) in FIG. 75, by emitting light on the heating cooker 1 side and highlighting it, it is made clear that the input key 151KP is the only input key that the user US should operate. can be shown. As a result, the input key 151KP can be identified more reliably than in the example of FIG. 74(B), and a reliable input operation by the user US can be expected.

Next, FIG. 76 will be explained.
FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing another example of display content on the terminal side display section 216 shown in FIG. 75.
If the communication terminal 200 has already received a signal indicating that a specific input key to be operated is being operated before pressing the input key 237 shown in FIG. A second screen 216B shown in FIG.
The second screen 216B in FIG. 76 notifies that the specific input key (on the heating cooker 1 side) that should be operated to obtain the recipe data CD has already been operated. Therefore, it can be seen that there is no need to operate the specific input key in the cooking device 1 again. If it is OK to send the recipe data CD as it is, a message is displayed indicating that the input key 240 for sending should be pressed.

The second screen 216B in FIG. 76 is displayed when the specific input key (for example, 151KP) operated in the "key identification step SP2A" and the specific input key (for example, 151KP) in FIG. This is a case where the "specific input key" (for example, 151KP) (corresponding to a specific cooking menu) when the confirmation key (icon) 237 is touched on the first screen 216A of A) matches. .
The operation information of the specific input key in the key specifying step SP2A is transmitted from the cooking device 1 to the communication terminal 200 at the time of the operation. That is, in this communication terminal 200, the operation information of the specific input key in the key identification step SP2A is acquired in advance. Therefore, the central processing unit 212 determines that the specific input key (on the heating cooker 1 side) that should be operated to obtain the recipe data CD has already been operated, and displays the second screen 216B in FIG. let

Next, FIG. 77 will be explained.
FIGS. 77(A) and 77(B) are explanatory diagrams 3 showing display contents on the terminal-side display unit 216 of the communication terminal 200 used in the heating cooking system.
In the third screen 216C shown in FIG. 77(A), 239 is a character display section indicating the type of information displayed on the third screen 216C. In this FIG. 77(A), "transmission result of heating chamber" is displayed to show the situation after the setting information of the heating chamber 6 is transmitted.
FIG. 77(A) is a display screen of the transmission result, and is a dedicated screen that is always displayed after transmitting the recipe data CD.

There are two types of display screens for this transmission result. The first screen is the screen shown in FIG. 77(A). This is a stage in which the final results transmitted from the heating cooker 1 have not yet been received, and the contents transmitted from the communication terminal 200, especially the cooking menu and the main control conditions (heating time, microwave output value), are not yet received. The content is displayed.
The second screen is the screen shown in FIG. 77(B). This is a stage in which the communication terminal 200 has received the transmission result (determination result) from the cooking device 1 and has determined whether the transmission of the recipe data CD is successful or not. Information indicating the success or failure of the transmission will be displayed.

In FIG. 77(A), 525 is a transmission information display section, which displays the name (identification information) of the transmitted cooking menu and two types of control conditions (set temperature and microwave output value) as shown in the figure. ) are displayed in a list. At the same time, the sending action "Sent" is also displayed. 332 is a menu screen display section (icon) for selecting a return to the first menu display screen. In addition, in the case of cooperative cooking mode KM1, the transmission information display section 525 may further display the number and name of the cooking process ("first half process", "second half process", etc.).

333 is the input of a storage command for storing the transmitted cooking menu inside the communication terminal 200 or in the first server 321 so that it can be easily extracted when searching for a cooking menu at a later date. It is a key (icon). When this is pressed, the "sent" cooking menu shown in FIG. 77(A) is stored in the communication terminal 200 or the first server 321 together with setting information such as control conditions. For example, recipe data that is older than 30 days is stored in the storage unit 220 (see FIG. 55) of the communication terminal 200 in order of transmission date and time, and is stored in the storage unit 321R of the first server 321 (see FIG. 66). may be sequentially stored by user US or device identification information. In addition, in the case of the recipe data CD of the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the first part M1 that defines the cooking process 1 and the second part M2 that defines the cooking process 2 are linked to the identification information of one cooking menu. , is saved in the form of one recipe data.

Next, FIG. 77(B) will be explained.
507A is an auxiliary information display section A. In the example of FIG. 77(B), the reason for the "disapproval process" from the heating cooker 1 is briefly explained in text.
507B is an auxiliary information display section B displayed near the auxiliary information display section 507A. This FIG. 77(B) is an example in which the cooking device 1 has obtained status information indicating that the heating chamber 6 is in a high temperature state and has performed a process of disallowing the recipe data CD. As a countermeasure to this non-permission process, it is recommended that the door 7 of the heating chamber (grill storage) 6 be opened. Since this measure lowers the temperature of the heating chamber 6, it can be expected that no error will occur if the recipe data CD is sent again.

In FIG. 77(B), 541 is a voice input mode display section indicating that the communication terminal 200 is set to the voice input mode. At the stage when the voice input mode display section 541 is displayed, if the user US speaks directly to the voice input section 222, input can be performed using that voice.

In FIG. 77(B), 542 is extracted by the central processing unit 212 of the communication terminal 200 with reference to the information in the cooking device database 217 according to the content of the “disapproval processing” from the heating cooking device 1. This is reference information and is a type of operation support data GS (see FIG. 67).

When the heating cooker 1 notifies the user of "disapproval processing", the heating cooker 1 sends a unique error code (such as a simple number) to the communication terminal 200, and the error code is sent to the central processing of the communication terminal 200. The device 212 may check the error code in the cooking device database 217 and display the reference information 542.

In the example shown in Fig. 77(B), instead of using the control menu ``Auto Microwave'', which detects the temperature of the food to be cooked and automatically stops heating, ``Manual Warming'', in which the user individually specifies the heating time, is selected. This indicates that it can be heated. In other words, the user US is recommended to set "time" as a control condition. Note that the heating time (control condition) in the case of manual heating may be determined by inputting a specific cooking name from the communication terminal 200 to the first server 321 and obtaining reference information regarding the time from the first server 321.

In FIG. 77(B), 543 is an error notification section (error display section) indicating the fact that a notification of "disapproval processing" from the cooking device 1 has been received. In addition, this error notification part occurs when it occurs due to the actual state of the heating cooker 1 side (temperature, peak cut conditions, etc.) as in the above-mentioned "permission condition 1", and when it occurs due to the communication of the network NW or wireless communication 330BT. In case of failure, both are shown.

In the above description, the communication terminal device 200 such as a smartphone performs wireless communication 330BT with the cooking appliance 1 using Bluetooth (registered trademark). As an alternative method, since the communication terminal device 200 has an NFC input/output unit 221 (see FIG. 55) for short-range wireless communication, the communication terminal device 200 may be brought into close proximity or into contact with an NFC input/output unit (not shown) on the cooking appliance 1 for input.

Summary of Embodiment 2.
As is clear from the above description, the second embodiment discloses the heating cooker 1 related to the fifth disclosure as follows.
That is, one form of the heating cooker 1 according to the fifth disclosure illustrated in the second embodiment is as follows:
A first heating means HM1 and a second heating means HM2,
Individual operation parts 15L and 15R dedicated to one heating means among the heating means,
a shared operation section 15M for the first heating means and the second heating means;
a communication unit 51 that wirelessly communicates with the outside;
Notification means 90;
a control device 40 that executes cooking using the recipe data CD acquired via the communication section 51;
The individual operation unit has first specific input keys 152L and 152R,
The shared operation unit 15M has a second specific input key 151KP,
The control device 40 includes:
(1) a notification step SP2 in which the notification means 90 specifies one of the first specific input key or the second specific input key;
(2) When the specific input keys (152L, 152R, 151KP) specified by the notification means 90 are operated, confirmation step SP3 of transmitting selection information (202A, 202B, 202D) specific to the specific input keys. and,
Execute sequentially,
The control device 40 uses a first part M1 that sets a cooking process 1 using the first heating means and the second heating means for recipe data CD necessary for executing one cooking menu. It has a function of obtaining the second part M2 for setting the cooking process 2 in two stages,
The control device 40 transmits the selection information (202A, 202B, 202D) in response to operating the specific input keys (152L, 152R, 151KP) specified in the notification step SP2;
This is a configuration characterized by the following.

With this configuration, the cooking device 1 can reliably acquire the external recipe data CD and use it for actual cooking.
That is, when the user US operates a specific input key to be operated that is suitable for acquiring the recipe data (cooking menu) of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 selected by the heating cooker 1, the heating cooking by the user US is performed. Since the process proceeds to the acquisition operation of the recipe data CD after the confirmation operation on the side of the device 1 (for example, whether or not the specific input key 151KP has been operated), it is possible to prevent operation errors by the user US and improve usability.
Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the recipe data CD of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 with a plurality of cooking processes includes the reception of the preview information 1 (201), the confirmation operation (transmission of the selection information A), and Since the information can be reliably acquired through multiple steps of receiving advance notice information 2 (201) and the confirmation operation (sending selection information B), the heating cooker 1 can handle a wide range of cooking using multiple cooking processes. However, it is expected that the operability will be improved.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 illustrated in this second embodiment has the following features:
The heating means HM1 to HM3 are heated using a plurality of input keys (154M, 155M, etc.), a plurality of specific input keys 152L, 152R, 151KP, a notification means 90, a communication section 51, and a recipe data CD acquired from the outside. and a control device 40 that controls and executes cooking,
The control device 40 includes:
(1) When acquiring the recipe data CD of a cooperative cooking mode in which cooking process 1 using one of the heating means and cooking process 2 using a plurality of heating means is obtained, the cooking process 1 and the cooking step 2 are obtained separately,
(1) a notification step SP2B of notifying the specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 151KP when the preview information 1 (201) corresponding to the cooking process 1 is received;
(2) After the notification step SP2B, it is determined whether the specific input keys 152L, 152R, 151KP have been operated, and when it is determined that the specific input keys have been operated, confirmation information A (201) is transmitted. Confirmation process SP3,
(3) when transmitting the confirmation information A (202), displaying information regarding reception of the recipe data CD on the display unit 16 of the notification means 90 (progress marks 16F, 174, see FIG. 73);
This is a configuration characterized by the following.

With this configuration, the cooking device 1 can reliably acquire the recipe data CD held in the external communication terminal 200 for each cooking process and use it for actual cooking.
In addition, the notification means 90 (display section 16) of the cooking device 1 can input a specific input key (for example, 151KP) for confirmation to be operated in advance according to the operation of the user US based on advance notice information from the communication terminal 200. 1 (201) and guides the user US to operate the confirmation step SP3, it is possible to prevent the user US from making operational mistakes and improve usability.

Furthermore, one form of the heating cooker 1 according to the second disclosure is configured such that after transmitting the confirmation information A (202) in the confirmation step SP3, the process moves to a reception step SP4 in preparation for receiving the recipe data CD. Met.
Therefore, as described in the second embodiment, by pressing the specific input key for confirmation (151KP), the user can directly proceed to the process of receiving the recipe data CD, which is convenient for the user US.

Furthermore, in this Embodiment 2, the following heating cooker 1 was disclosed.
That is, one form of the heating cooker 1 according to the second embodiment is as follows:
The notification means 90 includes a key specifying section 21 (light emitting sections 21M, 21L, 21R) for specifying the second specific input key 151KP and the first specific input keys 152L, 152R, respectively, and a cooking device using the recipe data CD. a condition display section 16 (liquid crystal display sections 16M, 16L, 16R) for displaying control conditions;
The control device 40 includes:
(1) After the communication establishment step SP1, the first specific input key 152L to be used (in the cooking step 1) is selected according to the advance notice information 1 (202) acquired from the communication section 51, and the key specifying section 21 emits light. (continuous lighting, blinking, etc.) notification step SP2B;
(2) sequentially executing a confirmation step SP3 of transmitting selection information A (202) after operating the input key (151KP) identified by the key identifying unit 21;
This is a configuration characterized by the following.

With this configuration, the cooking device 1 can reliably acquire the recipe data CD held in the external communication terminal 200 and use it for actual cooking.
Moreover, the notification means 90 (display section 16) of the heating cooker 1 uses the notification information 1 (201) from the communication terminal 200 to select the second specific input key 151KP to be operated in advance in accordance with the operation of the user US. This can be notified by the notification section 90 (the light emitting operation by the light emitting section 21M of the key specifying section 21). Therefore, the user US can be guided to perform the correct input operation on the shared operation unit 15M in the operation scene, thereby preventing the user US from making operational mistakes and improving usability.

Furthermore, in this Embodiment 2, similarly to the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure, the cooking device 1, after turning on the main power switch 20, during the initial standby period TP,
(1) Provide standby common information to user US.
(2) After the voice input mode is selected, the recipe data CD regarding the cooperative cooking mode KM1 (including the recipe data of the control menu of the complex cooking mode KM2 and the individual cooking mode KM3) can be received.
By controlling the timing of acquiring recipe data CD from the outside, it is possible to avoid inadvertently receiving recipe data CD of another cooking menu while selecting a cooking mode or setting control conditions.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the function setting input key 151KP also serves as the second specific input key. That is, since the central operation section 15M is also used to obtain the recipe data CD for cooking using the central operation section 15M, it is possible to avoid increasing the number of operation keys (operation sections) of the input operation section 15, thereby reducing operability by the user US. It is possible to prevent things that may lead to

In this second embodiment, similarly to the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment, the restriction section 55 stores new recipe data CD until the cooking process of the acquired recipe data CD is completed. It was a configuration characterized by restricting the acquisition.
That is, when one recipe data CD is selected with the second specific input key 151KP, a reception restriction period TZ1 is set, and the process of acquiring recipe data CD of another cooking menu cannot be started.

This prevents you from inadvertently receiving another cooking menu (including the control menu for complex cooking mode and the control menu for single cooking mode) during cooperative cooking, and prevents you from receiving a recipe data CD that has been stably received. Can execute cooking menu.

Furthermore, if the recipe data CD of another cooking menu is inadvertently received during the cooking process, the operation of the control device 40 may be hindered, and the user US may be misled or confused. It can be prevented. Therefore, usability for the user US is improved.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, when the operation shifts to acquiring the recipe data while the standby initial screen 16MH is being displayed, the receiving operation is performed as explained in FIGS. 72 and 73. The display screen automatically switches to a 16MM display.

Furthermore, since a plurality of progress marks 16F are displayed on the reception operation display screen 16MM according to the progress of the reception operation, the user US can easily understand that the operation is to acquire the recipe data CD. This has the effect of preventing unnecessary misunderstandings, incorrect operations, etc.

Note that in addition to or instead of displaying the progress mark 16F, the audio notification section 51 may provide audio notification. Further, the progress mark is not limited to one in which the shape and number change over time as shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, but may be in a form in which the display color changes, for example.

In addition to what has been described above, in this second embodiment, the same practical effects as those obtained in the first embodiment can be obtained with respect to the parts having the same configuration as in the first embodiment.

Embodiment 3.
FIG. 78 is a time chart showing, in chronological order, operations between the cooking device 1 and the communication terminal 200 used in the heating cooking system of the third embodiment. FIG. 79 is an enlarged plan view showing the operating states of the central display section 16M, the central operation section 15M, and the central heating status display section 17 of the cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 78. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the operation of the cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 78. FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) 200 shown in FIG. 78. FIG. 82 is a time chart showing the operation of the cooking device shown in FIG. 78 in chronological order. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the operation of the cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 78 in chronological order. Note that the same or corresponding parts as the configurations of Embodiments 1 and 2 described in FIGS. 1 to 77 are given the same reference numerals.

FIG. 78 will be explained.
In FIG. 78, steps SF1 to SF2 indicate the operation of communication terminal 200. Steps SF3 to SF9 indicate the operation of the cooking device 1.
The storage unit 220 of the communication terminal 200 or the cooking device database 217 includes identification information 167 corresponding to a cooking menu (for example, "hamburger steak") and correspondence for specifying a "specific input key" corresponding to each cooking menu. Information KID is stored.
In addition, among the recipe data CD, in the case of cooperative cooking mode KM1 having a plurality of cooking steps, the recipe data CD of the plurality of cooking steps constituting one cooking menu contains identification information of each cooking step (for example, cooking step (unique number).
Therefore, the first screen 216A showing the identification information of the cooking menu and the image display section 235 is displayed on the terminal side display section (terminal side display screen) 216 based on the preview information 1 (201). Note that this correspondence information KID is not necessarily necessary. This is because the specific input key that needs to be operated can be identified from the identification information of the cooking menu in the data held by the heating cooker 1 without transmitting this correspondence information KID.

In the communication terminal 200, when the cooking menu confirmation key (icon) 237 (see 237A in FIG. The preview information 1 (201) that has been generated is transmitted to the cooking device 400 (step SF2). That is, the data of the first portion M1 indicating the contents of the cooking process 1 is transmitted. Note that FIG. 78 shows that the information stored in the storage unit 220 or the cooking device database 217 includes cooking menu identification information, specific input key correspondence information KID, and cooking process identification information. ing.

The operation of the heating cooker 1 starts from the next step SF3.
Step SF3 is a stage in which preview information 1 (201) is received via the communication unit 51.
Step SF4 is a step for determining advance notice information 1 (201) for performing processing corresponding to the above-described "key identification step SP2A" (see FIG. 63).
In this determination step SF4, the identification information corresponding to the cooking menu (for example, "hamburger steak") and the correspondence information KID specifying the specific input key corresponding to the cooking menu are stored in the database stored in the storage device 41. Compare with data. Thereby, it is determined that the information included in the transmitted advance notice information 1 (201) is correct information based on the information held in the cooking device 1, and the process proceeds to step SF5. In addition, in the heating cooker 1, the acquired preview information 1 is stored in the storage device 41 in order to be stored in association with subsequent reception of the recipe data CD.
Further, it is checked against operation history information stored in the storage device 41 to see if a specific input key to be operated has been operated.

Step SF5 is a processing step for performing processing corresponding to a part of the above-described "notification step SP2B" (see FIG. 63). In step SF5, in response to the determination result in step SF4, information specifying a specific input key (for example, 153M) is generated and displayed on the display section 16 (for example, central display section 16M) to be displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 78, the operation support information 175 indicates in text that the key is a specific input key 153M. In addition, the light emitting unit 21M blinks to display

The next step SF6 is a processing step for performing processing corresponding to a part of the above-described "notification step SP2B" (see FIG. 63).
Step SF6 is a stage in which the user US presses the specific input key (for example, 153M) displayed in step SF5. This operation is detected by the input operation section 15. For example, when the input key 153M is operated on the central operation unit 15M, as explained in the first embodiment (FIG. 11), the input key identification unit 15A and the input signal analysis unit 52 generate an input corresponding to the input key 153M. It is determined that the signal has been given to the control device 40 (input processing section 70) (step SF7).

As described above, when a correct specific input key (for example, 153M) that should be input is operated, the limiting section 55 generates a signal for setting a reception limit period TZ1 for the recipe data CD.
As described in the first embodiment, the limiting unit 55 has a function of limiting acquisition of the recipe data CD. The limiting unit 55 has a function of limiting acquisition of the advance notice information (201) of another cooking menu from the point in time when the data acquiring unit 53 acquires the advance notice information 1 (201) (of cooking process 1) via the communication unit 51 and operates a specific input key (e.g., 153M) as a response signal during a standby period before starting cooking in various cooking modes (including the cooperative cooking mode KM1) (i.e., before "cooking process 1").

That is, when the specific input key is operated in step SF6, even if another advance notice information (201) is transmitted thereafter, it will not be treated as a regular signal. However, if, for example, the input key (for cancellation) 152M of the central operation unit 15M is pressed on the heating cooker 1 side immediately after step SF6, all steps from step SF3 to step SF7 will be canceled. , after that, it is possible to transmit new preview information 1 (201) from the communication terminal 200. Moreover, once the (final) cooking process of one cooking menu is completed, preview information 1 (201) for a new recipe data CD can be acquired from the communication section 51. In addition, as another modification, when the (first) cooking process 1 of the cooking menu is started, it is possible to obtain preview information 1 (201) for a new recipe data CD from the communication section 51. You can also do it.

In the next step SF8, when a specific input key (for example, 153M) is operated in step SF6, the display unit 16 corresponding to the input operation unit 15 having the specific input key indicates that the operation of the specific input key has been received. Display. For example, as shown in FIG. 79, the operation support information 175A displays in text that the operation of the specific input key 153M has been accepted.
In the next step SF9, specific input key selection information A (202) is transmitted to the communication terminal 200. This step corresponds to the above-described "confirmation step SP3" (see FIG. 63).
Note that, as shown in FIG. 78, counting of the elapsed time of the time limit TX starts from the step SF4, which will be explained with reference to FIG. 80.

Next, FIG. 79 will be explained.
FIG. 79 is an enlarged plan view showing the operating states of the central display section 16M, the central operation section 15M, and the central heating status display section 17M of the cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 78.
This FIG. 79 is an example where the specific input key is 153M. The fact that the specific input key 153M needs to be operated is displayed on the central display section 16M corresponding to the central operation section 15M.
FIG. 79 shows a stage before starting cooking process 1 in cooperative cooking mode KM1.
Immediately after receiving preview information 1 (201), the necessity of operating a specific input key is displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 78, the operation support information 175 is displayed in characters such as "Please press the flashing reception key." Note that the audio notification unit 50 may also be used to provide audio notification.

In synchronization with the display of the operation support information 175, as shown in FIG. 79, the light emitting section 21M corresponding to the specific input key 153M goes into a blinking state, emphasizing the presence of the specific input key 153M with light.

After this, when the user US presses the specific input key 153M, the central display section 15M starts displaying operation support information 175A such as "Reception command accepted" as shown in white text. . Note that in addition to or in place of such a display, the audio notification section 50 may start the notification.
Through these displays and audio notifications, the user US can visually confirm after the fact that he has reliably executed the operation of transmitting the selection information 202 by operating the specific input key 153M.

Next, FIG. 80 will be explained.
FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the operation of the cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 78.
This FIG. 80 corresponds to FIG. 38 of the first embodiment, but unlike FIG. 38, a step of determining whether or not a specific input key is operated is added, so this difference will be mainly described below.
Step SL20 is a stage in which preview information 1 (201) is received during connection with the outside (communication terminal 200). That is, this is the stage where the advance notice information 1 (201) for advance notice of provision of a recipe data CD for a specific cooking is transmitted from the communication terminal 200 which has been registered and set in advance. As for the contents of advance notice information 1 (201), determination is started as explained in step SF4 of FIG. 78.
The control device 40 starts measuring the elapsed time from this point.

The next step SL21 is a process of determining whether the user US has operated a specific input key (for example, 153M). If the specific input key is operated, this step SL21 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to step SL22.
In step SL22, it is determined whether or not the target recipe data CD has been received from the communication terminal 200. If it has been received, step SL22 becomes "Yes" and the step of acquiring the recipe data CD is completed.

In step SL21, if the specific input key (for example, 153M) is not operated, the process proceeds to step SL23. In step SL23, it is determined whether a preset time limit TX has been exceeded. If the time limit TX has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SL21. However, if the time limit TX has been exceeded, the process advances to step SL24. Step SL24 is "automatic shutoff processing 3" for automatically shutting off the main power supply, similar to step SM6 described in Embodiment 1 (FIG. 33). Note that the time limit TX of this step SL23 is, for example, 10 minutes.

Further, even if the recipe data CD is not received in step SL22, the process proceeds to step SL23. In this step SL23, as described above, it is determined whether the time limit TX has been exceeded. If the time limit TX has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SL21. However, if the time limit TX has been exceeded, the process advances to step SL24. In other words, "automatic shutoff processing 3" is performed to automatically shut off the main power supply. Note that the time limit TX of this step SL23 is, for example, 10 minutes as described above, but if step SL23 is reached via step 22, a time other than the above-mentioned time (10 minutes) may be set. It's okay.

Next, FIG. 81 will be explained.
FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) 200 shown in FIG. 78.
Since FIG. 81 corresponds to FIG. 60 of the first embodiment, the explanation will focus on the points that are different from FIG. 60.
What is shown in FIG. 81(A) shows a state in which the user US has already found recipe information for one desired cooking menu and displayed it. 234 is a character display section indicating the type of display information on the first screen 216A. 237 is a confirmation key (icon) for selecting one cooking menu displayed on this first screen 216A.

When the user US touches the cooking menu confirmation key (icon) 237 (237A) on this first screen 216A, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 of the communication terminal 200 receives the input from the touch operation and sends a notification. The display on the first screen 216A is switched to the display on the second screen 216D as shown in FIG. 81(B) without transmitting information 1 (201).

The second screen 216D of this third embodiment is a pop-up screen that is automatically displayed immediately after touching the cooking menu confirmation key (icon) 237, and appears so as to overlap the first screen 216A. do.
Although the display area of this pop-up screen 216D is a little smaller than the display area of the first screen 216A, it is displayed so as to cover the image display section 235 and the cooking process information 236 shown in FIG. 81(A).

Next, FIG. 81(B) will be explained.
In FIG. 81(B), reference numeral 242 is an image diagram (schematic diagram) clearly showing the appearance of the cooking device 1. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 81(B), heating port marks (figures) 242L, 242C, and 242R indicating three heating ports 4L, 4C, and 4R are displayed. A heating chamber mark (figure) 242G indicating the heating chamber 6 is also displayed.

Among the heating port marks (figures) 242L, 242C, and 242R, the heating port marks (figures) 242L and 242R corresponding to the left heating port 4L and right heating port 4R are the heating port marks (figures) 242C of the central heating port 4C. Unlike, it is displayed in a red color. The reason why only the two heating ports 4L and 4R are emphasized is that in the future (using the recipe data CD), both of these two heating ports 4L and 4R can be used for cooking. This is to enable the user US to understand it intuitively.

243L is a left selection mark (icon) that, when touched by the user US, issues a signal to select the left heating port 4L. When this is touched, preview information 1 (201) sent from the communication terminal 200 includes information about using (selecting) the left heating port 4L. That is, the preview information 1 (201) includes correspondence information KID indicating that the input key 152L of the left operation section 15L is a "specific input key" to be operated, and can be provided to the cooking device 1. . In addition, when obtaining setting information B for cooking process 2, what is transmitted by touching 243L is preview information 2.

243R is a right selection mark (icon) that issues a signal to select the right heating port 4R. When this is touched, preview information 1 (201) sent from the communication terminal 200 includes information indicating that the right heating port 4R is to be used (selected). In other words, the preview information 1 (201) includes information (correspondence information KID) indicating that the input key 152R of the right operation section 15R is a "specific input key" to be operated, and the heating cooker 1 can be provided to

Even if the communication terminal 200 does not (cannot) immediately send the correspondence information KID, the cooking menu identification information and the cooking process identification information are sent all at once, so those identification information can be used to connect the right heating port 4R or The communication terminal 200 may generate advance notice information 1 (or notice information 2) including data indicating "left and right identification information" indicating the left heating port 4L. For example, in response to touching the left selection mark (icon) 243L, the central processing unit 212 or the remote control information generation unit 219 of the communication terminal 200 uses the cooking menu identification information and the "left and right identification information" as a basis. The preview information 1 (notice information 2) may be generated in this manner.

Since only one of the left selection mark (icon) 243L and right selection mark (icon) 243R can be selected, if the left selection mark (icon) 243L is touched for the first time in the state of FIG. 81(B), This means that the left heating port 4L has been selected, but if the right selection mark (icon) 243R is touched immediately after this, the selection of the left heating port 4L is canceled and the right heating port 4R is selected. become. Even if the order of operations is reversed, the same rule applies; only the latest selection operation is valid and is recognized by the central processing unit 212. Further, data indicating the selection operation results of the left and right heating ports 4L and 4R is stored in the storage unit 220 or the cooking device database 217.

246 is an operation guidance display section, and in FIG. 81(B), the words "Please select one" and the words "Left" and "Right" are displayed at positions adjacent to the left and right selection marks 243L and 243R. is displayed. When the left and right selection marks 243L and 243R are operated, the pop-up screen 216D automatically disappears after a few seconds (referred to as a "grace time") and returns to the original first screen 216A, or returns to the second screen. Proceed to 216B. However, if the pop-up screen 216D does not automatically appear and disappear as shown in FIG. 81(B), an input key (icon) 247 for screen deletion may be provided. Note that during the grace period, the left selection mark 243L and right selection mark 243R may be touched many times, and the information of the one touched last will be displayed as a confirmation signal when the grace period has elapsed. It is transmitted from communication terminal 200 as .

As is clear from the above explanation, when there are multiple heating units that can be executed in a specific cooking menu, that is, heating ports 4L and 4R, select the cooking menu on the communication terminal 200 and press the input key (selection key). If 237 is pressed (FIG. 81(A)), the preview information 1 (201) is not transmitted as is. That is, in the communication terminal 200, the central processing unit 212 knows that cooking can be done using either the left or right heating ports 4L or 4R in the cooking menu, so the user US is asked to select the heating ports 4L or 4R, One of the features is that the results are transmitted to the cooking device 1 by operating the left and right selection marks 243L and 243R shown in FIG. 81(B).

Next, we will explain Figure 82.
FIG. 82 is a time chart showing the operation of the cooking device shown in FIG. 78 in chronological order.
TM1 to TM8 indicate timings.
As is clear from Figure 82, in the heating cooker 1 of this embodiment 3, the coordinated cooking mode KM1 is an operating pattern having the cooking process 1 in which heating and cooking is performed at a first location (above the top plate 3) by the first heating means HM1, the cooking process 2 in which heating and cooking is performed at a second location (inside the heating chamber 6) by the second heating means HM2, and a heating pause process (heating pause period P3) between the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2.

Furthermore, when the cooking process 1 is started using the data of the first portion M1, the control device 40 prepares for acquiring the data of the second portion M2 during the cooking process 1. When the notification means 90 makes a notification (TM4) and one of the first specific input keys 152L, 152R or the second specific input key 153M is operated during the heating pause period P3, the data of the second portion M2 is One of the features is that the configuration is such that the acquisition process can be started.

FIG. 82 will now be described in detail.
82 , "Acquisition notification 1", "Progress notification 1", "Progress notification 2", and "Acquisition notification 2" are operations performed by the display unit 16 of the notification means 90. Also, "Progress notification 1 to communication terminal" and "Progress notification 2 to communication terminal" are notifications made by the control device 40 to the outside (communication terminal 200) via the communication unit 51.

FIG. 82 shows a case where the recipe data CD of the cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is acquired from the communication terminal 200 and heated and cooked.
"Acquisition notification 1" at the timing of TM1 is to notify that the first portion M1 including the setting information of cooking process 1 has been acquired.
When the user US starts the cooking operation (TM2), the cooking process 1 is started. In FIG. 82, cooking step 1 is performed by first heating means HM1.

When the time elapsed from the time TM2 exceeds a predetermined time, "progress notification 1" is automatically performed. For example, a notification such as "5 minutes have passed since the start of heating" is given.
Furthermore, when the elapsed time A from the point in time TM2 exceeds a predetermined time, a "progress notification 2" is automatically performed. For example, a notification such as "Cooking process 1 will soon be completed" is given. The "progress notification" may be performed by detecting the elapsed time from the point in time when the temperature of the heated object has reached a target temperature (e.g., 180°C).

The “progress notification 2” is also sent to the communication terminal 200 via the communication unit 51 as the “progress notification 1 to communication terminal”.
In the "progress notification 2", the notification means 90 notifies that preparations are being made for acquiring the data of the second portion M2. Further, the voice notification unit 50 may alert the user by voice. This progress notification 2 is performed for the purpose of smoothly acquiring the data of the second portion M2 from the communication terminal 200 during the heating suspension period P3. In other words, the user US is prompted to prepare so that the cooking process 2 can be started immediately during the heating pause period P3.

The cooking process 1 ends at time TM5, but this end may be determined by the user US pressing the input key 153L or 153R (of the left and right operation units 15L, 15R). There is also a case where the cooking process 1 is automatically ended according to the length of time elapsed from the time point TM2 (timer cooking).

When the data of the second portion M2 is acquired during the heating suspension period P3, "acquisition notification 2" is performed at timing TM6. This acquisition notification 2 is to notify that the data of the second portion M2 including the setting information of the cooking process 2 has been acquired.
Then, cooking process 2 can be started at stage TM7. Thereafter, when the cooking process 2 is ended, the series of cooperative cooking modes KM1 ends at the stage TM8. Note that after this, the cooking step 3 may be performed again after the heating pause period P3. In that case, the data of the third portion M3 (not shown) related to the cooking process 3 may be acquired during the immediately preceding pause period P3.
In addition, at the stage of TM8, when all cooperative cooking modes KM1 are completed, "progress notification 2 to communication terminal" is performed, and even if the communication terminal 200 is located at a remote location, the completion of cooking can be known on the communication terminal 200. .

Next, FIG. 83 will be explained.
FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the operation of the cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 78 in chronological order. The operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 will be explained in more detail with reference to FIG. The operation of the control device 40 in the range from the start of the cooking process 1 to the heating pause process is shown.

In the heating cooking device 1 of the third embodiment, during standby before starting the cooking operation, the function setting key 151KP of the input operation unit 15 is operated to switch to the "function setting" mode, and the "external notification mode" is activated. Can be set to Therefore, as will be explained below, there is a convenient function even when the user is unable to stay in front of the cooking device 1 all the time and cook the food.

FIG. 82 shows an operation program when the "external notification mode" is set, among the basic operation programs from the start of the cooking process 1 to the heating pause period P3. This program is also stored in the storage device 41 of the control device 40.

When a command to start the cooking process 1 is received from the input operation unit 15, the "external notification mode" is activated (step SW1). Note that this external notification mode may be activated from the stage of acquiring the first portion M1 of the cooking process 1 from the communication terminal 200.
Cooking process 1 is started, and measurement of elapsed time (TN1, TN2) from the start of cooking process 1 is also started (step SW2). This step corresponds to step TM2 described in FIG. 82.

Further, the display section 16 displays the start of the cooking process 1, and the audio notification section 50 also notifies the start of cooking (step SW2). Furthermore, since the mode is the "external notification mode", information indicating the start of the cooking process 1 is transmitted from the communication unit 51 to the outside (step SW3).

Here, since the communication terminal 200 is registered in advance as an external notification destination of the cooking device 1, the information on the start of operation of the cooking device 1 is received via the cloud server 300. Further, when the communication terminal 200 is near the cooking device 1 (for example, inside the same kitchen), the start information of the cooking process 1 is transmitted from the cooking device 1 to the communication terminal 200 by wireless communication 330BT.

Thereafter, the presence or absence of abnormal operation during cooking process 1 is checked (step SW3), and a check is then made to see if the elapsed time TN1 has been exceeded (step SW6).
These steps SW4 and SW5 are repeated at short intervals, and if an abnormality is detected, the notification means 90 notifies the user of the abnormality (step SW6). As part of the "external notification mode" processing, the external cloud server 300 is also notified, and the communication terminal 200 is also notified of the occurrence of the abnormality.

If it is determined that the elapsed time TN1 has exceeded ("Yes" in step SW6), the process proceeds to step SW7, and notification of progress information 1 is performed on the display section 16 and the audio notification section 50 (step SW7). At the same time, progress information is transmitted to the outside. This progress information will also reach the external cloud server 300 and communication terminal 200.

In the next step SW8, it is determined whether the elapsed time TN2 has exceeded. If it is determined that the elapsed time TN2 has elapsed ("Yes" in step SW8), the process advances to step SW9. The notification in step SW9 is performed on the display section 16 and the audio notification section 50. At the same time, the display section 16 and the audio notification section 50 advise the outside to start preparations for acquiring recipe data for the second portion M2 related to the cooking process 2 portion. This step SW9 corresponds to step TM4 in FIG. 82.

It is determined in step SW10 whether a command to end the cooking process 1 has been received from the input operation section 15. This step corresponds to step TM5 in FIG. 82.
When it is determined that the cooking process 1 has ended ("Yes" in step SW10), the process proceeds to step SW11, and a notification that the cooking process 1 has ended is performed on the display section 16 and the audio notification section 50 (step SW11). . At the same time, information on the completion of cooking process 1 is transmitted to the outside. This termination information will also reach the external cloud server 300 and communication terminal 200. In the communication terminal 200, if the first screen 216A, second screen 216B, or third screen (see FIG. 77) is displayed, a pop-up screen (see FIG. 77) indicating the end of cooking process 1 is displayed on those screens. The latest information may be added and displayed using a method such as (see 81).

In step SW11, for example, on the central display section 16M, notification is made that the cooking process 1 has been completed and that the user provides the cooking process 2 data to the cooking device 1.

When the user US uses the input key 237B to transmit the data of the second portion M2 for executing the cooking process 2 on the first screen 216A of the communication terminal 200, the preview information 2 (201) regarding the cooking process 2 is heated. It reaches cooking device 1 (step SW12).
Then, in step SW13, the content of the preview information 2 is analyzed, and in the next step SW13, a specific input key to be inputted is extracted from the recipe data storage section 42 and displayed on the display section 16.

As can be seen from FIG. 83, from step SW10 is a heating suspension period P3 in which the heating operation is suspended, and the user takes the food to be cooked out of the heating chamber 6 and opens the left heating port 4L and right heating port 4R. You can transfer it to an object to be heated (such as a pot) prepared above. Conversely, in the case of another cooking menu, it is necessary to move the food to be cooked into the heating chamber 6 from either one of the left and right heating ports 4L and 4R. The length of this heating pause period P3 can be freely determined by the user until the user issues a command to start cooking (cooking process 2) (however, a long pause of 30 minutes or more, for example, will result in an error). (Cooperative cooking mode will be canceled automatically).

Therefore, by using this heating suspension period P3, the user can check the quality of the cooking in the cooking process 1, and also consider acquisition of the recipe data CD for the cooking process 2, control conditions for the cooking process 2, and the like. If necessary, at this point, the user can check the food stored in the refrigerator 331 (see FIG. 67) and ask the resident's opinion.

For example, when the user presses the input key 151M after step SW13 (if cooking process 2 is performed in heating chamber 6), heating pause period P3 ends immediately and cooking process 2 starts.

Summary of Embodiment 3.
As is clear from the above description, the third embodiment discloses the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure as follows.
That is, one form of the heating cooker 1 according to the first disclosure is as follows:
Input operation section 15;
A first heating means HM1 and a second heating means HM2,
a communication unit 51 that wirelessly communicates with the outside;
Notification means 90;
a control device 40 that executes cooking using the recipe data CD acquired via the communication section 51;
The control device 40 controls, for the recipe data CD, a first part M1 that sets a cooking process 1 using one of the heating means, and a second part M2 that sets a cooking process 2 that uses the other heating means. and separately,
The control device 40 includes:
(1) a communication establishment step SP1 for establishing a communication state with a specific communication terminal 200;
(2) After the communication establishment step SP1, a notification step 1 (SP2A) in which the notification means 90 makes a specific notification A of the input operation section (regarding the necessity of operation, the existence of a specific input key to be operated, etc.) and,
(3) After the notification step 1 (SP2A), depending on the advance notice information 2 (201) regarding the second portion M2 acquired from the communication unit 51, the input operation unit (necessity of operation and its operation target) a notification step 2 (SP2B) in which the notification means 90 makes a specific notification B (related to the existence of a specific input key, etc.);
(4) a confirmation step 1 (SP3A) of transmitting selection information (202) when the specific input key notified in the notification step 1 is inputted;
(5) a confirmation step 2 (SP3B) of transmitting selection information 2 when the specific input key notified in the notification step 2 is inputted;
to carry out,
This is a configuration characterized by the following.

With this configuration, the cooking device 1 can reliably acquire the external recipe data CD and use it for actual cooking.
That is, on the side of the heating cooker 1, it is possible to know the specific input key to be operated, and by inputting the key, it is possible to proceed to the "confirmation operation" for acquiring the recipe data CD. Therefore, it is possible to prevent operational errors by the user US and to improve usability.
Furthermore, the recipe data CD for a cooking menu with multiple cooking steps is processed through reception of the notice information 1, notice information 2, etc. and the "confirmation operation" (sending of selection information A and selection information B) for each cooking step. , can be reliably obtained, so it can be expected that the operability of the heating cooker 1, which can handle a wide range of cooking by using a plurality of cooking processes, will be improved.

The control device 40 of the heating cooker 1 according to the first disclosure had the following configuration in this third embodiment.
That is, the control device 40 of the heating cooker 1,
(1) When preview information 1 (201) regarding the cooking menu is obtained from the communication unit 51, a key identification step SP2A of extracting the one to be operated from among the specific input keys 153M, 152L, and 152R based on the correspondence information KID (See step SF4 in FIG. 78) and
(2) a notification step SP2B (see step SF5 in FIG. 78) in which the notification means 90 notifies information that can identify the specific input key extracted in the key identification step SP2A;
(3) determining whether the specific input keys 153M, 152L, 152R notified by the notification means 90 have been operated (see step SF7 in FIG. 78);
(4) If it is determined that the specific input keys 153M, 152L, 152R notified by the notification means 90 have been operated, a confirmation step SP3 of transmitting selection information A (202) (see step SF9 in FIG. 78) The configuration was such that the following steps were executed sequentially.

With this configuration, as described above, the specific input keys to be operated in advance can be accurately displayed on the display unit 16 in response to the operation by the user US. Since the user US is guided to perform an operation for a specific input key in the confirmation step SP3, it is possible to prevent the user US from making a mistake in the operation and to improve usability.

Furthermore, in the heating cooking system of this third embodiment, the communication terminal 200:
(1) In response to the input from the user US, one cooking menu corresponding to a specific recipe data CD is selected from the range of the first menu information and the second menu information, and 216A) (see step SF1 in FIG. 78 and FIG. 81(A)),
(2) When the cooking menu displayed on the first screen 216A is confirmed, a second screen 216D (pop-up screen) is displayed (see (B) in FIG. 81);
(3) The second screen 216D has a left heating port 4L that can be used with the first specific input key 152L that corresponds to the first menu information or the second menu information displayed on the second screen 216D. , or input keys 243L and 243R that can select any one of the right heating ports 4R that can be used with the first specific input key 152R (also serving as a selection mark), and a touch operation of these input keys 243L and 243L is requested. and an operation guidance display section 246, respectively.
(3) When a transmission command is received at the time when the touch input operation of the input keys 243L and 243R is completed, the specific recipe data CD related to the cooking menu displayed on the first screen 216A is heated and cooked. transmitting to device 1,
The structure was characterized by the following.

With this configuration, the cooking device 1 can reliably acquire the recipe data CD held in the external communication terminal 200 and use it for actual cooking.
Moreover, the notification means 90 (display section 16) of the cooking device 1 selects specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 153M of the input operation section 15 to be operated in advance in accordance with the operation of the user US. It can be presented according to the data (correspondence information KID). Therefore, in the case of a cooking menu in which there is one cooking process, notification is made by advance notice information 1 (201) from the communication terminal 200, and the operation of the confirmation process SP3 by the user US can be guided to the correct input operation unit 15.

In addition, when there are multiple cooking processes as in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the specific input keys that should be operated for confirmation by the user US are activated each time based on advance notice information 1 and advance notice information 2 (201) from the communication terminal 200. The notification can be made by the notification means 90 such as the display section 16 of the cooking device 1.

Furthermore, corresponding to the display unit 16 of the cooking device 1, the second screen (pop-up screen 216D) of the communication terminal 200 displays the left heating port 4L or the first specific input corresponding to the first specific input key 152L. A configuration that displays input keys 243L and 243R that also serve as selection marks for selecting one of the right heating ports 4R corresponding to the key 152R, and an operation guidance display section 246 that requests a touch operation of the selection marks 243L and 243L. It is.
With these configurations, it is possible to prevent the user US from erroneously operating both the cooking device 1 and the communication terminal 200, and to improve the usability.

Furthermore, in Embodiment 3, as particularly explained with reference to FIG. 81(B),
In the heating cooker 1, at least one of the heating means HM1 to HM3 is configured to be able to perform heating operations independently of each other at the plurality of heating ports 4L and 4R,
On the other hand, in the communication terminal 200, the second screen 216B (pop-up screen 216D) displays input keys 243L and 243R (which also serve as selection marks) for selecting any one of the plurality of heating ports 4L and 4R. The configuration was as follows.

Furthermore, the second screen (pop-up screen 216D) is configured to simultaneously display an operation guidance display section 246 that requests a touch operation of the input keys 243L, 243L. Thereby, before transmitting the recipe data CD, the cooking device 1 can know which heating port the user intends to use.
That is, by touch operation of the input keys 243L and 243L, data indicating whether the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L is used is included in the advance notice information 1 and the notice information 2, and the corresponding information KID is used to select the heating cooker. Provided to 1. Thereby, the corresponding specific input key is identified on the cooking device 1 and displayed on the display section 16.
With these configurations, it is possible to prevent the user US from erroneously operating both the cooking device 1 and the communication terminal 200, and to improve the usability.

In addition to what has been described above, in this third embodiment, the same practical effects as those obtained in the first to second embodiments can be obtained with respect to the parts having the same configuration as those in the first to second embodiments.

Other embodiments.
In order to explain each circuit, part, and component of the device that constitutes the heating cooker 1, 400 and the communication terminal 200, data such as recipe data CD1, recipe data CD2, selection information A, selection information B, etc. Although the description has been given by attaching codes (1, 2, A, B) to the data and information, the two may be substantially the same data. For example, one recipe data (e.g., hamburger recipe data CD) that is held from the beginning in the cooking device 1, 400, and recipe data (e.g., hamburger recipe data) acquired from the outside via the communication unit 51, 426. data CD) may have the same content.

Furthermore, the communication terminal 200 such as a smartphone or a tablet terminal (small portable personal computer) does not necessarily need to provide recipe data acquired from the cloud server 300 to the cooking device 1 or 400, and the communication terminal 200 itself The recipe data may be generated and retained. Further, it is not necessary that the communication terminal 200 and the heating cooker 1, 400 always communicate the preview information 201 and the selection information 202 through direct communication, but instead communicate wirelessly via a relay device or other access point. It's okay. Therefore, for example, even when it is written that "selection information for the transmission source of the recipe data is transmitted", it is not intended that the transmission source is limited to only the communication terminal 200.

In addition, in the complex cooking mode KM2, when the complex cooking mode KM2 is selected, a control menu (for example, a heating operation pattern called "defrosting") is basically selected, and a recipe data CD assuming a specific cooking item is selected. It wasn't something I would do. However, if the user US uses the cloud server 300 to select a recipe data CD for one food item in the complex cooking mode KM2 that can be applied to the heating cooker 1, and uses the communication terminal 200 to select the recipe data CD for one item to be cooked, Alternatively, the heating cooker 1 may be made to acquire the information. This also applies to the independent cooking mode KM3.

In the above explanation, for the sake of simplifying the explanation, reference numerals have been attached to correspond to the component parts and signals, but the reference numbers should not be interpreted as indicating that the component parts and signals are different from each other. In some cases, different codes were used in the explanation, but these codes were added for convenience of explanation, and the difference in the codes alone means that the contents of data, components, and functions are different from each other. isn't it.

The circuits, parts, and components of the devices illustrated in the above embodiments 1 to 3 are conceptual in function and do not necessarily have to be physically configured as illustrated. Furthermore, the functions of each of the devices and circuits, particularly the control device 40, heating control unit 43, first heating means HM1, second heating means HM2, third heating means HM3, memory device 41, main control device 480, sub-control device 440, etc., can be distributed and integrated, and the specific form is not limited to that illustrated, and all or part of them can be functionally or physically distributed and integrated in any unit depending on the function, operating status, etc.

Each function of the control device 40 and the heating control section 43 is realized by a processing circuit. The processing circuit that implements each function may be dedicated hardware or may be a processor that executes a program stored in memory. The same applies to the main control device 480 and the sub control device 440.

When the processing circuit is a processor, each function of the control device 40 and the heating control section 43 is realized by software, firmware, or a combination of software and firmware. Software and firmware are written as programs and stored in the storage device 41, which is a memory. The processor realizes each function of the control device 40 and the heating control section 43 by reading and executing a program stored in the storage device 41. This also applies to the main controller 480 and the sub controller 440.

These programs cause the microcomputer to execute the control procedures of the control device 40 and the heating control unit 43. The storage device 41 is typically a non-volatile or volatile semiconductor memory such as RAM, ROM, flash memory, EPROM, EEPROM, etc.

Furthermore, some of the data and programs in the recipe data storage section 41 shown in FIG. 10 may not be held in the cooking device 1 but may be held in an external recording medium (such as a storage server). In this case, the cooking device 1 acquires necessary data and program information by accessing an external recording medium (storage server).

Furthermore, the operation programs of the control device 40, the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the third heating means HM3 may be changed according to the wishes of the user US or the manufacturer of the cooking device 1. It may also be possible to update it to a modified or improved version as appropriate. In this case, for example, the modified/improved program may be obtained through the communication unit 51.

One heating section (IH coils 9L, 9M, 9R) of the first heating means HM1 that heats and cooks on the top plate 3 may be replaced with a gas combustion burner. In this case, the gas flow valve is controlled by the control section.
Further, part or all of the second heating means HM2 or the third heating means HM3 may be replaced with a gas combustion burner or an induction heating source.

In Embodiments 1 to 3, the input operation unit 15 was mainly described as a “contact input” in which the user US touches an input key to issue an input command, and a press (push button) type operation unit. It may also be a "non-contact input" operation unit that detects and inputs the finger or hand movements of the user US without contact.

Furthermore, the input operation unit 15 may be changed to a voice input method in which the user US's voice is recognized and input. In the case of the voice input method, the microphone and voice receiving section for receiving the voice of the user US and converting it into a voice recognition signal correspond to the input operation section.
Alternatively, a mechanical switch such as a contact type or a pressure type may be used in combination with the voice input method.

Furthermore, the input operation unit 15 of the first to third embodiments may give commands to the cooking device 1 via an input terminal device equipped with a voice input function, such as a smart speaker or an AI speaker.

In the first embodiment, the nutritional component data DD is displayed in the center display section 16M. 16L, right firepower display section 17R).
In addition, although it was explained in the first embodiment that the standby initial screen is displayed on the central display section 16M, as in the second embodiment, if there is another display section, it is displayed on that display section. It's okay. For example, the standby initial screen 16MH may be displayed on the right display section 16R for the right heating port 4R immediately after the input key 153R is operated. This can also be applied to the left display section 16L.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment (FIG. 24), two types of main food components and nutritional components are displayed on the food component display screen 16M1A and the nutritional component display screen 16M1B. may be displayed all at once (on one screen).

Further, the nutritional components and food components to be displayed may be limited to only specific nutritional components by the user US pressing the function setting key 151KP to enter the function setting mode. Furthermore, the input key 180 may be pressed to switch to voice input mode 2 and input by voice to narrow down the range to only specific nutritional components or food components.

Furthermore, at the stage when all the heating cooking steps are completed or during the heating pause periods P3 and P5 of the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the food ingredient display screen 16M1A and the nutritional ingredient display screen 16M1B are automatically changed according to a command from the user US. Either or both may be displayed.

The smart speaker and AI speaker exchange information wirelessly at any time with a support server in a network environment that is equipped with a voice translation function and a search function, such as the cloud server 300. The voice (natural language) uttered by the user US near the cooking device 1 is acquired as a voice signal, and the support server converts it into a command signal from the user US, and finally generates a command signal for the cooking device 1. be able to. Therefore, even if the user US is in the vicinity of the heating cooker 1, the frequency of directly touching the input operation section 15 is limited because both hands are occupied while preparing for cooking or processing ingredients. It is also convenient because the heating cooker 1 can be operated using natural utterances (voices).

In the first to third embodiments, the input operation unit 15 is the means for selecting various control menus, control conditions, etc. displayed on the first specific screen 16M1, the second specific screen 16M2, and the third specific screen 16M3. , it may be provided as a touch input key in the display screens of the central display section 16M and the left and right display sections 16L and 16R, which are display means.

For example, in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent No. 5833699, which proposes complex cooking, a display screen for complex cooking is displayed, the name of the complex cooking menu is displayed on the display screen, and the menu selection section is selected by the user. A technology has been proposed in which menus can be selected by touching the screen directly with one's finger.

Therefore, menus for cooking that are possible in the complex cooking mode KM2 and cooperative cooking mode KM1, the name of the food to be cooked (a type of identification information), etc. are displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 and the second specific screen 16M2. The user US may directly touch the display area (also referred to as the "icon" area) with his or her finger to select the cooperative cooking mode menu or the like.

In the first embodiment, the communication unit 51 receives command signals, recipe data CD, etc. transmitted from the outside of the cooking device 1, and also transmits each operation signal and command signal from the cooking device 1 to the outside. Although the information is transmitted (operating status data OS), information indicating progress such as the start and end of cooking process 1 and cooking process 2 may be transmitted each time. With this configuration, the user US can know the progress information (operating state data OS) via the communication terminal 200 or the like, improving convenience.

In addition to the heating cooker 1, a home gateway having a function of receiving data on the inventory search results of the refrigerator 331 is arranged as an information management device, and between the heating cooker 1 and the refrigerator 331, It may also be possible to connect via a wireless communication means (LAN) or a wide area network such as the Internet, so that the heating cooker 1 side can acquire the inventory information of the refrigerator 331 and use it for cooking.

Furthermore, the cooking appliance database 217 and the remote operation information generating unit 219 are not necessarily required as components of the communication terminal 200 such as a smartphone. For example, functions equivalent to the cooking appliance database 217 and the remote operation information generating unit 219 may be provided in, for example, the first server 321 or the second server 322, and each time the communication terminal 200 receives an input (including voice input), it may transmit the input to the cloud server 300 such as the first server 321, and obtain the necessary response information from the cloud server 300.

The cooking device 1 used to receive the recipe data CD and other data from the information processing terminal 200, the first server 321, etc. directly or via a wireless router, but the cooking device 1 receives the recipe data CD and other data from the information processing terminal 200, the first server 321, etc. directly or via a wireless router. , the heating cooker 1, 400 may receive the information. For example, a remote control for other home appliances (for example, a water heater) installed in the kitchen may be used as a relay device. Such remote controls are conveniently connected to a power source at all times. In this case, the relay device may have a built-in storage device (flash memory, etc.) that temporarily stores various data including commands sent from the information processing terminal 200, the first server 321, etc. desirable. The configuration is such that various data transmitted from the heating cooker 1, 400 are temporarily stored in the storage device (flash memory, etc.).

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 of the communication terminal 200 stores correspondence information KID that can identify a specific input key (for example, 153M) corresponding to the determined cooking menu in the storage unit 220 or the heating Although the notification information (201) was generated by reading from the cooking appliance database 217, the communication terminal 200 does not need to have such correspondence information KID.
That is, if the heating cooker 1 (400) side has the corresponding information KID in the storage device 41, storage means 440R, 480R, etc., the cooking identification information included in the received preview information (201) The specific input key (for example, 153M) to be operated can be determined on the heating cooker 1 (400) side by comparing with the above.

The embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The substantial scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims are included.

The heating cooker and heating cooking system according to the present disclosure can be widely used not only in kitchens of ordinary homes but also in cooking areas of public facilities, stores, and the like.

1 Cooking device 2 Main unit 3 Top plate 4 Heating port 4L Left heating port 4C Center heating port 4R Right heating port 5 Exhaust port cover 6 Heating chamber 7 Door 8 Handle 9 IH coil 9C Center IH coil 9L Left IH coil 9R Right IH coil 10 Open/close detection section 11 Microwave oscillation section (magnetron)
12 Radiant heat heating means 12a Upper radiant heat heating means 12b Lower radiant heat heating means 13 Infrared sensor 14 Thermistor sensor 15 Input operation section 15L Left operation section 15M Center operation section 15R Right operation section 16 Display section 16F Progress mark 16L Left display section 16M Center display Section 16M1 1st specific screen 16M1A Food ingredient display screen 16M1B Nutritional ingredient display screen 16M2 2nd specific screen 16M3 3rd specific screen 16MA Information screen 16MH Common screen (initial screen during standby)
16MM Reception operation display screen 16R Right display section 17 Fire power display section 17L Left fire power display section 17M Central heating status display section 17R Right fire power display section 20 Main power switch 20A Main power switch operation button (key)
21 Light emitting section 21L Light emitting section 21M Light emitting section 21R Light emitting section 22 First display area 23 Second display area 24 Third display area 25A to 25C Display information 26 Light emission control section 27 Light emitting element (light emitting element group)
28 Fourth display area 29A to 29B Display section 29C to 29D Candidate display section 30 Temperature sensor group 30A Temperature sensor 31 Infrared transmitter 32 Bottom wall 33 Installation space 35 Infrared transmitter 40 Control device 41 Display data storage section 42 Recipe data storage section 43 Heating control unit 50 Audio notification unit 51 Communication unit (wireless communication module)
52 Input signal analysis section 53 Data acquisition section 54 Permission condition determination section 55 Restriction section 56 Audio signal reception section 57 Power supply circuit 58 Audio signal analysis section 59 Human detection sensor 60A Display text 60B Two-dimensional information (two-dimensional code)
60C Two-dimensional information explanatory text 60E Caution display 60H Recommended text 60N Common information during standby 60P Obtaining operation support information 70 Input processing section 90 Notification section 151L to 155L Input key 151M to 159M Input key 151R to 155R Input key 160 Control menu identification information 161 Control menu identification information 162 Control menu identification information 164 Reference information 165 Additional information 166 Additional information 167 Identification information 168 Identification information 169 Identification information 170 Operation support information 171L Heating section identification section 171R Heating section identification section 172 Process information 173 External recipe identification section 174 Reception operation display section 174A Reception support information 174F Disallowance display 174S Reception operation start information 175 Operation support information 175A Operation support information 176 Operation support information 176A Operation support information 177 Reception start information 179 Auxiliary information 179D Display information (voice input mode)
180 Input key (voice input only mode selection section)
190 Icon 200 Communication terminal (smartphone) (information processing terminal)
201 Notification information A
202 Selection information A (confirmation information A)
203 Preparation information A (preparation signal A)
210 Transmitting unit/receiving unit 211 Communication control unit 212 Central processing unit (CPU)
213 ROM/RAM
214 Speaker 215 Touch operation section 216 Terminal side display section (terminal side display screen)
216A 1st screen 216B 2nd screen 216C 3rd screen 216D Pop-up screen (2nd screen)
217 Heating cooker database 218 Posture detection unit 219 Remote control information generation unit 220 Storage unit 221 NFC input/output unit 222 Audio input unit 223 Notification data 224 Remote control data 225 Display operation unit 226 Food component/nutrient component data 230 Recipe data Acquisition unit 231 Recipe data transmission unit 232 Terminal side recipe selection unit 233 Food component data acquisition unit 234 Character display unit 235 Image display unit 236 Cooking process information 237 Confirmation key (icon)
238 Input key (icon)
239 Character display section 240 Input key (for sending)
241 Input key for cancellation 242 Image diagram (schematic diagram)
242C Center heating port mark 242G Heating chamber mark 242L Left heating port mark 242R Right center heating port mark 243L Left selection mark 243R Right selection mark 244A to 244C Display section 245 Identification information (cooking menu name) display section 246 Operation guidance display section 247 Screen Input key for deletion 248 Recommended information 249 Elapsed time information 300 Cloud server 301 Recipe data providing server 302 Recipe database 310 Light emitting element for microwave (LED)
311 Light emitting element (LED) for grill
312 Oven light emitting device (LED)
313 Central IH light emitting element (LED)
314 High temperature caution light emitting element (LED) group 314a Heating chamber high temperature caution light emitting element (LED)
314b IH high temperature caution light emitting element (LED)
321 First server 321A Input/output section (input/output interface section)
321C Control unit 321P Food component database 321R Storage unit 322 Second server 322A Input/output unit (input/output interface unit)
322C Control unit 322R Storage unit 326 Food component information server 330BT Wireless communication 330WF Wireless communication 331 Refrigerator 332 Menu screen display unit (icon)
333 Input key (icon)
340 Wireless router (access point)
507A Auxiliary information display section A
507B Auxiliary information display section B
525 Transmission information display section 543 Error notification section CD Recipe data CD1 to CD2 Recipe data DD Food composition information NW Network OS Operating status data TB Acquisition period TB1 Recipe data acquisition period TB2 Cancellation period of acquired recipe data TB3 Acquired Recipe data changeable period TX First time limit (first limit period)
TZ1 Recipe data reception restriction period US users.

Claims (58)

An input operation unit;
A heating means;
A communication unit that wirelessly communicates with an external device;
A notification means;
a control device that executes cooking using recipe data acquired from an external source via the communication unit;
The control device acquires the recipe data in two stages, a first part for setting a cooking process 1 by the heating means and a second part for setting a cooking process 2 by the heating means,
The control device includes:
(1) a notification step 1 in which a specific notification A that identifies the input operation unit related to the first part is performed by the notification means;
(2) after the notification step 1, a notification step 2 in which a specific notification B is performed by the notification means to identify the input operation unit related to the second part;
(3) a confirmation step 1 of transmitting selection information A when the input operation unit notified by the specific notification A is operated;
(4) a confirmation step 2 of transmitting selection information B when the input operation unit notified in the notification step 2 is operated;
To carry out
A heating cooker characterized by the above. The input operation section has a plurality of specific input keys,
The cooking device according to claim 1, wherein the specific notification A and the specific notification B are visual information or audio information that specifies at least one of the specific input keys. The cooking device according to claim 1, characterized in that the specific notification A and the specific notification B are performed when the control device acquires the advance notice information 1 or the advance notice information 2 via the communication unit. The heating means includes a first heating means and a second heating means,
According to any one of claims 1 to 3, the input operation unit is provided for controlling the first heating means and for controlling the second heating means, respectively. heating cooker. The input operation section has a plurality of specific input keys,
The heating cooking device according to claim 1, wherein the specific notification A and the specific notification B are to cause a key identification part to emit light in order to identify the specific input key. The cooking device according to claim 5, wherein the control device transmits the selection information A or the selection information B after the specific input key specified by the key identification unit is operated. . 3. The control device according to claim 2, wherein when the specific input key is operated and the recipe data is successfully acquired, the control device notifies the information indicating the acquisition of the recipe data by the notification means. heating cooker. The cooking device according to claim 2, characterized in that, when the recipe data cannot be acquired after the specific input key is operated, the control device notifies at least one of a non-reception display indicating a non-acquired state and reception support information indicating a cause or a countermeasure by the notification means. The specific input key has a function of selecting a voice input mode,
3. The cooking device according to claim 2, wherein the control device is in a voice input mode and enters a standby state in which it receives an instruction to acquire the recipe data by the specific input key, and is ready to accept an input from outside. The cooking device according to claim 9, characterized in that, when the recipe data is acquired, the control device notifies the identification information of the recipe data and information indicating the setting status of the voice input mode by the notification means. When the control device receives the command to acquire the recipe data, it determines whether permission conditions are satisfied, and if the permission conditions are not satisfied, the control device does not acquire the recipe data. The heating cooker according to claim 1 or 2. The control device displays a standby initial screen on the notification means after the main power switch is turned on;
The cooking device according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein common information during standby is displayed on the initial screen during standby. further comprising a first input key for selecting a cooperative cooking mode and a second input key for selecting a composite cooking mode,
The cooking device according to claim 2, wherein the first input key and the second input key also serve as the specific input key. The control device displays a standby initial screen on the notification means after the main power switch is turned on;
Displaying a first specific screen of the cooperative cooking mode or a second specific screen of the composite cooking mode in place of the standby initial screen by operating the first input key or operating the second input key; The heating cooker according to claim 13, characterized by: The control device starts a reception restriction period for the recipe data from the time when the specific input key is operated, and the reception restriction period is limited to the case where both the first portion M1 and the second portion M2 are acquired. 3. The heating cooking device according to claim 2, wherein the heating cooking operation ends when the heating cooking operation is started. 16. The control device limits acquisition of the recipe data to two times during the reception restriction period: the first portion M1 and the second portion M2. heating cooker. The heating means includes a first heating means and a second heating means,
The specific input key has a function of selecting at least one of a heating cooking mode, a cooking menu, a control pattern, and a heating port regarding the first heating means and the second heating means. The heating cooker according to claim 3. The heating means includes a first heating means and a second heating means,
The control device is characterized in that it has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are driven at a time difference to perform one cooking operation. The heating cooker according to claim 1. 2. The control device according to claim 1, wherein the control device displays information on at least one of food components and nutritional components regarding a cooking menu that is a target of the recipe data on a display section of the notification means. heating cooker. The specific input key is a touch type input key arranged on the input operation section,
The cooking device according to claim 2, wherein the input operation section determines whether or not it is necessary to switch the voice input mode based on the touch state of the specific input key, and issues a signal corresponding to the voice input mode. The input operation section includes a touch detection section that detects a touch operation on the specific input key, a time measurement section that measures a continuous time of the touch operation, and a threshold value of the voice input mode based on the measurement result of the time measurement section. an input mode determination unit that determines whether the input mode is satisfied;
The cooking device according to claim 20, wherein the voice input mode compatible signal is transmitted based on the determination result of the input mode determining section. on the display unit, in the voice input mode, at least one of information A indicating that the voice input mode is set and information B regarding a range of selectable control conditions is displayed;
The cooking device according to claim 21 , wherein the control device does not start a cooking operation when input of the control conditions is not completed. the specific input key is a touch-type input key,
a touch detection unit that detects a touch operation of the specific input key, a time measurement unit that measures a continuous time of the touch operation, and an input signal transmission unit that transmits time data measured by the time measurement unit to the control device,
3. The cooking device according to claim 2, wherein the control device further comprises an input signal analysis unit that determines whether a condition for a voice input mode is satisfied from the measured time data. further comprising a function setting key;
The control device transitions to a function setting mode when the function setting key is operated;
The cooking device according to claim 2, wherein the function setting key also serves as the specific input key. The specific input key has a function of setting a voice input mode according to an operation state, and the input operation unit has a start key for instructing the start of cooking and a stop key for instructing the end of cooking,
3. The cooking device according to claim 2, wherein when a command to start cooking is issued from the input operation unit by pressing the start key, the voice input mode is cancelled. 12. The cooking device according to claim 11, wherein the permission condition is at least one of the temperature of the heating chamber, the usage status of the heating means, or a peak cut setting value. Claim characterized in that, after transmitting the selection information 1 and the selection information 2, the control device further executes a reception standby step in preparation for reception of the first part and the second part. The heating cooker according to any one of 1 to 3. The heating device according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the control device includes a communication establishment step of establishing a communication state with a specific communication terminal 200 before the notification step 1. Cooking device. an input operation unit having a specific input key A and a specific input key B;
heating means;
a communication section that wirelessly communicates with the outside;
notification means,
a control device that executes cooking using recipe data acquired via the communication unit,
The control device acquires the recipe data in two stages: a first part that sets a cooking process 1 using the heating means, and a second part that sets a cooking process 2 that uses the heating means,
The control device includes:
(1) Proceeding to a step in which setting information A for the first portion can be acquired when the specific input key A is operated after the notification means notifies that the recipe data regarding the first portion can be acquired;
(2) Proceeding to a step in which setting information B for the second portion can be acquired when the specific input key B is operated after the notification means notifies that the recipe data regarding the second portion can be acquired. ,
A heating cooker featuring: The notification means includes a key specifying section for specifying the specific input key A and the specific input key B, and a display section that displays control conditions in the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2. The heating cooker according to claim 29, characterized in that: When the control device obtains preview information 1 via the communication unit, the control device displays information for specifying the specific input key A or the specific input key B to be operated on the display unit of the notification unit. The heating cooker according to claim 29, characterized in that. The control device is characterized in that, when the preview information 1 is acquired through the communication unit, the key identification unit 21 specifies the specific input key A or the specific input key B to be operated by emitting light. The heating cooker according to claim 30. The specific input key is a touch type input key arranged on the input operation section,
The input operation unit determines whether or not it is necessary to switch the voice input mode based on a touch state of at least one of the specific input key A or the specific input key B, and issues a signal corresponding to the voice input mode. The heating cooker according to claim 29. The input operation section includes a touch detection section that detects a touch operation of at least one of the specific input key or the specific input key B, a time measurement section that measures a continuous time of the touch operation, and a time measurement section that measures the continuous time of the touch operation. an input mode determination unit that determines whether a threshold value of the voice input mode is satisfied based on the measurement result of the input mode unit;
The cooking device according to claim 33, wherein the voice input mode compatible signal is transmitted based on the determination result of the input mode determining section. In the voice input mode, at least one of information A indicating that the voice input mode is set or information B regarding a range of selectable control conditions is displayed on the display section of the notification means. The heating cooker according to claim 33 or 34, characterized by: . A heating cooker having multiple input operation units and a communication function;
A communication terminal connected to the heating cooker via wireless communication,
The communication terminal is
(1) Displaying the first screen and the second screen sequentially on the terminal side display unit,
(2) Displaying recipe data related to the selected cooking item on the first screen in the order of a first display part related to cooking process 1 and a second display part related to cooking process 2,
(3) when the first display part displayed on the first screen is selected, switching the display to the second screen displaying information specifying the input operation section used in the cooking step 1;
(4) Displaying on the second screen an input key that allows setting information A regarding the cooking step 1 of the recipe data to be transmitted;
(5) when the input key is operated, transmitting the setting information A regarding the cooking process 1 selected on the first screen to the heating cooker;
A heating cooking system featuring: A heating cooker having a display section, a plurality of specific input keys provided on an input operation section, and a communication function;
A communication terminal connected to the heating cooker via wireless communication,
The communication terminal includes a recipe selection unit that displays recipe data regarding the food to be cooked on a terminal display unit,
The communication terminal is
(1) sequentially displaying a first screen and a second screen on the terminal side display unit;
(2) On the first screen, recipe data for the to-be-cooked object to be covered by the recipe data is displayed in the order of a first display part related to cooking process 1 and a second display part related to cooking process 2;
(3) Displaying on the first screen an input key for transmitting preview information 1 to notify that the cooking process 1 displayed on the first screen has been selected;
(4) When the transmission process is performed using the transmission input key, the display is switched to the second screen;
When the heating cooker receives the preview information 1, the heating cooker displays information specifying the specific input key corresponding to the cooking step 1 on the display section, and the specific input key displayed on the display section is If operated, it emits selection information A,
When the communication terminal receives the selection information A, it becomes possible to transmit the setting information A regarding the cooking process 1 to the heating cooker;
A heating cooking system featuring: Displaying the transmission input key at a position corresponding to the first display portion on the first screen;
38. The heating cooking method according to claim 37, further comprising displaying the transmission input key for notifying that the cooking step 2 has been selected at a position corresponding to the second display portion. system. The communication terminal is
36. When it is determined that the setting information A has arrived at the cooking device, transmission result information of the setting information A is displayed on a third screen that is displayed after the second screen. Or the heating cooking system according to 37. 38. The heating cooking system according to claim 37, wherein when the transmission input key is displayed on the second screen, information prompting an input operation of the transmission input key is displayed. The heating cooker includes a storage device and a plurality of heating means,
The input operation section includes an individual operation section corresponding to only one of the heating means, and a common operation section corresponding to a plurality of the heating means,
In the heating cooker, a specific cooking program is selected from the storage device in response to selection of one of the specific input keys on each of the individual operation section and the shared operation section. It is a thing,
38. The heating cooker operates the specific input key or another input key to execute the cooking program when the setting information A is not acquired. heating cooking system. When the communication terminal operates the input key on the second screen after receiving the selection information A, the setting information A regarding the cooking process 1 is transmitted to the heating cooker, and the setting information A is If it is determined that the setting information A has been successfully transmitted, displaying transmission success information on the third screen indicating that the setting information A has been successfully transmitted;
The heating cooking system according to claim 39, characterized by: 41. The second screen displaying the transmission input key displays a schematic diagram or image information showing the input operation section where the specific input key is present. heating cooking system. a first heating means and a second heating means;
an individual operation section dedicated to one heating means among the heating means;
a shared operation section for the first heating means and the second heating means;
a communication section that wirelessly communicates with the outside;
notification means,
a control device that executes cooking using recipe data acquired via the communication unit,
The individual operation unit has a first specific input key,
The shared operation unit has a second specific input key,
The control device includes:
(1) a notification step of specifying one of the first specific input key or the second specific input key and notifying it in the notification means;
(2) When the first specific input key or the second specific input key specified by the notification means is operated, unique selection information is transmitted to the first specific input key or the second specific input key, respectively. a confirmation step to
Execute sequentially,
The control device converts the recipe data necessary for executing one cooking menu into a first part for setting a cooking process 1 using the first heating means and a cooking process using the second heating means. It has a function to obtain the second part in two stages, which sets 2.
The control device transmits the selection information in response to operating the first specific input key or the second specific input key specified in the notification step;
A heating cooker featuring: Before the notification step, the notification step is executed in accordance with advance notice information A corresponding to the first portion M1 and advance notice information B corresponding to the second portion M2 obtained from the communication unit 51, respectively. 45. The heating cooker according to claim 44. The shared operation section includes an input key for selecting a composite cooking mode using the first heating means and the second heating means, and an input key for selecting a combined cooking mode using the first heating means and the second heating means. 45. The heating cooker according to claim 44, further comprising: an input key for selecting a cooperative cooking mode to be operated respectively through the input key. Claim 44, characterized in that at least one of the input key that allows selection of the composite cooking mode and the input key that allows selection of the cooperative cooking mode has a function that can be set to a voice input mode. The heating cooker mentioned. The control device includes:
45. The cooking device according to claim 44, further comprising: executing a reception standby step in preparation for receiving the recipe data after transmitting the selection information. The notification means includes a display unit that displays operation support information in the notification step,
After transmitting the selection information, the control device executes a reception standby step in preparation for receiving the recipe data,
45. The heating cooking device according to claim 44, wherein in the reception standby step, the display section displays a reception operation display section indicating that the display section is on standby to receive the recipe data. 50. The cooking device according to claim 49, wherein, in the reception standby step, if acquisition of the recipe data is not successful, the reception operation display section displays that the reception operation has failed. The first specific input key is a touch type input key,
The input operation unit includes a touch detection unit that detects a touch operation on the touch type input key, a time measurement unit that measures a continuous time of the touch operation, and transmits measured time data of the time measurement unit to the control device. an input signal transmitter,
45. The cooking device according to claim 44, wherein the control device includes an input signal analysis section that determines from the measured time data whether conditions for a voice input mode are satisfied. The input operation section includes a start key that commands the start of heating cooking, and a stop key that commands the end of heating cooking,
48. The heating cooking device according to claim 47, wherein when the start key is used to initiate heating cooking from the input operation section, the setting of the voice input mode is canceled. 49. The cooking device according to claim 48, wherein the control device includes a permission condition determination unit that determines whether to permit acquisition of the recipe data after the reception standby step. The control device starts a reception restriction period for the recipe data from the time when the first specific input key and the second specific input key are each operated, and the reception restriction period starts when a heating cooking operation is started. 45. The heating cooker according to claim 44, characterized in that: 54. The control device is characterized in that, during the reception restriction period, acquisition of the recipe data is limited to two times, for acquiring the first part and the second part. The heating cooker described in . 45. The cooking device according to claim 44, wherein the notification means includes a key identification section that identifies the first specific input key and the second specific input key in the notification step. The linked cooking mode includes the cooking step 1 in which the first heating means heats and cooks at a first location, the cooking step 2 in which heat cooks in a second location using the second heating means, and the cooking step 2. An operation pattern including a heating pause step between step 1 and the cooking step 2,
When the cooking process 1 is started using the data of the first part, the control device may notify, using the notification means, that preparations are being made for acquiring the data of the second part during the cooking process 1. The heating cooker according to claim 44, characterized in that: 58. The heating according to claim 57, wherein when either the first specific input key or the second specific input key is operated in the heating pause step, the step of acquiring data of the second portion can be started. Cooking device.

Images